GRAMMAR OF AFRIKAANS 
WE would call the attention of 
TEACHERS & STUDENTS 
who use this Book to 
MASKEW MILLER'S 
Exercises on Afrikaans 
FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS. 
By J. REYNOLDS, M.A., of the South Afrieun 
CollegP Boy's High Sehoul, Cape Town. 
Price 3/6 
This has been compiled with a view of supple­
menting the Exercises in this Volume, and ·is 
prepared by a practical and experienced teacher of 
the subject through the English medium. 
MASKEW MILLER'S 
GRAMMAR 
OF 
AFRIKAANS 
BY 
M. C. BOTHA, M.A., 
Professor of Afrikaan.~, Univer.~ity of Capr Town, 
AND 
]. F. BURGER, M.A., Ph.D., 
Lecturer in Rducation, Univer.nty of Cape Tou:n. 
FIFTH. REVISED AND GRE~TLY EXTENDED EDITION. 
l\IASKE\V .:\TILLER, LE\liTED, 
ElHTATIONAL l'UHLlSHER~, CAPE 'l'OWN. 
l'HEFM'E TO Tim FlHt-\'1' RDI'l'TOX. 
This Afrikaaus 11-rammar, \\Tltten as it Is lJ1 
.English, iR intended t9 supply the long-felt want of 
some kind of guide tu tho study of Afrikaans by 
English-speaking- people. ln eomH•ction with our 
special Afrikaans classes a l the U ni Yersi ty this need 
has been reveatedly imple~sed upon us, <:'speeially by 
those who have passed beyond the school-going stage. 
They will no douht heartily welcome this attempt to 
render them some assistance in their desin• to become 
bi-ling-ual. 
Knowing what objec.:t we have in view, therefore, 
nobody will expect to find here an_ything in the nature 
of an exhamtive scientifie treatment of the Afrikaam; 
language. \V e have tried to tabulate only the most 
essential rulPs rPquisite for the correct writing and 
;,peaking of Afrikaans, and we leaYe it to thP student to 
make use of what additional reader he may find suitable. 
ExereiM•s haYP heen supplied at the end of t-ach chapter, 
and uumerous translated examplt>s haYe also been fur­
nished, hut they 'Nill not suffiee for the purpose of 
giving the student that eor~~:,tant practice in reading and 
speaking which is indispPnsahle in i he lParning of a 
languagt>. ""\"\~ e are eonvi1teed, however, that when 
thoroughly mastered, -t.his Grammar will give the 
:-;tuO.Pnt an ext•PllPnt foundation toward)-; thP aefjuisition 
of thP language. 
In additiun ir1 iltP llrclinary Hfudpnt WP have also 
Jt>IUelllh!'rP<l turchers of Af'rika.ans in sc·hools of hutlt 
lllPtlia. I11 the ahsr'Ut·l' oi a -;iarHlnrd grammar ihe 
tPachPr is nlir·H i11 donht u-; br what is t"Lll'!Pd Afrikaantl. 
We trust that he will fiml a u,eful guide in this houk. 
On tlw mo<lPl of "hat IH' have ginn, odditional rxer­
ciRes for hiR <·lasses could easily be multivliP<l. There 
is Illl reaRun wl1y he should not also pu1 ilw hook iu the 
hands of pupil~ of thP ~Peondary Sehoul, where a rig-ht 
~tu<ly of gmmntrn· is no1 nltoge1hPr on1 of place. 
~IuC'h of tlw information thot WP have t'olltpiled 
u ml sys1.emu1 isPrl hPrP md urall.1 makes Jto pretenre to 
originality. In acldit iou to our own contributions W<' 
have madP uRe of what hotly of knowledge was to he 
found !'lRewhrrP nn the suh,iPd. Among others, we 
have cousuHed the following works :-De 'Vaal's 
"Afrif'all(ler Orammar," )falhPrbe's "Airikaanse Taal­
hoek," Yan Hyu's "Ew,;y Dnteh, I.," "f+rammatika 
vau die Afrikaansr Tnalrksanwn," Elfl'er' s " 8taudanl 
Unteh Grammar," allll l1ingema11 and \'an Hraam's 
"Idiome11." fn<lirrdlY "'<' havr also recrived invulu­
ahlo assistaner from P;·ofe.-;sor .J .• J. Smith, whil'h WP 
hrrewith goratpfull,v acknnwlrclgP. 
'Vhatovpr SUf'('P>'H we muy hope to ~whie1·e, with 
the usP of tlte hook mistakrs and shortcomings will, lltl 
doubt, t:ome to light. .For au~ suggesteu improvempn{ 
"·p thank the l'riti<':tl rearlrr in anticipation. 
C1u]H' 'l'owu, 
Frhruar.Y, lfl:.?l. 
:\I. C. BUTTIA . 
.r. F. Bnunm. 
<'HAPTJ<;R 
I. Afnkuan~ \Vhat it ts 
IT. Pronmu iution 
III. "pPlling 
IY. Th<' ~oun Dll' :-.elf~talHligl-' Xaamwoorrl 
\". Tlw Pronoun Dil• Vuurnamnwoonl 
YI. The Arljedive Die Hyvoeglike Kaamwoor<l 
Yfi. JnfiL·<·tion of AdjPdi,•Ps ... 
\'IT f. The AujeL·tive (t o11tinuerl) 
IX. 'l'hc Ath·erlJ - - Dit' B:vwoord 
X. The Prepositi .. n Die Yoorsethel 
XL The C'onjnueiion Die Yuegwoorrl 
XU. The \" <'rl• Die \\' c>rkwoorrl 
XIIT. The Y c>rb (<·ontiunerl) 
XIY. The Partieipll' - Dll' Deelwoorrl 
XV. The Yerh (rontinued) 
X\'I. 'l'he Vl'rb (r•mtinn<'d) 
XVII. ~yutax 
XYITI. Syntax (eontinued) 
XTX. \Yorrl-formation 
XX. Additional Exereiseb 
36 
4il 
Gl 
83 
87 
90 
100 
103 
10fJ 
ll(i 
.. 1:2.5 
133 
141 
151 
159 
16R 
XOTE. 
Wherever the tenus Dutch and 
Nederlands are used, Lhe language 
of Holland is to be understood. 
CHAPTER l. 
.U'H fKAANN- WIIA 1' l'l' IS. 
\Vhat i:-. Afrikaan,; ~ lt has heeu <·allPd ]Jy all ,;ort.R 
of nameH - a patoi~, u dPbilitated furm of . Dutch, a 
Hottentot language, kitC"hen Dukh, without a grammar, 
without a standard :-.pelling, a mPrP dialect <4poken b,Y 
the unednl'tdPtl, Pl<'., dC'. Hs offiuial t'eeognition a'l a 
language C'UlllE' W'l',Y loug afteJ' it harl iu reality heen 
tltE' Rpoken tongue of thE' population. l11 ihe nature of 
the C'ase it i'4 impo.,,-;ible rlefinitPl,V to 'lay when Afrikaans 
was first used in its pleRent form. In a certain sense 
<lllP may say that the Plt'lllPntR nf l'hange were pre;;ent 
in the Dutrh language nf tlw N etherhnHls in thP seveu­
iPPnth century, and that tho gTowth of Afrikaans dateR 
from tht:> arriYal of Yan Uiebet:>ck at the ('ape in 1652. 
'rhcrP is no clouM thai the langnagf' >1poken here during 
the eightPeJtth and niueteeuth c·euturie;.; waR no longer 
tht:> Dutrh of the XetltrrlandR. We find the first eon­
Reious attempt to write A f1 ikum1s a bout 1 R60, and it 
then had practically the same form as thai in which we 
know it to-lltt:r. In 1R75 au as~<wiation (Die Genoot­
~knp van RegLe Afrikmt<>rs) wa"i formed with the definitP 
o hjeet of promoting Afrikaans to the position of the 
offiriall~· n'cng-nisPJ writtf'n language of the Dutch 
'ledioll of iht> <'l>mmunity. These propagandistR, of 
whom the Uevtl. S. ,J. <ln 1'oit waR bv far the most 
prmnine11t, met with gTeat oppoHition ~n all sides, but 
within half ·a t•entury (a lnng time, in<leerl !) they have 
flnrreP<lrrl in overcoming the harriPrs of conservatism 
and Hiupidity, Ho that Afrikaans to-day enjoys the 
rig-ht;.; of thr Sl'C'UIHl official language of the f'ountry. It 
ha'l been inhu<lncf'd into Parliament, into the Church, 
into ihe Rrhonl. and into tht> T'"niverRity. The simple 
fact wr~s that. though ~Pderlamls auJ guglish Wl'TP 
taught at school, practically the whole of the povulatio11, 
the e<lucatrrl r~s well aR tho unPducated, spoke a more or 
less uniform Afrikaans all the time. It was therefore 
oul,\ naturally thr~t a <·him io makp it al;.;o the writtPn 
language should have heeu put furwanl nw1 ultimately 
granted. 
The argument-; advanced b.v the opponents of 
.\.frikaan;.; nR a litPrary language wPre not <liffiPult t!l 
r<'fntP. Every written lang·nnge, of <·our~n. lwgan as a 
<lialert; and .\.hikannR i;.; a dialect of X ederlanJR in 
ihP- same Hense aR Bnglish is of .Anglo-Haxon, Italian 111' 
French iA of Latin, an1l ~PdPrlamlR is of \\rec;t-HerrnaJll<'. 
lf it iR dl'hilitated because it haR lo:-t moRt of tlw 
inflexionR of N etherlundR, from whieh it has evolved, it 
i;.; i11 thiR rPSIWd on ihe -:aml' level with EngliRh, which 
iA likewise a gteatly drfledrcl languug-e. LoHR of 
flpxion, indet't1, most oHeu n rguPs a hig'h standard of 
clevPlopmeut iulauguagr. * As l'or spPlliug un<l g-mmmar, 
everylHHly knmvs that a lauguage PonsiRts of sounds, 
and that tltP re]nesentation of thr~e 'munds nu paper by 
means of symbols or letters is sll!nrthing altogether 
nrbitrary, and in all languages at most a <·onvention, 
while g1ammar simpl,\' records the laws o£ the Apokell 
lang'uage, au<l a;.; such <loNl not precede hut follow it. 
Grammar is a <lPsrriptive, not ll prescripiivP scienee, 
:l!ld it must dr-;erilw tlw lang-nage as it ic; spokrn by the 
people. 
'rhe uame HuH en toi. lauguagp "\.fri kaans pro ha bly 
owes to the fad that it contains a few dozen Hottentot 
words, or perhaps to the thPory that it hr~s ussumed itf.. 
prespnt form under the influeuPe of }falay-Portuguesp­
the language spoken by many of the slaws·in the Cape 
Colony during the seventeenth and righteenth l'enturies. 
But English huR thP. same Hottentot words (see Pett-
• ~eo JcBpersfn: Progr('~s in Langnng<' with ~f'Pl'ial n•f('r­
enee to English. 
I•'Oit EXGLISH ~'ITDT~XTR 
man's "l:llussary of Afriranderisms "), all(l ~edt>rlaHdH 
i,: uot without words taken over from ~lalay Portuguese. 
Besides, all nations that traded with the Bast hav<' 
atlopteJ wor<ls from the various languages of the gastern 
]leoplrs. Indeed, is thrrc any laug·uage of which iht' 
vora bularv does not contain words taken over from other 
language~ with which it has come in em1tad? An 
t'xaminatiou into the origin of the "English vocabulary 
will le:wc no dnubt as to the answer to this question . 
. \nd the 'IUllH' is true of Ne1lerlands, tlwugh hy 110 
means to the same extent. ~ow when Wf'> rompan' 
.\£rikaans with Nedrrlauds, we Khall find that both in 
l'E>'Ipect of vorabular,v and t1t :-.yntax it iK in the main 
Xederlancls, and that manv of the forms whirh ar<' 
Afrikaans to-dav are foun'd in ~ ederlunlls of t hP 
SPYPntePnth 1·ent~uv, in man v eases CYf'n a" far back as 
the .Middle ,\gps. · \Ve nec.d not Pnter here into tht> 
'tuestion of lhe partirular dialPds of ~ etherlands iu 
which we have to seek for the lwginuings of Afrikaans; 
suffir,e it to refer to the fart that rmy language is liablE' 
to change undrr rertain <'Onditions. In the 1·ase of Afri­
lmans we shall here hrieflv skrteh thes<' ronditions. The 
Hollanders who rame to Routh Af1ica in ihE' seventeenth 
cp-ntury, found th<'mHPlYE'S plared in a new country, i11 
whirh the- climatE' and r•onditions of lift> were totally 
1lift'erent from thoc:;c of !1wir native rountry in Europ~. 
Through clistunre and lark of means of f'ommunication 
their connection with thE' mother-country and the 
mother-tonguE' was 1 o a g-r0at extent cut ;,ff. They 
had very little opportunity for education a111l the study 
of Dutch literatur<'. They rlaily rame in f'nutact with 
various nationalitiC'f', with languages differing widely 
from their own, while other Europeans from France 
a111l G-Prmany kf'pt f'mning in. It must bo clear that 
all these f'ause;; 1n·omotc<l the remarkable f'hango which 
lheir language rapidly underwent in the direction of 
clP.flertion. The interPsting fact ahout it all is, that 
1hP nE'w words tak<'n np hy Afrikaans are mostly namE'R 
4 l\IASKJ<~W 11 ILLim'S AL•'lHKAAX:-< G HA1L\IAH 
of objects anti customs with \\ hi1·h tht• people in Europe 
had no acquaintance, and for which they l'llllR<'IlUPiltly 
had no nameR. This faet in ih.cH morp than tulrqnately 
disproves tht> theory that Afrikaun;; ha;; 1lPnloped from 
~ ederlands into its present form nnrlPr the influence of 
any partienlar language, no matter wlu•thrr ii lw Hot­
tentot, Kaffir, ~fala,v-Portugne<:e, FrPnch, or Engli ... h. 
The influence uf l<'re1wh and (:Jerman iH n npgligihlt> 
quantity, hut wP C'annot he suffirientl:v on our guard 
against angliciRm"l. From Kaffir we huve "urh words 
as 1'mpie, 1'ndonw, ei l'. ; from llottentot : ahba, da,qya, 
boe,qoe, kwayga, etc.; frnm Mala,v-Portngupse: aia, 
·atjar, hocbotie, kocrang, etc. It Rhould, howevPr, lw 
pointerl out that many of ihP wordR whi~:h wPrP onee 
looked upon nR :Mala,v-PortuguesP, han• RinC'e hPPn 
found to be .Malay, PortugnPse, or ,J avanPsP, whilP 
others have eonl£' to us from the East through thP 
medium of ~ eclerlan1ls. Rcveral also, aR l/()ttel, bnctic, 
etc., are now recogni<:Pd a<: coming frnm Dutch dia]prts. 
It is certain that the inflnPncP of thE' slave-lnngungp has 
been grossly exaggerated. 
Although Afrika a us iR PRSPII tially X erlPrlandR in 
reRpPd of Yoca 1mlnry and Ryni ux, it diffPl'R widPl.v 
from N Pderlands in reRpPd of Rcnmds ancl n rriclPnrr>. It. 
has lost most of the inflections, nnd a large numl1er of 
consonantR at the end and in thP miclll1e nf wnrds. ItR 
vowPls differ di<:iinrtly from tht!HP of ~PdPrland;;, and 
ROIUe OT itR OODROTiantR, too. 
In rondusion, we may be :dlmvP1l i11 11oint to the 
growing literature in Afriknans, 3"1 wdl a;; to wnture 
the remark that it is only by <:lUil.ving its language ann 
literature that wn ran gd tn knnw a pPnplP i11 any true 
;;enRfl of the wnnl. 
UHAPT~R II. 
I. PRO~TNCIA 'PION. 
A language cunAistH o£ sounds. 'l'hPse Aounds are 
produced by the air pa:-.Aing from ihe lungs through the 
windpipe and the larynx into the mouth and na~al 
pasRagc; and as these can a~~ume vpry ma11y difi'e.reut 
positions, the rmmher of ~uull(ls that can Le produced, 
eonstitute a11 almost em1lcss variety. We learn the 
Mmnds of uur native tongue almost unconsciously lJy 
l1earing it spokPn every day. \Vhen, huwe;er, a 
fnreign languagP is to be lParnt, aml one in whieh there 
are smmds unfamiliar to our earH, we fi11d it Ly no 
means an Pa~y mutter to lea111 to pronounce these new 
• .munds. Tu say that nto:-.t penple find it impossible to 
pronuunee new sounds ('())T<'P1ly after having heard and 
repeated them thrPe or four I imes would be uttering a 
platitudP. And if that is the caHe when thP sounds are 
adually hearJ from t!te lips of those who speak the 
language, the impoH-;ihility of tPnching them by means 
of s_vm hols on paJwr muHt bP :mffiriently Pvident. When, 
therdm·P, WP undPI take to pxplain the sounds of Afri ­
kaans in this l'hapter, we make ha,.,te tD warn the readPr 
that we are attempting- un upJlrn~imatiuu at muHt. 
~Hrikuu11s lllnln'H use ot most of the s_vmbolR used 
in Eng-lish, l1ut thl'RC Hymhols or ldtPl'H do ltot always 
l'PJIT'C'l'PJtt the HUlltP HOU!Hls. Our task he1e is to give 
the- fl:;mhol.,-the alphahct-and a~ fur aR possible to 
exiJluin fur which suunJs lhey stand. To some extent 
B 
G :\lARKEW .l\11 LLER •:-; A l<'RfK ,U.:'\i-1 OHAi.\ll\1 AR 
this can l1e done l1y refell'II<'<' to l<~nglish >.omul-; whem 
these exist. 'Yhere they tlo not oc•cm· in Bnglish, they 
can be <lntined phondic·ully, in which ('usc a kHowlec1gL~ 
of IlhOliPtic·s is, o£ colllN', <'>'Heniiul. The' point whic·h 
we wish to emphasize is thai, m1l<'ss t.hC' siU<lent i'> a 
truinecl phonetician, Pven with i.lw mol't sciPntifie 
phonetic transcriiJtion, tl~e living voico of u 1<'acher is 
ll<'ces<Jary in the lL•arning of a llPW language. And surh 
tL teacher should prC'fPru1,1y lw onl' whn spt>aks ihe lan­
guage as his native- tPllg'tll'. The itlPal conditions would 
certainly be those UllUL'l' which lw has Lad a truining in 
the phonetics of his pupil's language us wPll us of the 
language l1e- wishes to tPal'h, and tlw lParuer a traiui11g· 
in the phonC'tics of his woth<'r-tougul' at least. lTmler 
these circumstun<'<'S the sounJH will h<' llllll'e <'U"lily a11u 
intelligently learnt, a]l(l the Jungpr-; of a wrong }11'11-
lmllciation will be avoidPu. As a maUPr of fuci, mis­
pmnunciutions pan 1H) largdy c•ou·peted hy ihe hc•lr, oi 
a knowledge of phonl't ic'l,- a fuci "·hi<'h is Hot yet 
snffi<'iently reulisPd by teuc·hprs of language. 
Afrikaans is wriit<'n fairly phon£>iically, and wlwn 
once the different vowel HOUJIGs lw \'l' hPen mastered, the 
Htudent will find little cliffintlly wilh ihc pruuunriaiion 
of n<'w >vor<ls. A modern languug·e is best lparnt by 
sppuking it and hearing it Hpoken as ofien us possible. 
:For those who luck this OlJportunity, we have given a 
number of exercises on the Hounds of Afrikaans. Thef,e 
shoulJ he read aloud, anJ constantly re}I<'UlE'd until ihP 
student is thoroughly .familiar with them. In tlll' list 
of vowel soumls and consonant HomHls wl1ieh we, have 
given below, he will :lind thP nec·es;mry assiHtUIIf'E' in 
pronunciation. Cure muHl be tukPn not to mix UIJ 
"sound" and "leHer. '' 'l'be first vowt•l-sign in 
"fairy," for instunre, is "a," hut ihc fir.,t Yowel-<>ound 
lS "E.'' 
THE ALPHABET. 
Tlw ~\.frikaans alphn 1wt C'omis1 R of 2~ lt>ttl'rR :-
Symbol. Name. 
a E11g'. ah 
h hPfl 
!l dPP 
(' 
f 
h 
f'(' 
pf 
g'P£' ( ~ iH a hard 
0]11:'11 Jmt'k ('tlllS!I­
llllllL lilw ch in 
N!'oi<'h "loch'') 
hah 
s}wri t'IH'tl Pa-•HJllli<} 
Symbol. Name. 
l Pll 
Ill ('lll 
II ('ll 
0 
p 
l' 
s 
u 
JJParly tHI in" lJ<ttll'" 
}JPl' 
Pl' lll " Yt'l',V " 
('" 
tt'P 
A fr. i •vith li]'H 
l'OtlllrlPI[ 
iu '~ PUt , ' Y fpp 
.1 ve 'v Eug. V 
k bh ~· Eng-. a 
i 
J'.N.-LPal'll tho llUllJPS of the ,\frikaan" alphal1Pt, 
awl wh('n Hpt>lling· .\f1ibwn-: wulll, ncn·r u1w the E11gli'lh 
ll:tmPs of ihe lt>ti.Pr-:, hut nlwa,\'H the A£1 ikun11S. 
VOWELS . 
.\'oft.-,\ doRt'<l "yllablo i,; ow• which enrls iu a 
<·onsunant, au opPn syllahlc ono which enrls in a vnwpl. 
Loug a in closed s;-llables i-: wriHPn with a dou1le 
\ ()\Y!'l-sign: maan (muon). 1 n open sylla hles the 
lt>UPr iH not <luuhlP1l: va-der (father). H iH pronounced 
like '' a " in "eaHtle." 
Rhort a oceurs in dor,ed ,yllablPs: kat (eat), kat-te 
( ca is): lt is occasionally founu n lso in unaccented open 
s;-·llahles of words u£ foreig-n mig-in: pa-rallel, ba-gasie 
( lmg-gn gc). It is pronouneetl 1 ike long a, only short­
Pllt><l, and iR Ct!Uivaleut 1o ihe Northern Eng-li"h pro-
n uncia ti on of " a " in " lm L'' Tt is abo VPrv like the 
lll'Rt "a " in " aha ! " · 
R ~lASKEW ~llLLJ<JR'S AFRIKAAXS GRA~DfAR 
Lung e, like lung a, is written with a doublE' vowPl­
sign in dosed Ayllables, but not in mrdial open t"yllahles: 
been (leg or bone), be-ne (l«:>g;; or bonN'). This ~muml 
is very like that of "e'' and "ea" hefure ''r" in 
English, as in: here, hPar, etc. The Y!JWP!-~ounu in 
Afrikaans been is bv no means the 'lame as that in 
"English "been," wl~ich i;:: fnrmrtl smnewhat hig·her up 
in i.he mouth. In some 11arts nf the 'y pstern ]Jrovinrr 
it iA very nearly that bPfon' Prrtain rnn-.onants and in 
open syliableA, but is cull"liclNed to lw dialectal. 
Short e occurs in cloAPd svlla hlrs: mes (kn:fe ), 
mes-se (knives), and oPrasionally · in open syllahles of 
foreign origin: feminisme, energie. 
e. This sound is the same as thnt in ~hort c, but 
}pngthenrd. It occurs in open svllahles and hdure r: 
se (sa.v), ee (harrows, plural of egl, leer (lpaguer), 
Perel (Paarl), sker (sris'lor.,), bier (hlPat). Hefllle r 
·t- consonant it is written without thr <·irc·mnHcx arcrnt: 
perd (horsl'), tert (tart). 
Weakly acrpntpcl c nPPurs in open nnd elo~<ed ~'~:rl­
lahle;; whirh are v\t>nklv arc«:>rJtr<l. It i" hP:un in the 
scmnd of the srrnnd c ·in beter (heitPr), lepel ("lllOIJTI), 
and is nearlv the snmC' nil the 'lonntl o:f thP R<'rnnrl "e" 
iil English '' better." 
Short i in rlosecl arcentrcl f.,Ylln hle'l i'l pron1JUTIC'f'd 
vt>r,V much like the i in English "bird,'' only ,hortPr: 
wit (white), pit (pip), pit-te (pip"l). Thio. Round is 
also found in unarrrntrd ;;ylb Mrs; lmt then it il4 
written both i and e; i hefurp k, g, ng nntl s; e in 
other positions: maklik (<'a"y), stadig ("llow), lepel 
(spoon), borne ( trrPR). 
• 
Long i is thf' same Honntl as the prorprning, nnly 
longer: wie (wedges, plural of wig). Tt occurs oul~, 
in a few words. 
i is the sound repreAented hy "Pa" in "Pat," hut 
it iA Ahorter and higher. 'Vhen it hears thP main 
arcent or oeenrs in t•lnsed syllableR, or in open syllu l1les 
of derivetl words, or at the f'nd of a word, it. is writteu 
ie: tiepe (type), fiesies \physical), fiesika (physies). It 
is g"PllPl':tlly lf'ngtheneJ heforc Y: mier (n11t) in elosed 
acl'ented syllables. 
Long- 0 is written with a double vowel-sign in 
eloseJ, hut not in open sylla hles: boom- bo-me ( tJ ces). 
It is nearly the sound which is heard in the- vowel­
sound in T<fnglish "boor." 
Short 0 occurs in dosed syllables: pot - pot-te 
(pots), bok (goat). It differs from the vowel-sound in 
English "poi" only in ·that the mouth is not su wide 
oJH'll when it is pronounced. 
6 is the sound which occurs in upen syllables, anJ 
is the same as short o, exrepi that it is long-er: more 
(morning), soe (sows, plural of sog). lts English 
equivalent is the vowel-sound in "law." 
Long U is writtl'll 'vith a donble vowel-sign in 
closed, but not in o_lJen syllables: muur (wall), mu-re 
(walls). The 'l01l1H1 is obtained from that of i by 
rounding. 
"Vote.-By •' roul1lling· " a vowel we mean the 
narrowing of the month-o_lJening· by approximation of 
tho lips. 
Shm t u orems 111 dosed syllalile:-.: put - put-te 
(wells), dun (thin). It i:-. pronounced like weakl.) 
nf'cented e with lips munded. 
0 ot'L'Un> before weakly u<'ePnteJ e: brug - brue 
(bridg-es). It is rare. 
eu is the rounded vowcl-souud of long e: neus 
(nose), leuse (motto). 
oe ot·curs in open and iu dosed syllables. It is 
rmlinarily ..,hort. hut geJwrally h'ug·1hrnrt1 before r. It 
i'l nPurly the t'Dund ht>arJ in f•~nglish "put"; boek 
(hook), boe-ke (bullks), boer (farmer). 
c 
10 :\IAHKE\\' :\1 ILLEH'~ ,\FJUICU::'\S llHA:\DL\H 
DIPHTHONGS. 
aai is rumpo:-ed of the vowel-snundR long a and 
:-:lwrt i, and it is loug: saa,i (•ww), maai (rrap), baaie 
(baths). It is equivalent to the nm el-Rouud iu Engli-.;h 
"hy." 
ai is thr ~lwrirnrd -.;omHl oE ai: baie (mlH·h), aia 
(name- hy whit·h an old t'uloureJ woman is <·alled). It 
iH heard in English " bite." 
e.i or y is c·omlHJsetl of the HtJtmd-; of e and i, and 
iH the same a:-: in EngliRh "ratP." ThP fad ihat WP 
hrrP ha\'<'· two H,nnbuls rPpresenting iht' samP Htmnd, 
naturally creates a SIJelling difficulty, as is seen in rys 
(rice) and reis (journey). 
ooi is compoHPd of the Houml:-: l(Jllg' 0 and rdwrt i. 
and i;.; long: mooi (pretly), rooi (red). 
oi iil the sound of :-:hort 0 + i, and is short. Its 
};ugli<~h Pquivalent is the vowel-sound in "boy,'' only 
;.;hortPr. It is heard in surh words as toiings (rag,), 
goiingsak (a eofl'ee-hag). 
ui i;.; thr rounded vowel-sound of ei ur y: lui (lazy), 
vuil (dirty), ruik (smell). 
oei iH the soun<l oe + i: broei (hah·h), koei 
(eow), moeilik (tliffirult). 
ou rom~istfi of the sounds 0 awl u, aml is pro­
nounced like the vowel-sound in English "lHmt " : 
tout (fanlt), nou (now). 
eeu is the ;.;ound made Ull of long e all(l oe: leeu 
(linn), eeu (c·entury), skreeu (ery out). 
CONSONANTS. 
b and d: In Afrikaans voiretl c·onsmu.mi.-; are not 
pronnuneed at ilw t>llll of a word; b :lllcl d :u·p thrn'-
fnre pronomH·Pd as p and t 1<':--pr(•ti,·rl,v. 'I'h11'l wp 
wrile hand hut Jll'UlJomu·l· hant (Eng. lumdl. \YlH·u 
FO!t EXGLISII STL'DEXTS 11 
l'ollowt't! l1y s, d is also l•rmiOUTil ed as t: gids ( guiuP) 
a~ gits . 
• Yofr'. -,\ !'ollSOHHut is "voi!•cd," when Ill thl' 
procludinn of it the vocal clwrcl-; vibrate, as C'.g'. m 
b a111l d i11 l(ngli~h "l1ring" uwl ''down." 
f allll V an• huth shmp like English "f '' a fad 
"·hi(•h eutnil.~ a SJ!elliug !liffintlt:v in the t:use of initial 
for V. At thC' Pncl of a R,dlalJle the ;;ign i,; always f. 
g is thl' Ull\ uiC'eU LaC'k r•llCll C'onsunant, prowmuee!l 
likt' ihP chin St·ott·h "lof'h." It mn:v easily he deduced 
from thP •·nn'lOIHint ~onucl 'ck" in ''lnek" hy empha­
si:t.illg' antl iPolating the glide of breath which followR its 
1 t•k l pn•nuuciatioll. 'Ylu·n pn•ceclC'd hy r or au accented 
\'t•wl'l, al!(l l'ollllwt•(l In· a weaklv :l!'('('lliecl e, it stl11H'­
t i mpo.; hP!'IllllL'S a .. ;t llP ;tml is 11ro;wunC'ecl like " g '' iu 
Engli~h "g<>, '' as in berge (mnuniai11s), erger· (worRP). 
\Yht•Jl g <H'C'Ill'~> hPhYPen two Yowel'l, of which the firsi 
lit•m-; tlw iWl'Pll t and 1 he ~C'C'ond is wPaklv acC'C'nle·d e, 
i~ i-; Q't'JIPl'all,\ drolJpPJ i11 .\ frik:wns. ThuH·: dag -- dae 
ulay'ii, vraag- vrae lquc~tious), hoog- hoe- hoar 
thigh - l1igl11'1'). This ~1pplif's ul-;o to d: breed­
bree illfl•arl), e.g-. die berg is hoog en breed, hut dit is 
'r. hoe en bree berg. 
In a fpw wonls of l'oreign origin g, wl1eu a ~lop, 
is writtpn gh: ghoen (big nlltrl>lr), ghaa.p (an edible 
rtH>t fnunrl in 1l1<' Kanoo), anghorra, allll pronouw·L·tl 
likP l·~Hg'. ' 4 g•. H 
h is 1111t a separatl' ~mmd a'i in Engli'lh allll D11tch. 
11 is t•11ly a motlifil'aiion of the YOWPl-souud whic·h 
follows it, anrl i'i thPrE'fore ,;imultanPoush· with it. Tho 
!-.lllllt•Jd nn1-:t no( pronomlf'<' it tlistilll'll.v' as i11 EHglisll. 
li,; npurest Engli'lh eqnivaleut is thc "h" betwPen 
vowPl'l in words likf' "bPhavP," "lwholtl, '' de. 
j i~ Jll'llllOUII<'Pd Jike )<~llg'Ji~h "~- '' in "~'(':ll'": 
jaar ly<'nr), jammer (pit~·). 
k, I, m, n, p, s, awl t rPpl esent morP or lcRs th0 
~uwe sounds ns i11 EngliRh. 
When n is followed b~· one of the fricativrs (S, f, j. 
w, h, g, I, r), or by a strongly accented initial Yowd in 
i.ht' following syllable, it is very oftrn not prononncrd 
separatrly hut along with the preceding vowrl, which is 
then nasalised and also lengthPned. 'l'his is espPcially 
the casp with thP article 'n, and in prefiixes in n, m· in 
words which gPnerally do 11ot bpm· t hP main scntenee-
accent. If, thNrfore, o Wt'l'e to rPprespnt nasalis<'d 
short 0, '' ons" would lw 1n·ononnc('(1 as OS and 
,.. 
'' onsekC'l' '' as oseker. .\ t pre:·wnt, howPYPl', 11n final 
rules can he laid down.* 
r is ncnr silent in Afrikaans, as iR snmdimC's thP 
case in English. 
W is prononncrd like V in English, that is, with thr 
upper teeth against the under-lip. 
ng is pronount·ed like Bnglish " ng '' in " sing " 
ancl "singer." The SC'rond g·-Rmmd, as is heanl in 
"finger" ('fing-ger), is nrver h<'ard in Afrikaans. 
Sj is the Ctllnbination hrard in genie (g·t'nius), 
sjokolade (chocolate). It is prtmouncPd likP the "sh '' 
in "ship." 
tj is the combination hrard in tjalie (shawl), tjank 
(howl). The ky in "thank you" pronomwecl togethrr 
ns if one sound is wry like this tj. 
c, q, X and z are uot nsPd in Afrikaan<;, thc>sr sountl;; 
lwing l'l'Pl'C'Rrnted hy k or s, kw, ks, an<l s respeetiYC'ly. 
11. ACCEX'l'.-DIE KLK~ITOON I AKSEN'l'). 
'l'wo general rulrs muy he laid tlown fur thl' arcent 
m AfrikaanR :~ 
(1) The aen·nt u;;uall,v falls 011 the rooi-part nf 
the Word: ergste (worst); WOPdPnd (wild); helt~W(' 
(experience); onth6o£ (hrhead); 
* A nasalised vowel i~ one in the pronunciation of which tlu• 
breath passes through the nasal pas,age HS w<'ll as through the 
mouth. 
13 
(::l) ln long or rompuund. words thme ts a tendency 
to throw the ar,C'ent on the first part o£ lhe word; <lenne­
buom (fir-tree); waterslang (water-snake); w6nderlik 
(wonderful); ::1wPllenclaru, ITtimansdorp. 
These geueral rnlf's ate suhjed to the following 
modificatiottH :-
(1) In words of nmt-'l'entonic urigitt the accent 
generally falls on ihP last ,;;yllahle: Htuclent; hospitaM; 
uniwersel-1. 
(2) The prdixes and ~mffixes in compound words are 
usually uuacce11tf'd: beluial (ohtain); gewerk (worked); 
erken (arknowledge); hrrinner (remind); onhvikkel 
(develop) ; WU:t rlH•id ( trn t h) ; lw lyclrnis ( C'OnfeRRlOll) ; 
verhintenis (union); misdadig (rriminal). 
(;{) In verbs soparably eontpounded the arcent falls 
on the Jll'PTIX: uftskel, skel uit, uftgeskel (to Rl'i,ld); 
tleurloop, lnDp clf.ur, demgeloop (to walk t.hrough). 
l t is of cour"'e impossible to gi \'e rules here to <·ovrr 
overy case, and 1wbody lrarns tLJ speak a language with 
the correct accent by mPmorising rulPs. What the 
studPnt needs is to road AfrikaunR aloud, 'llJPak it, and 
ht'ur it spoken by others. In this way only will hP 
ac·quiro the corrert accent and pronnnPiation. 
III. "EXERCISES IN PRONl"NCIA'I'ION. 
Lung a pronounced like a in "castle." 
1. In closed syllables, i.£'. syllable~:~ euding m a 
t·onsormut, tbis ~ound is represPntPu by aa:-
aap (ape) kaap (cape) 
daar (there) kaart (card) 
gaan (go) kaas (cheese) 
haal (£eteh) laat (latt', let) 
haar (hPr, hair) maan (moon) 
haat (hah') maand (month) 
jaar lyt>ar) maar (lml) 
14 :\fASKE\r 1\ITLLF.R'" AFHTK,\,\;\'8 OILUDL\H 
naam ( na nw) 
naald (n<><'<llP) 
paal (pole) 
praat (:-;ppak) 
raam (wimlo\\) 
slaap (Rl<'Pp) 
slaan (h<>ai) 
staan ! 1:-d.allll) 
taal ( 1;111 o·tta "'~' \ h ,.., 
traan (a il·ar) 
waar ('YhPH', u uP) 
2. ln open syllahl .. s, i.P. ,yllahlPH Pnrliug iu a 
vuwel, and at Hw enll of a woal, this sound i'l l'PJll'P­
RPni<'d by a:-
baken (lwaPon) 
dae (days) 
dame (lady) 
dra (curry) 
ja (,VPR) 
jare (y<'ars) 
kamer (room) 
kiHei (lwrlod Pad) 
later (laier) 
ma (mothpr) 
maters ( Ponn ail<'s) 
pa ( f:d lw1) 
na (iowarrl,, aftpr) 
nader (HParPr) 
tafel ( ta l1lP) 
vader !faihl'l') 
water (wai Pl') 
Nhort a-- long a shlll't<'ll('(l. 'l'hi'l SOlllHlll('CUI-4 C'hiPfl,V 
appel (appl<') 
as (i.han, if:) 
bal (hall) 
bank (hench) 
bang (afmi«l) 
dag (day) 
dam (Jam) 
hand (haml) 
hard (hard) 
Jan (John) 
kam (comb) 
kan (can) 
kat (C'at) 
lam (lamh) 
in d(l'll'd ".dla l1lPR. 
lamp (lalllJI) 
man (mnn) 
mat (mat\ 
rak ( s lw lf l 
sal (shall) 
span ( 1 ram) 
stad (town) 
tak (lmmf'h) 
val (fall, irap) 
vark (pig) 
was (was, wa;;h 1 
wat rwhat) 
watter ("hi( h) 
op (tnr) 
'n (a, :m) 
my (llly) 
ons (we, our) 
hulle ltlw.v, tlwir) 
ek 11) 
Sy \ShP, !JiC') 
die (tlw) 
julie (ynu, ynur) 
hy (lw) 
EXERCISE 1 (1lEFEX1XG }), HP:Hl ulouJ:-
(1) 1lie kat ..,luap. 12) lliP lmnp staan op die 
tafPl. (;{) nuar ~hum 'n :tap. (-t) ])jp UUllll' i'l in diP 
kamC'r. (fJ) nu:n l'l 'n hank, 'n kam l'll 'u tafp} in m~· 
bmPl', (li) Die hal is in my haml. li) 'u ~Iaawl i-; 
lang-Pl' as '11 rlag. (8) lJil' man -;al <liP vark slflan. 
(H) \Yuar i'l varlet·:' II~· -;taau hy diL' warn. (10) Jan, 
wuar is my appelP Daur op tliP tafl'l. (11) \\~f!ar is 
jullt• maP 8y kam haar han'. I l~) Pa g·aan na die 
stad, maar ma ,.,}aap in tlie kanwr. 11:~) D:tar i,. w:dPr 
i11 tliP tlam. 114) .Tan, juJlp sal in tliP w:ti.Pr \t~l. 
EXERCISE 2.- 'l'mn~late inttl .\f1ibnns:-
( l) The lnclv i, ahaitl. (:2) \YhPre is my ll<'t'tl!P: 
(:{) Yuu ·will faiL 14-) Then• is \\atPr in the PUll. 
(5) .lolm waslw-; his h;md. lfil Can you spPak our 
lnng·uagL' r 1)) :\ly name is .Tohu. iR) Tlw lump ~bmJs 
on tlw la1>1P, hut my fatlwr HtandH at ihe window. 
l!l) lTi'l hand is ltartl. (10) ThP lll'flnch falls on thP 
pig. ( 11) \Yhil'h blllll staJHls in thP !'lli)Ul r (12) Carry 
tlw l>Pnch allll tlw lH'clstP:ttl HPUl'Pr. 11;3) L:dPr Oll hi' 
will spPak um· lang-nagt>. I 14-) TltP t•at i-; in the iialt. 
( li)) -:\Iy !'at hPJ' hail''l canll'. ( l(j) :\ly moiltPl' g'tlL'" tn 
tuwn anLl slw fdcltt's a lll:ll aml a shelf. 
lG !lfASKJ<:\Y !\fiLLER'S AI,'JW\:,L\;'\8 GRA!Il!IL\R 
Long e '--= ea in " hear." 
1. ln dosed syllables long e is represPnted hy 
ee:-
been (lt'g, hone) 
bleek (pale) 
breek (break) 
een (one) 
eer (lwfmP, honour) 
e~et (eat) 
geen (no, none) 
heer (gentlPman) 
keel (throat) 
leer (learn) 
lees (read) 
meel (flour) 
2. In open syllahles 
besem (broom) 
bene (legs) 
be,ter (bPtter) 
eter (Pater) 
hemel (heaven) 
he,kel (to heckle) 
ketel (ketiJ r) 
lelik (ugly) 
meet (to mpasm·p) 
neem (take) 
peer (pear) 
seer (sore) 
seep (soap) 
speel (play) 
steel (steal) 
steen (stonP) 
teer (tar) 
veer (feu thPr) 
vlees (nwat) 
week (wePk) 
long e is reprrsentrd 
lepel ( Hpoon) 
Ieser ( reaclPr) 
seker ( rPrt a in) 
sewe (sl>Yen) 
speler (pla:vPI") 
stede (towns) 
vrede (prarp) 
by e :-
0. At the rncl of a word long e is reprPsrnlt>d hy 
ee:-
gee (give) 
mee (with) 
see (HHa) 
tree (yard, Htride) 
twee (two) 
vee (ratt1r) 
Short e (mostly in rlosecl syllables) =- e in "ten." 
bed (bed) 
bek (month of an 
animal) 
berg (monut a in) 
derde (third) 
dertien (thirtPen) 
dertig (thirty) 
emmer (pail) 
I•'OR RXGl.TSH STUDJ<jN'fS 
end (end) 
erf (plot o£ grou111l) 
erg (bau) 
hek (gatC') 
help (assist) 
hen (hen) 
herfs (autumn) 
het (has) 
ken (chin, know) 
kerk (c·hurc·h) 
klerk (derk) 
merk (mark) 
mes (knifP) 
met (with) 
nek (nPck) 
net (nPt) 
nes (nPsi) 
plek (plae<') 
rek (slreleh) 
skerp (sharp) 
sleg (bau) 
spek (baPnn) 
stem (voice) 
ster (star) 
sterk (strong) 
stert (tail) 
tel (count) 
vlek (stain) 
vlerk (wing) 
ver (far) 
verf (paint) 
weg (away) 
wen (win) 
werk (work) 
wet (luw) 
EXERCISE 3.-RPad carefully and diRlindl:v :-
17 
(1) Jan hei maar Pen l1Pt'IJ. (2) ~Iy mes i;~'skerp. ( :n Die 1dPrk speel mei. tlie hal. ( 4) Die hPer is lelik. 
( 5) Gee vir my die meel. (G) W aar is die lepel? 
(7) Seem diP kei.el Pn hierdiP lepPl. (8) DaardiP heer 
i;~ hlePk. (9) .My mPS is weg. (10) By ons Jam is 
'n llPk. (ll) Jan speelmet sy pa. (1~) DiP vark het 
'u appPl iu sy Lek. (1:~) My l1eC'n is seer. (14) Jan, 
nrem twee Pmmers en g-aan haul water. (15) Kan jy 
die s!Prre a an die hemol trl ~ (Hi) PiPt, gre vir my 
diP leer. 117) Daar is spek Pn Ylees in ons strde. 
( ll:l) Ek rek my lll'k om diP see i.e sien. (HI) Ons ;.;pan 
sal wen . 
• Y.TJ. daardie (that, those); hierdie (this, these). 
EXERCISE 4.-Translatp iuto Ahikaans :-
(1) \VP haYe iwo applP'l. (~) Can von Ponnt tbP 
stars~ (a) .Jolm plays with thP ],all. !4) A lllan has 
two lt>g>H. (fi) }[y knit'P i,., in I hut kPtilP. (fi) ThP ;;pooH 
fall~ Oil ihl' mat. 17) 'J'hl'J't• g"Ol'" thl' I lt>rk oJ' olll' town. 
(H) Clivi' thi;; emuh i.o that pulP ma11. (~l) 'l'heH' arP 
-.evPn tla.vH in a Wl'Pk. ( 10) .\ 1t1onth i;; loltg·t•r I han a 
week; a wep k iH long-er than a day; hut a year i ~ louger 
than a month. (11) fn (thP) anbmtii WI' L'at :qqilPH allll 
]lear,. ( 12) Their f'hurc-h ;;i:lllllH on a mountain. 
( t;~) ~f.v fathl'r llll'U~Ul'I'H th0 plot 11f g'I'IJ1lTI<l llilll t':ll'l"ll'-4 
a gate to tht> phH'l'. ( l+) lliH mother wm k~ with pail 
:111(1 hroom. (lf)) Tlt> "11l ln-c:tk hi~ liP<'k. tHi) Thi,; 
playPr will cPrbliltly wiu. 
e in "the." 
This e oe<·urs at the Pn<l of a wonl; al.;;o in tht> 
prPfiXPH be·, ge-, ver·, alHl in thP omflixPH -el, -em, -en, 
-er. quite hrit,,flv we nwy ~a\: weakly arcentPd e 
''''f•mH in unaccented :--yllahlt:~. · · 
akker ( acoru) 
begin (hPgin) 
basem (lll'IHJJll) 
buite ( ontsidP) 
gebruik ( uHe) 
lekker ( nirr) 
lapel (SJIII<lll) 
mense ( pPoplP) 
sleutel (key) 
solder (loft) 
sonde 1 Hi n) 
taken ( "i gn) 
vertel (it'll) 
wzarde ( valnt') 
wakker (awakPl 
wekker (alann-t·lo<·k) 
winkel ('4hnp) 
wonder 1 '"mHlPr) 
EXERCISE 5.-Tira<l nlowl :--
il) "l.v 111a Pll my pa 'H'rk in diP Httul. (~l Die 
lrpt>l :--tann in diP watPr. (:1) .Ja11, g'PP \ir my 'li0 
hesem ~ (4) Daar iK lPkkPrt-~ iu <liP wi11kPl. (fi) \Yaar 
is f1jp, kamrr waar Pk nwrt :--laap r (G) DiP sh'lli.Pl van 
1liP s11lrlt>r iH op cliP rak. (I) Bui1P, i11 tlic• wl<l is <lit 
ll·kkt>r. (H) DiP wrkkPr maak vir my pa wakh'r. 
(!I) \Yat iR dic' waardP vall hindi" PI f ~ ( 1()) l>iP lll!'ll"l' 
tP] dil' al<kl'l'H op. 
]!I 
EXERCISE 6,-'l'r<~n-.lall' into .\frikaau~ :-
!11 ,J uhu, liPgiu with ytour work, nml n~t' ;\ o1n· pt>u. 
1:!1 ThL'l'P all' spom1s, ln•totJlliS, mats, lamps and tahlt•:-i 
Ill lht' ~lwp-: iu our i.nwuH. (;~) ( lur team is ~lroug aml 
will wiu. 1-11 TlwrP art' 1woplP out~iUL'. (G) \Yhat is 
11tl' Yalnt• uf thi~ alarm-d11l'kr (fi) Tuke this ilonr and 
gin· (i11r'1 ntP 11:ilPr. (7) ('au ytm t'al mratr Xo, my 
t!Jm:d is ,.,un•. U-1) 'Ilw -;trot•g· mall works in tlw 
mountain. (!li ThP kP~ ol' l1is l't>om i-; gu1w. ( 10) Tl1P 
lH·n with th" ,.,],nrp lwak i'l on hPr tH''lt. 
h1 .Urikaans I awl r in tlll' <·onlhimttiuns lk, lm, 
rk, rm u t t> ~~hntys 1n·, 1numwrd: 
arm (arlll, pour) 
balk (hL·am) 
elf (rlPnn 1 
elk (Pat·h) 
golf (w::m·) 
half (half) 
kalf ( t·alf) 
kalk (limP) 
kalm ( l'al111) 
jag (hmd 1 
Jakob (.1 ut·<~ll) 
jakkals ( jac·kal 1 
jammer 1pit.\ 1 
jok (lPllliPs) 
jong 1y11ung) 
Jood (.TPw) 
gemaak 1 ma, 1P \ 
moet IHnhl 1 
melk (milk) 
salf (ointn1Pnl) 
skelm ( roguP) 
swerm (swarm) 
twaalf (hwlvP) 
valk (falf'un) 
volk (natiuu) 
warm (warm) 
wolf (wolf) 
E11g. y. 
juk (ynkP) 
jy (.Y•!n, ~ing.) 
jou (your) 
julie (yon, pl.) 
Julie (.1uly) 
Junic 1 .I UTII') 
optel (11i"k np) 
wanneer (wliPll) 
:!0 ~IAf'KRW ~I ILLI•~H'S .\ I<'THTC\A:'\S C ILUDL\H 
EXERCISE 7,-l{pad can·fully and di~tiudly:-
(1) Junie het dcrtig due. (2) }l.v JlU is jonk. 
(;{) Dit is lekker om te jag. (4) Die man jok. (5) Wat 
jag hy r By jllg jnkkalse. (o) Die kalf dra 'n juk op 
sy nPk. (7) Die wnlf is in llie hmg. (8) Daanlit> 
klerk wPrk. (!-"!) ])it is halftwnnlf. (10) Dit iA jammer 
llat diP stPr so ver is. (11) Op diP ]ppf'l hd my pu 
'n rnerk g-emaak. (1:2) \VamH'Pl' lwg-in dit> kerk r 
(1:3) Elkf'Pn mod <.J.Y Yolk hPlp. ( 14) J<:k '-181 vir julie 'u 
storie vertel. (Hi) l>ie t-Pe is kahn as !lie golf uiP 
sllllln nie. 
EXERCISE 8.-Tramlaiy into .\ fribanR: 
(1) The falcnn RlPelJS in his neRt. (~).July is not a 
warm mouth. (3) The poor rogue <.JtPals tht> milk. 
(4) What is the name o£ this apP r His name is Jacob. 
(5) Go (and) feteh ointment in that shnp. (6) I haw 
made a mark in the-lwam with my knife. (7) \Vhal is 
in thoRe eleven }lailR r 1'hPrn is lime in them ( - bulle). 
(8) When do you hunt the wolf~ (9) Du yon know the 
valuP of thiR keltler (10) 1'hP r·aH j., :-;trong. 
EXERGIS,E 9. --'l'ranslate Exercise 7 into Eng-lish, 
and then re-translate it into .\£rikaaus. 
e · e in 11 pen" ]pnglhC:'llPCl. 
bier (bleat) 
he (have) 
kerel (£Pllow) 
le (lil' (!own) 
perel ( Jwarl) 
se (say) 
Sker (sci 'lSOI'S) 
wereld (world) 
'l'his sound, slightly :-;hmtt>r, is ulso fomul in the 
following- words, where i11e t-ign 1\ i:-; 11ot, htiWPW'l', 
nPcessar:v :-
perd (horse) 
pers ( Jmrple) 
stert (tail l 
werd (w•n·th) 
e e ill " pen " at the l'!ld of a wonl. 
de ( USC'd Whl'n nfft'l'illg 
<lll,YhtHl,V 'lOIJIPlhing·) 
Xute :- nee (no), nie (not). 
EXERCISE 10.-Heatl almul allll learn:-
:.?I 
( l) D!>, Jan, l!C'Plll hiC'rdi!:' lt>kke:t'o Yir jtJU. (2) Dit 
i., 'n mooi perd, ul>? ( :n .X l'C wat, sy si ert is te lelik. 
(4) Wat s~ jy, Piei, wat is tlaanlie pen! wert!? (5) Wil 
jy melk hi'>? (G) Daur le 'n wolf. (7) JJie wereld is 
grooi. (~) lJaardie kl'rel hPt 'n pl>rel opgell'l. (9) 1>!>, 
Klaas, gee hienlie lellPl Yir .iou ma. (10) .1.v wil wah'!' 
he, ne? 
EXERCISE 11. -Trausl:ttf' into Afrikaans:-
( l) The strong hnn'P work;; hanl. (!2) The key lies 
on the shelf. (:l) lt is a pity that my lPg i;; Rnre. 
(4) Thne are ugly pPnplt> in the world. (5) That hf'n 
Jms a long uet·k. (G) Tho wolf is a man-eater. 
(7) l 1C'oplt> sa:v that this is sin. (H) Give me your pair 
uf seisson; and inke tlwse ;;wcets. (\)) That fellow 
has a .. harp knife. (10) \Vlwt is this pearl worth r 
(11) In .lmte we a1e going to hunt the wolf. (12) The 
:worm; fall in my room. n:l) ThP l'Ulf hni'. a long tail. 
(14-) H i;; n sin to tPlllies. 
g St'oich back <'ollsnnaHt m "loch." 
ag (eight) 
eendrag (unity) 
gaar (f'ookccl) 
gas (gas) 
gee I (,ye1low) 
geen (no, none) 
gister (yPstPrday) 
goed (good) 
goud (gold) 
graaf (spacle, duke-) 
gra.p (joke) 
gras (grass) 
groen (green) 
grond ( grnuntl) 
groot ( big·) 
grys (gray) 
•>•> ~L\SKJ<~\Y :\IILLI•~ll''-l .\l•'HIId \~S <:JL\\1'\1.\H 
krag 1:--tn•ttg·th) 
lag !laugh) 
ma.g (111 il ~ , llOWl'l') 
nag (nighi) 
reg (rigltt) 
sag (Rnft) 
sleg (lm<l) 
tog (,\ rl, .i•nl!'tll',V) 
vrag !load) 
vrugte (fn1it) 
wag (wait\ 
EXERCISE 12.-Ht'tlll t'atdull,v nml Llislitlt'll,\ :-
(]) .Tau, wag vir rny. (:2l ]),p vrngtt• j,.., c:ag·. 
(;{) (i<•P vir on:-- tla:mliP g·uutl. 11) }I~· pa is grooi, 
maar Pk is klPiH. (;-l) Ek ,.;al hiPl' vii' llt.'l ma wag. 
(fi) Da:tt' i-; g·as i11 <liP gruncl. ("j) 1liP g·Ia<~l' ic: 1-!''.V"· 
(~) Ek wprk mc>i 'u graaf in die g·tolttl. t :l) Dit i., 'n 
groot grap, lit'!' (]Ol Uaar slaan 'n vt·ag· \l'ltglt•. 
(11) }lag is l'Pg'. ( ]:_l) DiP krag Y:llt d:.:l1'l1il' lll:tll it-. 
groot. (1:3) Dit j, tog· jamnt<'r <lat hy ago appc>l'l hd 
I'll Pk hPt maar tWPL'. ( 14) EPlHlrng- llt:t:t k lltag·. 
EXERCISE 13.-TwnslatP init> .\f1il-aanc:: 
11) The JtH'Ut ic: l'ookPd. (:..>) Tltal mall -;tt•ab in 
iht•ltight. (;~) 'l"ht• yPllow applPR t>ll the tahlP an• nit·<'. 
(4) YPstPnhty W<' 'lt'I'P i11 thP i:tWlt. (ij) ThP 1\uit iN 
gTPf'n. ((j) ThPif' liPs a ltig pPar on UtP gra-;,.,, (7) Tlw,.;p 
pnttr pt>oplt> h:tYP 110 flmll' aml 110 Hll'at. 1 H) That joke 
is gootl. (!l) ~Iy comrarleN lallgh aucl play nTL thP g-n•Pn 
gTa'l'l. (10) I lltlJ..,t laugh wht•It you tell thP ~tnry of 
thP j<ll'ktl nllll tht• wttlf. (11) Thr> ;dt'Pllgih "f the hnr-;p 
ifl great. (1:..>) I' uil,\ iH g·otHl lor a nation. 
Short i (in dllsPd .,ylJaltlPc:) 
bid (pray) 
dik (thirk) 
dink (think) 
dit (it) 
drink (chink) 
klim ll'limh) 
kJip ( l'lOUL') 
i in "bird" ,huriPnPd. 
lid (mPHllter) 
pit (pith, c;tonf' ot a 
(fruit) 
rit (a rirlP) 
smid ( hl:ll'hmi tl1) 
wit (whiiP) 
ie ea iu "eat." l1ui -.;l1orler null higher. 
dier (n11imal) 
drie ( thrt•P) 
gieter ( walL·riug·-c·:tJI) 
hier (here) 
kiem (gt•ml) 
mier !aut) 
.Yntt also:-
kyk (lunk) 
seker (tt>dailll~) 
riet (rP<'Il) 
siek (Hic·k) 
skiet (;:hoot) 
Spier (llllH"WlP) 
tier (tiger) 
vriend ( frient1) 
soos (likP) 
want ( lH•(·au;:e) 
EXERCISE 14. -HPncl alllutl :-
(1) lliertlil' appl'l ht•t iien pi11(•. (:!) (:pp nr my 
daanlie wit rid. (:1) -:\line gnan lll,\ vril·nd en Pk 
wihlPhokke 1:-1kiPl. (.f) lbg-, .Tan, mng- ek hiPJ' hy jou 
op die klip :-,it~ (.1) .Ta ~wkPr, klim nwar 011. ((i) Kyk, 
claar loup 'n rni<'r. (7) 'n Tirr is '11 haiP siPrk dier, 
want ~'.Y Hpirn· i" ;:o hard -.nos '11 ldip. (K) De, 1\laaH, 
llL'elll hirnlil' g-it•trr Wl (lir -;mid to(•, l'll "c~ l1,\ mol't tlit 
l'l'~pnaak. (l)) PiPt i:-, -.iL•k, en daannn it' !laar l1ail' 
fliPktl'h iPnll' in diP kanwr. 
EXERCISE 15.-Tmll."l:dt· i11t,1 .\fl'ikann-:: -
(1) ThL' dukt' ha~ threP gtHHl friPnllH. ( ~) \Y r clrir1 k 
·watrr when it i-. WUl'lll. (;3) Till• l'l'Ollle pray in the 
C'hur(•h. (4-) 1 think my fripncl is si<"k. (5) John iH a 
mPm lw1 11f our Plnuch. ! G) Tjook, ihrre il" an nnimal i11 
thr l'Pt'cl:-, ~ I-. it a tigl'r~ 17) Tl1l' JIParl fall" into ihf' 
watt>ring·-(•a11. (8) 'l'hPrf' aJ'P ihn·p an(R on thl' tnblPr 
(!)') :\lv falhPr li<·s in (tllt>) lwcl, hPP~Hlt't' ltP iH side 
(10) <'~w you ,huu( u tigt·rl" Yt·o.;, I thillk I'll. 
~~ ~!Af.;KJ•~\\' ~IJLL!<:f{'S .\l•'llll\.\.\:-\S CilL\:\1:.\IAH 
Loug o - · oo in " boor." 
1. In dnsecl sylla hlPs long o is represented by oo :-
boom (tree) loop (go, run) 
boor (to bore) oog (eye) 
boot (boat) oom (unrle) 
dood (dead) oor (ear) 
hoog (high) toon (toe, tone) 
hoor (hear) voor (furrow, before) 
lood (lead) woon (dwell) 
loon (wages) 
2. In open syllables, and at the end o[ a word, 
long o iR represented by 0 :-
beloning (reward) 
bo (up, abnve) 
bome (trees) 
doring (thnrn) 
oe - u in 
bloed (blood) 
boek (book) 
boer (farmer) 
doek (cloth) 
doen (do) 
groet (greet) 
hoender (fowl) 
koel (cool) 
miljoen (million) 
pampoen (pumpkin) 
roes (ruRt) 
koning (king) 
koring ((·orn) 
so (so) 
woning ( dwt'lling-) 
"put" (Eng.) 
roet (soot) 
soen (kis~) 
soet ( Rweet) 
stoel (chair) 
toe (when, elosrtl) 
vloek ( cmse) 
vloer (floor) 
voel (feel) 
voer (forage) 
voet (foot) 
N.R.-ThiR is a Rhort sound, hut wbeu r follows, i1 
often has a tendrnfly to leng-then it; 1hnR boer is a little 
longer than boek. 
N otc nlsu : ­
kar (curt) kry (get) vra (ask) 
EXERCISE 16.-RPad aluucl and learn:-
(1) ){y oom t-f. dii. is 'n sonue om te vloek. (2) Die 
lllJUlil le in dil' vuor. (:1) Hoor jy wat jy moPL dorn r 
(-1) }~k grnet my pa en Horn my ma. (5) Die hoer het 
vupr op sy kar. ( li) ])jp loon wut hy vra, is hoog. 
(7) liiPulif' appd..; is suet, maar dir lekkers is sneter. 
(K) ~ly vnet vod t>Cer. (!l) In die winter is dit koel. 
(10) Ek sit op 'n stoPl, maar my htwk le op die vloer. 
(11) Dio bller hoor vir water, maar hy kry niks. 
(1~) Daar li' 'n halfmiljoeu pampoene op die land. 
(14) \Vaur wnun j:v~ 
EXERCISE 17.-Tmm:late into ~\.fr;kaanR: 
(1) ThP. white hcnse hn.:; Htrong musele1-. (2) Therr 
iH hlood on ,\our h:llul. ( :1) Tho wages of "'in is death. 
(4) \VP ki.-:s your font,() king. (5) :\1,\' friend has 
corn on hi" lcdt. ((i) 'The farmer has twelve million 
pumpkin-. till his land. ( 7) ThPI"e lies a wai.e1iug-ran; 
takt> it in thP 1Jlack.-;rnith. ( S) There is blood in your 
eye; is it Still' r (D) The king tlwells in u strung dwt>l­
ling. (H)) no your Will'k. 111) .John, take yonr bollk 
and stallll on the chair. ( 12) There runs an ant on tho 
floor. 
f\hort 0 (urcnr'l In rlo-;pt} "lyllahles) ~-' aw in "law," 
hnt :<hnrter. 
bok ( ~oai) 
bol (hall) 
born ( homh) 
bottel (lJ(IttlP) 
gom (gum) 
kom (come, hasiu) 
kop (hPa<l) 
tol (top) 
ton (hm) 
lol (bot her) 
mot (milth) 
pot (pot) 
rot (1at) 
slot (lock) 
som (Hum) 
son (sun) 
tot (to, towards) 
troks (truck) 
211 :\fAf-'KE\Y .'\fiLLER'S AFRIKA.\~S GIL\1\1.'\TAR 
o (lt>Hg-lhPned form of c;;hort o) a in "fall." 
more (mornill[!, to-morrow) sore (lnnk aftpr) 
~Yutr: also ; ­
moenie (don't) waarheen lwhiihPr) 
EXERCISE 18,-HPud aloud aml tn1I1-.lai!' iuto 
Engli!:'h :-
(1) .1::111, kom hier, ek wil nH't jou pmat. (2) Wat 
wil jy vir my -;{' ~ (3) Ek wil vir jon YPriA dat 1laar 
'11 1·nt in clie lmm<'r iR. (4) ~Io0nic m<'l m,v lnl niP; ek 
m,,pj, WPrk. (5) Daar sit gom aan daar1lie 1HH1lll. 
(fi) \VaaJlwen g·rwn jy; J•;k gaa11 tnt hy \Yelling-ion. 
(7) Kyk, daar swt>m 'u mot in die hoitPl. (~) DiP 
slot van my kamer is nit nrde. I!J) Piet Hpep] met sy 
iol. (10) \Yamwer Hal.i.v juu sollune mnnk? ~lore, 
as Pk kan. (11) h die troks le 'u ion gmn. 11~) Klaas, 
'4n1 jy vir my llOk sore aH ek weg is~ (10) ~ee, ek 
wil mpf m.v YuPihal Hpt•el. ( l..J:) }f(\n•, oom, hoe gnan 
<lit!' Chwcl, 1hmki<', net my kop iH sel•r. 
EXERCISE 19.--'l'l ambtP into ~Hrilman": 
(1) Tho lamh eats tlw grren grass. (~) 'I'his is a 
big ~·alf. (~3) Eac·h gat<' must have a lock. (..J:) 'J'h<' 
w:drr in thP hasin is cool. (o) Don't fall 011 your hrad! 
(6) lt i'4 not g'110cl to lie in thr sun. II) <'nmc and wash 
,vonr hands in tho warm water. (8) Huts urc ugl~ 
animal<>. (!J) \Ylwt is in that hotilr; (10) 'l'hl• 
farmt'r will get a great sum for his load u£ fr11ii. 
I,ong· u - (},J'r.) ie in "riet," with lip" rrnmclc·!l. 
'!'his souncl is long he·fore r. In clus!'d syllableH 
nut cmling in r it is Rhort and written UU. 
buurman (neighbour) dispuut (disp11ie) 
bure (11eighbourH) huur (hire) 
muur (wall) 
nuus (uew1-1) 
nuut ( w·w) 
stuur (send) 
stuurman (pilot) 
druk (pre"lH) 
dun (thin) 
hulle (thE'y, their) 
hut (hut) 
kurk ( rork) 
mud (bag) 
nul (nil) 
punt (point) 
suur (sour) 
uur (honr) 
ve,rhuur· (hire nui) 
vuur (fire) 
vure (fires) 
put (well) 
rug (back) 
skud (shake) 
sluk (to swallow) 
stuk (piPce) 
suster ( si:-ter) 
vurk (fork) 
0, thl' leng·ilwnPcl fnmt of short u, is f()lmcl in only 
a fL'W wurds : -
bruo (pl. of ln ng- - -
hriclg·p) 
.Yuft' also:-
laat (late) 
r'llens (hackw:HclR, 
bill-C'l'r-,ts) 
om (ronllll) 
EXERCISE 20.-Rrad aloud: -
(1) Piet, hoe laat is dit ~ Dit. is se»-Ulll', (2) Daar 
is 'n muur cnn die pui. (a) }!y uum clru 'n mml koring 
up sy rug. (4) Daardie '1tnk kurk i'> clmt. (5) M,\ 
lmurman skud sy kup. (li) Gelt, :-.tum· vir jou rna 'n 
stuk vau hierdie lekkN. (7) Uns hure maak 'n gmui. 
vuur. (8) Daar is 'n huis te huur by my oou1. (9) ~~k 
hPt my kar aau die arm man verhuur. (10) ~Iy suster 
ga::m :-.a am met my ua cliL' ka ifer ::;e 1m t. ( 11) .Tan, kom 
druk jtm hand up him·dil' hottPL 
EXERCISE 21.-- TwnslalP into Afukaan" :-
(1) }ly unde liveH in (ihPI lown, hut h1• wurb 
harder than a farmer. (:!) TltP HI t'olttg man c·arr.ies a 
hag (of) corn on his hack. (:1) TakP this piPee of cork 
and press it intn the bottle. (4) Tho l!oat has two 
ears, but only one eye in his hPad. (fJ) ~Pnd these 
sweets to your sister. (G) Our neighbours live in a hut. 
(7) 'l'o-morrow we are going tu hunt tigPrs. (1'1) Don't 
shake the branch: the fruit will fall on the ground. 
(9) Come and kiss your sister. ( l(J) I carnwt do these 
sums: my head is sore. (11) What is the time? It 
is twelve o'clock. 
EXERCISE 22.-Tran.~late ExNciAP 20 into English, 
and then re-translate it into Afrikaans. 
eu (Afr.) ee in "been," with li11s lllUIHled. 
beul (exPcutimwr) 
deur (door, through) 
dreun (rumhle) 
geur ( scl'n t) 
jeug (J outh) 
kleur (colour) 
leun (to lean) 
leuse (m1diol 
meul (millt 
ncus 1 l111SI') 
neut (nut) 
reus \ giau t ) 
seun (son) 
stcun (groan) 
eeu ~, (A£r.) lnuA' e -r (Afr.) oe. 
eeu (cPntmy) 
leeu (lion) 
.Yut1 also:-­
asseblief (pleast>) 
gewecr (gun) 
snceu (o-w1w) 
sprecu ( t !tru-. h) 
tand ( tnuth) 
EXERCISE 23. -Read aloud:-
(1) l'iet hot voct hal gc>spPel Pn up sy no us f!PYal. 
(2) In hierd.ie l." in L.igote eeu is dJur uie u:cer reuse iu 
FOH E~WLISII STrDEXT8 29 
die '' i'n·l<l niP. (;~) Toe .Jan \'an HieLeeek in Tnfl'lbaai 
g'Pkom ltd, was duur uog· h1io lrcus np 'l'afelLerg·. 
(--!) Piet, maak ns~el1lid die deur toe. (5) Waarom 
steun .iou vriend so~ lly hd tanclpyn. (G) Gert, 
g-aau haal JOU geWI:'I:'r, dun g-uan ons sprrl:'us :-;kid. 
(7) Dio leuse Yuu ons land is: I:'Pwlrag maak mag. 
(H) \\'at is .liP kh'Ul' van die wolke r llullP is so wit 
soos :lllPen. (9) Die g-rur \'an clir rnse is huie lekker. 
EXERCISE 24.-Translate into Afrikaans:-
(1) Pleat'e giYr lllL' your gun. (~) ~What do you 
wall t to do [ ( :1) I want to shoot t hi' goat. ( 4) flrnd 
tlw com to thf' mill. (5) That fellow has a ]JUI]Ile nose: 
he ki::,:-es the bottle too much. (G) That flower has a 
niee odour. (I) The giant groa11..;. (H) Piet :-;ees the 
lion a]l(l falls on his hack. (!l) That hm"e has a white 
!lOSE'. ( 10) In our twentic>th eeui ury 1 he PX<'eutioner 
has not much work. ( 11) Our mot to is: work, for the 
night rome,;, wlwn we cannot work. ( 1~) \Yhat ill tho 
eolunr of snow r . 
ei, y a.i m " pain." 
bly (glad, 1emai11) 
gly (:-;lip) 
ly (suffe1) 
lyf ( ho<ly) 
lyn (line J 
pyn (Imin) 
ry (ride) 
ryk (rich) 
tyd ( 1 imr) 
vry (free) 
vyf (five.) 
ys (ice) 
.Yul1' also : ­
blom dltlWPr) 
kook (llllil) 
eier (L'gg) 
eis (demand) 
fontein (fountain) 
klei (clay) 
klein (..;mnll) 
lei (slatr, to leml) 
meid (SPl'Vant) 
meisie (girl) 
reis (.iomney) 
sprei ( :-;prrrul) 
trein (train) 
vlei ( Yallc>y) 
vel (-;kin) 
wa (wag gun) 
D 
:lO .:\lARKE\\' :\fiLLl<JR'1' .\ FRIKA,\XS ORA.:\1.\L\H 
EXERCISE 25.-Heud aluurl :-
(1) }~k het :-;o'n pyn in my lyf. (2) Daanlie meisie 
is baie ryk. (:~) Oor 'u jaar g-aan ek 'n lang reis met 
die treiu maak. (4) Tyd i:-; guud Wl'l'd. (5) Die meicl 
kook 'n eier. (6) K eem jou lei en muuk hiNdie :-;om. 
( 7) In die winter le daar ys op die watr1·. (8) Hoe 
laat is dit ~ Dit is vyfnur. (!J) Die skoolkind dru 
S_\ lei aan 'n lyn. 
EXERCISE 26.-'l'run~latr iuto Afrikaans:-
(1) ']'his flower has an ugly colour, but a nice scent. 
(2) \Ve go to the fountain tu drink wutrr. (0) ~ly 
sister cooks five eggs for us in the pot. ( 4) The poor 
man lives in a hut. (5) ~ly frieml suffers, for he has 
pain in his back. (G) In the morning we eat egg-s, 
ehcese, and mrat. (7) \V e make u journey to the beau­
tiful valley. (8) llis soiL remains in the iruin. (9) In 
(the) winter the pcojJle slip on ihe iee. (10) The skin 
of her hand is thin. ( 11) I am very g-lad that he i~> 
free. (12) Remain here in the valley. 
EXERCISE 27.-Translate .Exercise :25 iuio English, 
and then re-translate into ~Urikaans. 
aai -- y in "my" (Eng.) 
baai (buy, bathe) 
braai (fry) 
draai (turn) 
fraai (beautiful) 
haai (shark) 
kwaai (hot-tPmpC'recl) 
laai (to load) 
maai (mow) 
saai (sow) 
tamaai (very Lig) 
waai (to blow) 
ai = shortened form of aai. 
aia ( uu old eo loured 
woman) 
baie (mueh) 
fraiings (tas'lels) 
FOR E~G LlHH HTCDE~Tfl 31 
ooi - (Afr.) long o + (Afr.) i. 
gooi (to throw) mooi (pretty) 
kooi (hPLl) nooi (mistres~, invite) 
looi (to tan) strooi (straw, to strew) 
oi = oy lll "joy." 
noi (mi:·dress), but the form nooi is more common. 
oi -__, short enrd form of oi. 
goiingsak (~aek of 
rnugh material) 
toiings (tatirrs) 
oei - (Afr.) oe + (Afr.) i. 
goeie (from goed, 
o = good ) 
groei (grow) 
koei (cow) 
loei (to luw) 
moeilik (difficult) 
roei (to row) 
EXERCISE 28.-Read aloud aml translate into 'English: 
(1) Daar in die berg groei 'n fraai blum. (2) Daar 
sit 'n mooi meisie. (0) In die winter saai die boere 
bulle graan, en in die somer muai hullo dit. (4) Klaas 
gooi die ktJei met 'n klip. (G) ~ly oom i;; 'n kwaai man. 
(u) Die wind waai wes. (7) Laai die pampoene op 
die wa, Oert. (R) Op Rondebosch word baic velle 
g-elooi. (B) Dit i'l moeilik om i.PPn die wind op te roei. 
(10) Toe oils in tlie see baai, bet oils 'n groot haai gesien. 
(11) Si.rooi die mooi meisie md blomme. (12) Die 
kaffer se die ounoi is haie kwaai. 
EXERCISE 29.-Tramlale inlo Afrikaans:-
(1) 'l'ho old tree of our urighbonr is very hig. 
(2) My mother fries the mrat on t.he fire. (0) 'rho old 
eoloured woman and her three sons dwell in a hut. (4) I 
32 1\IARKEW :\!TLLER'R A FHTK.\AX~ GHA:\1\!AH 
have a bed, a chair and a i a hlt• in my room. ( 5) ThP 
hlat:hnuith c·anit•s a saek un his l•aek. ( fi) In sunmJt'l' 
it is ni<'<' io RlP<'P on siraw. ( 7) To-morrow om· frirndH 
will row on ilw hay in a hnat. ( N) It is !liflicult to 
dimh on ':l"ahl!' Mountain. (!l) Look ih<•JP, PiPt, ihPre 
is a very hig shark! (10) ,J aeoh, lPad tht• c·nw to i hl' 
fountain ! 
EXERCISE 30.-RP-iramlalc ExPrC'i~e 2H into 
Afrikaans. 
ou 
blou (blue) 
dou (dew) 
flou (faint) 
fout (mistakE') 
gou (quickly) 
hout (wood) 
1Yotc also:­
alles (all) 
oa in " boat " (Bug-.) 
klou (C'law) 
koud (f·ol<l) 
nou (uow, ltt~lTu"\\) 
ou(d) ( ol.J) 
sout (salt) 
vrou (wifP) 
lug (air, l'lky) 
blink ( tu glitter) 
EXERCISE 31.-RPad aloud:---
(1) Die lug is blou, maar stH'l'U i~ wit. (:!) AllP:-. 
is nic gond wat blink 11iP. (:{) DiP :~rmP Jl<'r<l hl't flou 
gPword in die kar. (4-) Gc>rl, hriug hout tlat ou-; kan 
vum· moak, want dit i-; hnit> l"•wl. (h) Elkt• llltlll' lc; 
daar don op diP gras. (G) Die ou man L'll -;y vrou g·am1 
duq1-toe. ( 7) Piet lwi gi~d Pl' bai P fou tt> i u S,\ lP"' 
grmaak. 
EXERCISE 32.-TranslaiP inio .\l'rikunn-;: -
(1) There• l"l a llletty girl in tlw train. (:2) It l'l 
<lifficult io milk our "·bitP cow. (:{) Tht' <lt•w i~ c·olcl. 
(4) The wife> of my nc>.ig-hhuur hal'l DI'C' girk (f>) LPt 
33 
us row m a ltuat on the h:t;v. (o) 'Ve mu,t reap (mow) 
what W£' suw. ( 7) Tho wind hlows l'Oltl. (H) The stars 
glitter i11 tl~t• hluP sky. (!.!) The claw of the tiger is 
YPl';Y 'lil'IJ!lg:. (10) You mnst not makE' miRtakes in 
your youth. (11) Please g·ivc nw the salt, an<l don't 
spill it on tlw table. (12) 'l'he water from that foun­
tain i"l as eol<l as iC'e. 
ui (.A b-.) ei with li]tS rounded. 
bruin (hnm n) 
bui ('lhower) 
duim (thmnh) 
fluit (whistle) 
huis (!tmlsP) 
lui (laz.v) 
ruik ( smPll) 
.Yutr also:­
aan ( ou \ 
reen (rain) 
skuit (boal) 
suid (south) 
tuin (gardPn) 
uil (owl) 
vuil (dirty) 
vuis (fist) 
rok (skirt) 
EXERCISE 33.-RPatl aloud:-
( 1) ( iaan .i.v sa am mf't nns doq1-toe P N PP, C'k bly 
hv t1iP hui'<. (:!) DiP u·au i'l ann, maar hv is tr lui om 
h: WC'lk. (:l) In dit• winlt'l' val daar ko~e hnie rren. 
( ~~) ])jp trei11 Huit hy dir 'ltasie. (f>) ~lore> g-aan ons 
op tlie ha:ti iu 'u 'lkuiL rori. (G) Die vrou van die 
profl'ssur hl'l 'n lll'llin ruk am1 geha<l. (7) Kan jy diP 
geur vm1 tliP rnsc 111ik; IR) l'id slaan <liP kaffpr mrt 
sy vui-: up diP Jtrus. . 
EXERCISE 34.-Translait' into "\.frikaam; :-
(1) Our huuse is oltl, hut il is Vl'ry lH'l'tty. (2) Can 
vuu smt>ll ihP· t~tlonr of the l'tlSt'S; (:{) The lazy man 
~roa11s if hP ha.., to ( , mu:-;t) '"ork. (4:) The train 
whistlPs nu t!Je hritlgt>. (5) ~\. et~ld ,]wwer is falling. 
:H :\lASKI~\\' .\ILLLI<:H'S AI•'HIK.U.~S GRA;\1;\IAR 
(6) In the garden aJ'<' mnn,v pretty flowf'rs. (7) I C'itllli<d. 
work; my thnmh ic: Vf'r,v ,;ore. (R) J ohu, en me here 
quickl5', 1 want to h'll yon Romcthing. (fl) 'fhe servant 
milkR ilw eow. (10) It is cold; hring wood so that 
W<' can make a firf'. (11) The wiff' of my neighlwur 
lms u prett:v skirt on. 
EXERCISE 35.-Read carefully:-
Micldag, nu vriend, f'k is regtig bly om jou te Hl<'ll. 
:Midclag, Gert, ou vrieud, hoe guan dit met jon? Kee, 
goed dunkie, Koos; maar hoekom lyk jy so haastig :­
Rk wil dif' Yoetbalwedl;;tr,vd tussen 'l'ransvaal C'n Vr~'­
Rtaat gaan sien, f'n cllt lwgin om Yieruur. Hoe lant is 
c1ii nou? Op my horlosie is dit net kwart nor drie. 
Maar dan moet jou hnrlosie agtf'r Wf'<'S, want die h•rk­
klok bet netnou halhier geslaan ! ,J a, el, dink iv het 
gelyk; maar waar is jou borlosie dan? Ag jong, h,v 
het gisi <'I' gaan staan op tien minute voor i waalf; toe 
het ek hom geRkud tot hy wt>er loop, <'Il nou hei. hy finaul 
gaan sba11 op twintig oor i.wualf. Rk lli11k h,v sal nu 
die horloRiemaker mod gaan Dan het ek jammPr 
Yir jou, KooR! Maar ek mnet loop, Jus sal Pk maar se: 
tot wePrsiPllS! 1'oi. siens, GNt, Pn lC'WC' maar lPkkPr! 
rnral)l(lllry: 
agiPr slow (lit. hPbill!l) 
bly glad 
geslaau struck 
gesknd --- shaken 
haastig -= in a hurry 
het gelyk = are right 
hoekom = why 
borlosiC' =- watch 
kwart = quarter 
laat ,-_ late 
l~,k - apprm 
miclflag ~~ gnnd aftPr-
noon (lit. miclda,v) 
nPtnou -- just now 
regtig really 
tot ( WPl'r)sirns - · an 
revmr 
tussen = hdw0en 
wedsir,vrl ~match 
EXERCISE 36.-'l'rnnslate into Afrikaans:-
( 1) Goo<l morning, my friend, how Jo you do i' 
(:2) I am in a hurry. (:1) There is a football match 
between Natal and Traw:waal. (4) ·what is the time? 
It is ten minutPs pa-;t two. (5) 1 think your watch is 
slow: it must he huH-past two now. (G) )fy watch has 
stoppeu at five minutPs to one. (7) Ynu mul'it shake it, 
then it will go again. (H) No, thank you, T'll take it 
to tho watehmnkpr':-L (9) I must go now; so long! 
(10) The <'hurch clo<'k has just l'itrnek half-past bYo. 
~._'ITAP1'EH TIT. 
NPBLLlN<-l. 
Spelliug i-, the represt'ntatioll of tlw articulated 
I·WU11(1R of a language by means n£ written signs or 
symhob. These sym hob we ea11 ldtNs. 'l'lw value 
a'nd ilw form of th~sp symholR are quitP urbitrury, and 
sn Wt' iinu that ead1 wriiten languagP has it" owu 
alphahd. ~lost European nations use ihl' Homan 
alphahPt, hut the sallll' ll'tier ofiPn rPprP"'Pllls quitl' 
uitfl'l'C'llt sonn<'IR in <'lifferPlll languugPs. So WP may 
comparl' iJw value of tl1e a in T·~ngli-;h, DutPh, and 
Fre11<·h n•spr!'iivdy. ln each laugnuge a is the fir,;;t 
letter of the' alplmln•t, lmi it rqn'PRenl'l a diffPreni 
soun(l in Pa(·h mw, or even difl:'erent somul'l in tlw Rame 
language, t'.p;. iu Huglish: cat, father, late, bad, bade. 
A languagP is said to hP wriHl'n 11lwndieally if each 
symbol, or C'Clllll>inution of s.nnhuls, C'OlJRi"'tently H'lH'P­
seJd.s only onP sound. Tlw uwrr Ul'arly J>hmwiiPally 
a lunguugP is writtPn, the PaHiPr will ihP sJil'lliug of HUPh 
a hiHp;nagc> l>P. In thiR H'Rlll'd ,\frikaans is not so 
diffieult us l<~np;li'lh, h•·('ause it is writtPn morP phrmeti­
en lly. 
Evc>ry living, RpokPn langnagP i-; suhjrct to ('oll ­
tiuuul ehauge - new words art> introduc·Pcl, inflexions 
droppPcl, word-, ehanp;t' their mea11i11g and prommeia­
iinn, Pte. .Aecmdiup;ly the spelling, if it is io hl' more 
or lcsR a phonetic repre;wntation of thc> -,poh'n words, 
ancl nnt mprrly an artificial Polll'dion nf writte11 
Rym hols, haR to krPp pace with thr deYl'lrqmwut n£ the 
spokpn laugnng-P and ('hangP likPwisr. Thu,.: we fiull 
rrforms in Hpelliup; earrircl out in almnRl all European 
t•uuntrie, from time to tinw. Iu TTollmul i hrrt' havo 
bern three HlH'h rdonns tlnring the niJil'lPPnth t•entury: 
in 1804, in HHii), and finally i11 18Hl (HimplifipJ Dut<·h). 
In lHla the '' ~im}1lifird Npelli11g Nol'iet;v" of England 
was fairly on itH way to reformi11g the HJirlling of the 
Engli,;h languagL', lmi tlw gTPat war iuterrupird its 
labours. In the l' uite<l StatrH, Franrr, Drmnark, anJ 
even in Italy, whiPh ha-; a language writt<>n mon' nrarly 
phonetically than any oth0r European la11guag-P, iherr 
are movempnts afoot io simplify ihP Hpelling of the 
languages of those C'mmtriPs. 
In South .\ frir·a the RJwlliug has bern fixed for 
~Hriknans arul the rules formulated h.v tho "Sui<l­
~\frikaansr Akat1Pmi<> vir Taal, LrttPrP eu Knn'l" in 
1!115. ln 1D17 modi±ieatiom. WPle iJiil"llrlU('Pcl and 
adtlitions made io these ;.pPlling rulPH, iu 1!)20 other 
motlifiPal.iom; Wl'l"<' intrntlnet•tl, and in l!J~1 thr l!PWesl. 
spelling rule" nppPared in the third (revised) pJition of 
the "Afrikaans<' \Yoonlelys l'll RpPlreelH." EYen HO 
it i'4 safe tu sa,\ that thpse rulrH arP hy uo mpanH final, 
as iR only to 1lf' Pxprded hom a lang-uagr whiPh is only 
1 eC'Pn tly heing- nsPLl for 1 it Nary JHU"}JoHr;.. 
\YP wi"h to say l1eiL' tlwi WP du not ~dtnch RUeh 
very grPa t impt~I"iaiH'P to tbt• spelling of a languug·e 
thai WP C"Ollsitlt'l' conpd ;.prlling aH ihr lJr-all and 
eml-all of language RlU<l,v i11 our schoolH. In our 
opinion it is muC'h mon' important that the stuclrnt 
should he ahlP to use the languug'l' eorrPdl_v, auJ make 
him;.elf intt>lligihle i11 that langnnge hy exprer,Ring hiH 
thoughts drarly aiu1 t'Oli<'LRely. ~pdliug-, after all, is 
a merhanil'al mI. <H·qnirt>d l1y pr:wtiPr, and the student 
should rrad and wriiP muPh to ac·quirP that nrt. If 
tlw HtlHlPnt has ol!<'l' thunmg·hl,\' mastered all thr sounds 
i11 Afrikaans giVL'll ill f'haptpr Tl., hP will fintl11n great 
tlifl:iculty in writing .\frikaanH eoiTrdly. 
For the guidance of stuclellts "r ~hall hPre gn e 
some of thn more important ~prlling rnles. Those who 
waut more information ou the suhjrc1, arf' strongly 
recommende(l to obtain "Afrikaanse "\Voorde.lys en 
Spelreels; derdP, hersieutle Jruk," 1021 (obtainable nt 
any bookseller's). 
1. Inconsistencies:-
(a) ei untl y aro both used tLJ tlt>note the soun!l 
ef]_uivalPnt to the Buglish ai in pain. Xo dPfinito rnlPs 
c·an he laid down herE>. The student must lt>alll where to 
usc ei and where y hy doHe ohsPrvation wh<>n 1 Palling. 
(b) d at the Pnd of a word is pmnonnred exactly 
lilw t in Afrikaans and b lik<> p. The guiding n1l<> 
ht>rt' is that d is written when a d is heard in tl1P 
infkrted form of the word, and t whPn tis lwanl in the 
inflected form: hand- hande; wind- winde; kind­
kinders; kant- kante; rant- ran.te; lint - linte. 
(c) f nncl v are Jn·ononnePd pxadly nlikc in Afri ­
kaans, viz., like English f, .\Pt hoth symhols an' 
rPtainPd for thi'l one HOUJHl. .\gain, no rules ran lw 
laid dowu for their nRe, rxeppt thflt V IIP\'er occur'l at 
the Pnd of a word iu Afrikuam. 
'I'he reason for the rxist<>n('P of t lH'H0 ineonRist Pll­
ciPs in Afrikaans is that the ",\kaclPmic," in fixing 
tlw spelling, laid it down as onr of its 1ult·s to adhPre 
as clnsrl,v as pos~ihle to tlw spdling (If thr ~implifiecl 
nute'!I, to whirh the people in ~outh .Uriea had hecome 
arcnstomed. The "}.Jmdemie " felt thr1t to bring 
about phonetic consisten!'Y in the f1 bove three eases 
would involve ton radic·al a change, and nwPt with ton 
mueh opposition. "\V f' may i'WtPl,Y pre(lid, however, 
that these inconsisteneieH will lw IPmov<>d at no wry 
distant date. 
[St>e al:m Chapter II. : Prnnnnriation.] 
2. The lPtters a, e, 0, u in opPn S"\ llahles, i.e. 
~yllal1h's Jlnt. ending in a rou~ouant, as a rulP, rrprPsent 
FOR E~GLI~H S'ITDE~TH 
Jqng Ynwels: va-der, hemel, bo-rne, u-re, etc. In 
closed syllables, i.e. syllablPs elllling in a eonsonant, 
they l'eprf'sPnt 'lhort vowels, whif'h are more or lesA 
1listinctly differe11t, too: men, pen, grond, punt, ete. 
Accordingly the1-1e letters arc doubled in closed 
syllables to distinguish them from the short ones: 
maan, been, oor, uur, et<·. At the end of a Ryllable, 
i.e. in an open sylbhle, thPy are never <loubled. 
:J. 'i'hc YOWelR a and 0 at the end of a word, when 
accented, are al.,o long: pa; so; hoe·r·a; buro. 
·L The vuwel e i" weakly ae<'Pllied (like e in 
"the") ui. thf' end of a word, ;nd in the prefixf's be•, 
ge-, ver-; al1:-1o iu unal'<'ented syllables like -el, -em, 
-en, er: sonde, betaal, gewerk, verhaal, lepel, besem, 
de ken, bakker, etc. 
5. Long ·e at the end of a word is rf'pre;;ented 
hy -ee: see, tree, mee, gedwee (mPek), ete. 
At the- end of a syllable it is rern·esented by -e, 
as has ht:>en noted in Rule 2, lmt -ee is retaine1l in 
,·om pound wunl" Hll(l before strong t-mffixPs: veepos, 
seekus, meegaan, tweelin.g, weedom. 
G. In closed s.vllahlP'l the vowel i is Jll'lllloum·cd 
like th{' weald,\· nr<'ented e: dik, wonderlik, Ptr. 
lli open unaccented ;;ylln l1l<>s it i.~ pronmmr·cd likP 
the Bnglish ea in "f'at": indiwidu, militer, etr. 
In closed HyllalJle.,, in accented H,\·llahle;;, and in 
tll'l'i ve<l words il1is sound is repre;;euted by ie: hie·r, 
riet, fil}sika, kritiek, kriesis, Russies, Russiese, etc. 
At the end of a word this sound is repres<'nted by 
ie, whether :1erented or u11t: stasie, sediesie, etc. 
[For Nus. ~. :3, ·1, 5, li, Hl'e also Chapter Tl.J 
7. In open syllal1lPs or at !h~> end of a word the 
lengtheued formq of ;;hnri e le) and n1 short o (6) get 
tl1e sig11 ln clo'll'fl syllahlE'H {'Tilling in an r, e 
·ltJ :\!ASKEW .\IILLI~I{'S ,\FHIK,\.\XS GlL\:\UL\R 
!'>omri imr'l gets Hw 1\, hut not if tl1P r is followrtl hy 
another consonant: se, le, wereld, kerel, more, sore, 
perd, bord, stert, rtr. 
R. 'l'he dieresis ( ··) is usPtl in Afrikaans to mark 
tlw tlivision of syllables wht>rr tl">· I'OWPls !'ome ingPther 
which \\oulll he prmtmntrrcl a~ onr sound if thPre werr 
llO 111flrk n£ divi'{iOn: bree, kniee, VrOeer, hoer, see. 
I£ thPn• i~-1 no llmtgl'f of thr two -;,vllahleR being· 
tab•u and pronmmrrd a'l one, the dierPsis nrt•tl 1101 be 
u 'lrcl: da.e, koeie, Juie, goue, otr·. In thrsr words ther<' 
c·uu he no um1 ht as tn tlw nmulwr nr tlivi,imt of S;\ lln hlr-;. 
\). "l\fost. foreign WOrds are nOW spelletl aC't'Ortling 
to illl' Afrikaan'l prnnuuC'iatiun :-
forrign ae lwC'ollles ~\.fr. e: pedagogies, esteties. 
" 
" 
" 
" 
,, 
e ,, ee: komitee, dominee. 
ai 
au 
eau 
c 
ch 
th 
qu 
X 
z 
" 
" 
" 
" 
" 
e: affere (uffair); populer. 
, ou: outeur (author): ouditeur. 
o: tablo, buro, kado. 
k or s, aC'rDrlling to vronuu­
eiation: ka.fee, sentrum, ser­
tifikaat. 
g, k, s, sj, or tj, flrrnrcling 
tn pronunciation: gaos, gemie 
(chemistry), kolera, masjien 
(maPhine), Sjinees (ChinP-;e), 
sjokolade, tjek ( t·lH•que). 
, , t: atleet, teater, tesis. 
,,kw: kwartaal (quarlpr). 
., ks: aksioma. heksameter. 
" s: sefier (zephyr), soologie. 
The W in ~\frikaan!'> is wriHPn only where it is 
!ward in pronunriation: indiwidu, aktiwfteit, diwident, 
ewolusie, Skandinawie. 
10. Iu eompouncl nmms ss i!'> written only in the 
following instances : -
FO!t l~XGLii-'H STl'DF.XTi-' 
(a) \Vl1ell ihe stem ol' the lin;t nonn Pl!UH ius, allll 
tlw Heenllll lwg'in '4 with s: jassak, grassaad, de. ; lmt: 
stadsaal, dorpskool, uniwersiteitstudente, rtc. 
(b) \VhL'll the fin.,t part of the nnnpound l'OllHistH 
of the wordH geestes or lewens, aud the HPcond part 
hegins with s: lewensstandaard, geestesskepping, ete. 
11. Jh•torp weakly arcente(l ·lik weakly at'l'l•ntP<l 
e iH wri!tPn unly in the following iHHtanl'PH :-
(a) .\ft!'l' b, d, w: onhebbelik, dadelik, gruwelik, 
Pte.; hut: naamlik, vroulik, aansteeklik, Pte. 
(l>) A Her ft, gt, kt, pt, st: skriftelik, veragtelik, 
bedektelik, stiptelik, beestelik, Pic.; but: hartlik, 
stoflik, etlik, doenlik, etc. 
1:2. Ouly th0 f(lll1rwing fol'lllS arp nuw rPcugnisP·d: 
ek, my, sy (uo lon!l'l'l' ik, myn, syn), as, baie, somar, 
somarso, toe. 
1:~. Compound words are always writt0n as one 
wnrd in Af1ikaans ( '40llll'i imeH jninPd by a hyphen), 
·whPreaK in Eng'liHh they are u..;nally wrii.inn t'Ppamtely. 
Htudenh. fllwul<l rar0fully notp the following rulPs :-
(a) Words expressing one idea are written us one: 
eetkamer, grasgroen, vrugteboom, pypsteel, etC'. 
(h) \VhL'l1 tWO l!Olll1R l'OlllP ( Og'!'( hPr, the firHt lll'in Q' 
mwd in an ad.it>dival fuudion to l]lWlify the second, 
i.lw_y tn P w1 ii tt·n as one >Yurd: Studentevereniging, 
uniwersiteitshuis, goewermentsgeboue, boekwinkel, etc. 
1J l](ler this rnle we have all the eompouud nouns 
uf \\ bil'l1 thP firs! part i'4 a material noun (see undt>r 
Tho Adjel'tive): koperring, ysterpot, silwerhorlosie, 
linnehemp, 0te. 
(e) <leognq•hiC'al uumes of whil'h lhe la~t purl is 
a ('Ollllllllll llOUll: Tafelbaai, Vaalrivier, Drakensberg, 
Robbeneiland, Kerkstraat, Hoofstraat, dr. 
42 :\T A~K ~;w .\JILLRH'R .\ F'RTKAAXS CllL\:\DTA R 
The l1yphen is used in the following instances:­
(i) \Vhen too muuy vowels eome together in the 
process of compounding: twee-uur, re-unie, drie-uur, 
Pte. \Vhen the t•ompotmu is felt to lw an inseparable 
whole, the dieresis may he used, instead of ilw hyphen, 
to avoid confm;inn: beinvloed, drieerlei, etc. 
(ii) \Vith numeral adjectives connected hy en: 
een-en-twintig, ses-en·dertig, honderd-en-drie, etc. 
\Vhen the connecting en is not used, they are written 
as oue word: vyfhonderd, vierduise,nd, etc. 
(iii) In doubling: kort-kort, speel-speel, ffuit-ffuit, 
eie. 
(iv) With titles of which onn or lJOth parts am 
of foreign origin: goewerneur-generaal, superintendent­
generaal. 
(v) With compounds in which proper names, or 
adjectives formed from proper 11ames, occur: Afrikane,r­
nasie, Boere-generaal, etc. 
(vi) With two adjectiws formed frnm geugraphical 
pro peT names: Anglo-Franse oorlog; Anglo-Japanse 
vricndskap, etc. 
(vii) \Vith gengraphieal names t•onsisting of a 
proper name and an adjective or ad Vf'rh: Noord· 
Rusland, Suid-Amerika, Wes-Europa, etc. 
'I'he adjectives formed from these l'illli!Jouuds retain 
the spelling: Suid-Amerikaanse 1n·odukte. 
(viii) \Vith f'ompoumls "·hich are unmnwl m· too 
long, or are not ~'et fplt to be an inst>parable whule: 
Suidpool-ekspediesie, swa,rtwitpens-antiloop, Afrikaner­
voorma.nne. 
l~inally, we may lay it tlowu as a genPral rule that 
we write a word as we pronounce it. If we pronounce 
the word conedly aud give the PqnivalPnt syml)()lfl fDr 
the soundH, we c·annot go far wrong, a, the same sound 
is generally rPpresellted hy ilw .:;ame ~.vlllhol in .\fri ­
kaans. 
CHAPTI<;R JV. 
GENDER- GESLAG. 
There is 110 " g'l'ammati<"tll " gender ill ~Hrikaans. 
Just as i 11 T•~nglish, thP only distinction in gender is a 
Jistinetiun in :-;ex. Thus only living beings are 
classified a.'l to mat-wuline, feminine or common gender; 
inanimate objects havo no gendPr --they are neuter. 
In .Afrikaans, as iu English, u<'iiher ihe article nor the 
adjPdive is infleci e<l to show clifferenee in gender. 
In the cas<' of living bPings 1he feminine may he 
distinguishPd frolll the mast·nlille in the following threp 
ways:-
1. Hy suffixes:-
(a) ·in:-
koning (king)- koningin 
vriend (friend) - vriendin 
hertog (duke)- hertogin 
wolf (wolf)- wolvin * 
beer (bear) - berin 
Jood (Jew) - Jodin 
held (hero) - heldin 
god (god) - godin 
Kristen (Uhristian -
Kristin 
keiser (emperor) - ­
keiserin 
vors (monarch) - vorstin 
heiden (heathen) 
heidin 
* :\[any of these femiuine endings have hePn and are Leing 
dropped in Afrikaans, P.g. boerin beeomcs boervrou, bakster 
bakkersvrou, eh·. 
(b) -es :-
sondaar (sinnPr) -
sondar'es 
baron (huron) - barones 
prins (prince>) - prinses 
bedelaar (beggar)-
bedelares 
digter (poet) - digteres 
(P) -ster (usually after stems 
bakker (haker)- bakster 
we,rker (worker) 
werkster 
(J) -e :-
eggenoot (husbunJ) 
eggenote 
sekretaris (secretar)) -
sekretaresse 
sanger ( singPr) - ­
sangeres 
onderwyser (tPachN) -
onderwyseres 
voog (gn:mlian) 
voogdes 
o:f verbs):-
koper (lmye1·) - koopster 
spreker ( s1wakt•1') --
spreekster 
tesour i er ( trrusurer) 
tesouriere 
president (chairman) -
presidente 
(e) -iese (with foreign wurd;; in -or, -eur) :-
direkteur (director) - akteur (nc tor) - aktriese 
direktriese eksaminator (examiner) 
inspekteur (iuspedor) - eksaminatriese 
inspektriese 
:.?. By prefixes: mannetjie· (mak) and wyfie 
(fPmale) in the c·a~e of animals wllf're no other clistin­
g·uishiug· names fnr male aml fciualL' arP in n-.l': -
mannetjievolstruis (cock oslril'h) - volstruiswyfie 
mannetjie•eend (dralw) - wyfie-eend 
mannetjietier (tiger) - tierwyfie 
~~- Tiy u;;ing different words for tho ma.,euliue ancl 
tho feminine:-
pa (father) - rna 
oom (nude) - tante 
haan (C'ork)- hen 
reun (clog) - teef 
~'OR EXGLlSH STUDKN'l'S -!G 
man (man, huHbanu) -
vrou 
vader ~father) - moeder 
broer (br-other) -- suster 
seun (son) - dogter 
neef ( eum;in) - niggie 
baas (ma-;ter) - noi, nooi 
heer (gentleman) - dame 
jongetjie (boy) - meisie 
oujonkman (lnu·hPlor) -
oujongnoi 
ram (ram) - ooi 
jong (maiiHCIT:mt) 
meid 
bruidegom (lJrideg-room) 
- bruid 
strooijonker (brideHintm) 
- strooimeisie 
hings ( Hlallion) - merrie 
bul (hull) - koei 
peetoom (g·odfather) -
peettante 
oupa (grandfather) 
ouma 
mansmens (male per-;un) 
- vroumens 
buurman (ncighbom) -
buurvrou 
skoonbroer, swaer 
(brother-in-law) -
skoonsuster 
beer (hllar) - sog 
bokram (he-goat) -
bokooi 
skaapram (ram) -
skaapooi 
hingsvul (e11lt) -
merrievul 
jongetjiekind (male 
rhild) - meisiekind 
L The ftlllowing nouns ~ue common gender, and 
ma.\' he ma-;culiut> or femin1ue :-
wees. weeskind (orphan) 
tweeling (twi11) 
vreemdeling (Ktrangpr) 
huisgenoot (member of a 
familv) 
lidmaat (;nPmber) 
gade (huHhand nr wi£,,) 
getuie ( wi trwt's) 
leerling (pupil) 
perd (horse) 
vark (pig) 
hond (dog) 
lam (lamb) 
bok (gnat) 
skaap (sheep) 
hoender (:fowl) 
5. .Furthermore, the difference in gPnder may he 
ln·oug-ht out by the pronouns hy (he), sy (1-1he), dit (it); 
sy (his), haar (her); syne (his), hare (hers) :-Die kind 
het sy kop gestamp (the child bumped his head, i.e. it 
i-; a boy); Die vreemdeling het haar boek vergeet (the 
413 .:\lARKKW 1\1 TLLEH'S AFIUKAAXS GRA:\DIAH 
st1anger has forgotten her Look); Hierdie geld is syne; 
nee, dit is hare! (this money is his; nu, it .i-; hers). 
EXERCISE 37.-Chunge i.he llla~c.:uline into i.he 
frminine, and i.he :feminine into the rua~culinr: 
(1) Die seun van die koning it' 'n prins. (~) ~ly 
vriend het sy hoed vergeet. (a) Die baron hPi 'n mooi 
non. ( 4) My nom is al oud, maar hy is nog sterk. 
(5) Dam·die tligtpr skrywe muoi gedigte. (6) ~1.\ 
ondcrwysPr is 'n jong man. (7) ~fy Yader hei '11 
sekretur.is om hom i.e help. ( 8) Die inspeki eur wu-; 
hv llllR skonl. (!)) Dir arm(' brdelaar vra vir mv lJPri 
g~ld. ( 10) Dautdie sangeres kun buie ruooi. sing. 
I 11) Die hrld het die wolf dooclgemaak. ( 12) ~y 
eggenote is baie l'iek. (13) Die boer is 'n goe.ie bukker. 
(14) Die sPkretaris van ons vereniging i, ook te,ourier .. 
( 15) Die ,J odin het vir haar dogter 'n present gegee. 
( 16) Sy is 'n goeie uktriese. (17) Daardie dame is 'n 
heldin. (lH) Die jongetjie het sy rna lief. (19) }lore, 
haa<~. (20) My Luurmuu t'e haau is dnod. (:21) ~ly 
f.waer hrt haic nPds. (~~) Die vm·s vall J<:ngelaml i-, 
Keiser van lndie. 
hoe<l , -bat 
a 1 ~ alrrady 
Hkrywe '-" write 
doodmaak =--= kill 
forget 
r ocabulary: 
nog ~ still 
g·edigte =- poems 
vereniging =' soc.:ic>ty 
mor(' ' - (good) morning 
X.H.-se 1lenoies posseHsion, IPpresented by an 
apo~->trophe iu Engli'3h: .Jan se hoed (.John's hat). 
II. NUMBER - GETAL. 
The plural ( meervoud) is formed by adding ·e, ·te, 
•S, -ers, -ere to the singular (enkelvoud). 
FOR E~GLI~H ~1TDJijNTD ·17 
1. Plurals in -e :-
(a) Xoum. with thP :wernt un the last s.vllable form 
their plural 1y utl<ling -e. r nder this rule are also 
included nouns u£ une svllahle. \Vhen the final syl­
lable is uuat'l'entP<l, the,\: take •S :-
boom (tree) -borne dronkaard (drunkard) -
pen (pen) - penne dronkaards 
lem6en (orange)- wolf (wolf) - wolwe 
lemoene bandiet ( cuuvict) -
manel (fn)['k-cuat) - bandiete 
manelle tatel (table)- tafels 
bedelaar (lwf!g·ar) - parlement- parlemente 
bedelaars lataard (eowarrl)-
poot (paw) - pote lafaards 
{ll) Nount- ending m -aris tah' ·e in the ]llural:-
sekretaris ( 'leeretary) ·-- notaris (notary) -
sekretarisse notarisse 
In this connedion thr full owing ::;pel ling rules 
must be uh;erved: -
(a) In the ease of nouns haviltg' a long vuwf'l-sound 
(represented hy a duublo vowel-sign) in the ,;ingular, 
the plural form is written with one vowel-sign if it 
occurs in an oppn syllahle: raam (window) - rame; 
orkaan (hurricane)- orkane; geloof (belief)- gelowe. 
(b) Xouns having a short vowel-sound in the final 
syllable duublr their final cuniHmant in the plural in 
llrder to retain the short vowel : pot (pot) - potte ; 
mat (mat)- matte (ie and oe behave like lung vowels).* 
* Tn the case of ie aud oe no C'onfu~iou is po~sible, as is the 
case with a, e, o, and u. These symbols, ie and oe, always 
represent the same sound, ami are of the same length, whether 
they occur in open or in clm,ed syllaLlPs, which is not the case 
with a, e, o, and u. Thus the oe-~ound in boek ib the same as 
that in boe·ke, whereas the a-bmmd, for eJ..ample, in mat is 
short, but long in ma-te, etc. 
-1" :\IARKEW stiLLER'S Al<'RIK.\AXS GRA:\ll\£AR 
( c·) .Mouo~<vllahir, noun!'. in -ee onl v take a dien'"'i" 
<ll1 ihP H('COnd :e for the jllural: See (~ea) - see; Wee 
I WOP) - Wee; tree (yard) - tree. 
(cl) Noum Pnding in f prec·ecled 
or oe, a cliphthong, ol' a <·nusunant 
b.v a long vnwel, ie 
change the f intu 
W iu the plural:-
graaf (sparle) - grawe 
kloof (ravine) - klowe 
wolf (wolf) -- wolwe 
!yf (lJOd~r) - lywe 
grief (grievanre) - ­
griewe 
hoef ( lwof) - hoewe 
diet ( thiPf) diewe 
H the f iH 1nrrrdPd h;y a short Yuwel, it f'hauges 
into WW in the pluml: -
straf (punishme11t) - stof (du"l) - stowwe 
strawwe 
(e) g precrded by a long vowel anrl follmn·L1 h.v an 
e n~ually falls out:-
dag (du.r)- dae oog IPyP)- oe 
slag (blow) - slae weg (mad) - wee 
Exceptions to Rule 1. 
(u) ~iuJw;;yllabic nouns in -lm and -rm, ht'ing 
rrully of two H,dlablrs, tuke s in the plural: -
arm (arm) - arms skelm ~rogue)- skelms 
halm (stalk) - halms swerm' ("warm )-swerms 
(h) The following monosyllabic nouns take S :-
oom (unclP) saal (;;addle) 
neef (cousin) spreeu (thrmh) 
man (husband) leeu (lion) 
broer (brother) seun (sou) 
maat (rompanion) hut: eeu (rentury) - eeue 
2. Plurals in -te :-
Rome nounl:l ending in f, g, p, s, ended in ·t m 
Dutch, alHl have lost thiH final t iu Afrikaans, Lnt lll 
thr plural it is fuund again hPfure ·8: 
drif (pasRion) -- drifte 
nag (night) --- nagte 
krag (powl'r) - kragte 
vrug (fruit) - vrugte 
amp (profr-,-;ion) - ampte 
nes (uPs!)- neste 
Ius (lnRt) - luste 
gif ( gifi) -- gifte 
:3. Plurals in -s :-
4fl 
vrag (load) - vragte 
wag (sentinrl) - wagte 
lug ( ::1ir) - lugte 
manuskrip (man us<·ri1•t) 
manuskripte 
bors (breast) -- borste 
gees (spi1it)-- geeste 
lu addition to ilw I'XC'eptious rnrntionrd uwll'l' 
l'lass l, thr following nmms take •S in tlw plur::1l :-
( n) Xoun'l of mon• than one syllable ending in -el. 
-em, -en, -er, and not having tho ac·<·Pnt on the la;.t 
-.~·11a hle :-
kerel (fellow) -- kerels 
voel (hird) -- voels 
besem \ brnom) - besems 
teken ( -;ign l - tekens 
Ia ken ( sht'rt) - Ia kens 
herder (shephrrd) 
herders 
leer ( arltly) - leers 
winkel (shop)- winkels 
koeel (1mllet) - koei:ils 
asem ( hreatlu - asems 
baken ( her~con) - bakens 
de ken ( ~'' nm tNpanl') 
de kens 
moeder (rnothl'r) - ­
moeders 
swaer (brother-in-law) 
swaers 
(h! Nount< of two syllnbles ewling in \YC'aklY 
n<'t Pntecl -ing L1kf' s; torings (tmvPrs); kussings (pil ­
low:-.); voerings diningH). 
Hut nouns in -ing fonueJ from VPrhs n;;unlly ha\C• 
two plural'!:-
vergadering (meeting) - vergaderinge, vergaderings 
bewerking (working) - bewerkinge, bewerkings 
wandeling (walk) - wandelinge, wandelings 
50 :HASKEW l\TILLEH:H AFRTKAAXH GRA:\DfAR 
~ ouns in ·ling and -eling mually take -e :-
ellendelinge (Rcoundrels) jongelinge (young men) 
volgelinge (followers) vlugtelinge lfugit.iYes) 
nuwelinge (newcomers) howelinge (<'ourtiers), 
leerlinge (pupilR) Pte. 
It may he noted here that the tendency in Afri ­
kaans seP~R to be to use •S as plnral emling ~athPr than 
-e (c£ . .Engli~h); and th:1t writerR under influence of 
T>utch will nRe the plural in -e to a greater extent than 
writerR not Ro influenf'Pd. Ei'lpPcially in rPgard to 
nouns in -ing, -ling, and -eling is thi<: the case. The 
more learned and hooki~h these wonls are, the more 
<'ommonly will they have the pluml in -e, hut as they 
become more widely nRed, more popular, they will very 
likely take •S aR plural ending. 
(e) Xouns ewling in 
klagte (complaint)­
klagtes 
gedagte (thought) - ­
gedagtes 
swarte (hlaek one) -
swartes 
an unac<·PntPd e take s: 
belofte (promi.;P) -
beloftes 
rooie (re<l one) - rooies 
jonge (young one) 
jonges 
(d) Nouns of forPign ongm with tl1e accPnt ou the 
last syllahlf' ofieu han' two plurals:-
majoors, majore (majuP;) offisiers, offisiere (•rfficers) 
koepons, koeponne direkteurs. direkteure 
( eoupons) ( dirC'ei or.~) 
hotels, hotelle (hotPl~) 
SomPtimes thPy take •S 
generaa.ls ( genPrals) 
kolonels (colonelR) 
akteurs (actors) 
only:­
ambassadeurs 
dnrs) 
(<') PropPr Ilmlles take ·S, unlPss the,v Pnd lll s 
already (\\·hen thPy take e); and when thPy f'nd 111 a 
FOH, E:\GLT8U STl1DEXT8 .ll 
vowel thev take 's: die Hofmeyrs: <lie van der Merw~'s; die Hugo's; die Piets: die Jans; die Swartse; 
<lie Naude's. 
(£) ~ouus pncling in -aal, -aar, -aard, -ier take s 
i £ they tlenote persons, but e· i£ they denote things:- -
korporaals ( corporab) 
wewenaars (widowers) 
bedelaars (l1eggars) 
lafaards ( cc .war<ls) 
Lut :--
kwartale ( <pmrter.;;) 
gevare ( c1angers) 
barbiers (barbers) 
winkeliers (Hhnp­
kecpers), etc:. 
riviera (rivers) 
papiere (papers), etc. 
'l'he noun:-~ barbare (barbm·ians), Spanjaarde (Span­
ianls), Hongare (IIungarians), Tartare (Tartars), a1 e 
t'xceplium; to this rule. 
( p;) X o uns Pnding in weakly ace en ted -ee anJ. ·ie 
take s. rnder this rule are inrhulecl all the climiuu­
tin's :-
weduwees (wi<lnw'l) 
skaduwees (shadow'l) 
stasies (stations) 
4. Plurals in ·'s :-
bokkies (little g-nab) 
boompies (little trPes) 
koninkies (litile king·s) 
LPlters o£ the alphah~t and nouns en<ling in an 
Hl'<'entetl ·a nr ·O take ·'s m the plural: d's; m's; pa's 
(fathPr~:~): hoera's (hurrahs); buro's (lmreaux); tablo's 
I tn hleanx). 
T£ the final a is unaccentPd, they tnkP s accunling 
to rule: massaS (masseR); paddas (frogs). 
l•'ureig'n namet- in -ee, ·i, ·O, ·U alsu take 's: 
kafee's, impi's, duo's, parvenu's. 
52 MASKJ<jW MTLLF:R'S AFRIKAANH GHA~C\L\R 
5. Plurals in mers and -ere:-
A few nmmR take -ers or -ere in the plural:-
kind (ehild) - kinders gelid (rank) - geledere 
lam (lamb)- Iammers goed - goedere (p•lF-w~-
gemoed (mind) - sions) 
gemoedere lied (F.ong) - liedere 
kalf (ralf) -- kalwers maat (comrarl<') -- maters 
This -ers or ·ere is rcall~- a douhl<' pluwl rndiug. 
as the -er wa;; an old plural (<'f. Eng. Phil<lwn, 
hrethren, an<l thr (Jprman plural Pwling -er). 
In crrtnin eomponnd;; the -er Rtillexpressrs a plural 
mraning: lammertyd (lambing srason); kinderkamer 
(nursery); kalwerhok (kraal for c-alve;;). 
The singular forms of hoenders (ftnvls), eiers 
(eggR), blare (leavrs nf a tree) arp. not, a~ in Dutf'h, 
hoen, ei and blad, hut hoender, eier, an<l blaar ( ("f)JJ­
iraried from bladder), thiR -er bring the ohsolrte plund 
ending. 
t'"nder the influrnre of tho Hihlr wr oft.pn ~.;rt 
expresRions like: Kindere lsraels (Children n£ Israp]); 
lammere van Sy kudde (lamh-; of His fold), rtr. 
G. Irregular plurals:--
(a) In ordf'r tu presPrve the short nnvel ~omHl i11 
ihe plural, a final ronsonant prPrrtlPc.l hy SlH'h a vnwel :,. 
douhled: dak (roof)-- dakke; hen (hm11 - henne: e1 c. 
Rui t.he following 110uns lengthen ihL' slwrt Y•lwel 
in the plural: -
bad (hot spring) - baaie 
bedrag (amount) -
bed rae 
blad (leaf of a hook) -
blaaie 
bevel (command) 
bevele 
dag (day) - dae 
dal (dale) - dale 
gat (hole) - gate 
glas (glas~) - glase 
pad (path) - paaie 
slag (blow) - slae 
vat (vat) vate 
FOR EKGUSH STrDF:XTH 
verdrag (treaty) 
verdrae 
gebed (prayer) - gebede 
gebrek (want) - gebreke 
God (God) - gode 
gebod (PomntatHlm<'nt) -
gebooie 
hof (eourt, gnrden) 
howe 
oorlog (war) - oorloe 
vlag (flag) -viae 
spel (play) - spele 
weg (mad) - wee 
(b) ThP followiug irrrgular plurals may aho l,p 
notPf! hf're: -
gevoel (feelings) --
gevoelens 
hemp (shirt) - hemde 
graf (g-rave) -- grafte(s) 
jas (Iain<"oa1) - jaste, 
jasse 
jong (labourer) -­
jongens 
I ewe (lifP) - lewens, 
lewes 
lid (memh<'r) - lede 
noi (mistress) - noiens 
nooi (misirN~s) - nooiens 
deug (virtue) - deugde 
maag (virgin) - maagde 
patat (swePt poiato) -
patats 
sog (sow) - soe 
stad (town) - stede 
skip (ship) - skepe 
wa (waggon) - waens 
wese ( lwi n g) - wesens 
(r) ~ouns ending iu ·heid haYP ·hede in ih<' plural: 
waarheid (truth) -- waarhede; swarighcid ( diffir11lty) 
- swarighede. 
(d) A ft•w nouns c·omjt{)unded v>ith ·man haYe 
-manne, -mense, or -mans in the plural :-
koopman (m<'IThant)- koopmans 
timmerman ( enqtPntrr) - timmermans 
w~rksman (workman) - werksmense 
s{ilatsman (;datrsman) - staatsmanne 
voorman (lrnder) - voormanne 
Boesman ( Bushmau) - Boesmans, Boesmanne 
but:-
Engelsman IEngli.,hmau) - Engelse 
Fransman ( Fren<"hman) -- Franse 
buurman (neighbour) - bure 
5! :HASKEW :\ULL.El~'S AFRIKAAXS GRA:\nlAH. 
(P) A number of nouns have moro than one plural: ­
bad (hath) - badde, baddens, batte 
bed (bPd) - bedde, beddens 
graf (grave) - grafte, graftes, grawe 
klip (stonP) - klippe, klippers 
lewe (life)- lewes, lewens 
lid (joint of the body) - lede, ledemate 
mied, miet (stack) - miede, miedens, miete 
vark (pig) - varke, varkens 
volk (nation) - volke, volkere 
vrou (woman, wifP) - vroue, vrouens 
voorskoot (apron) - voorskote, voorskooie 
(!) Some nouns have two plnra1'1 with different 
ntPanmgR : -
bad - badde', baaie (natural or hot bath~), 
badde, baddens, batte (hathR to wa;~h in l. 
blad- blaaie (leaves of a hook), 
blad, blaar- blare (leaveR of a tree). 
drif - drifte (paR;~ioml), 
driwwe (fords). 
goed - goedere (poRResRions), 
goeters (thingR). 
hoop - verwagtinge (exppdatinns), 
hope (hPapR). 
las - laste (1oad'l, difficultiPs), 
laste (joints). 
letter - letters (of the alphahet). 
lettere (literature). 
maat - maats, maters (Pomraclrs), 
mate (mea;;nreR). 
raad - raadgewings (advice), 
r&de (council"). 
rug - rugge, rugte (hacks), 
ruenS (hill-creRts). 
saal - saals (Raddle'l), 
sale (halls). 
FOR EXGLTRH 8'l'UDE~TS 
skof - skowwe (hump nn ncrk of an ox), 
skofte (work-shirts). 
vorm - vorms (moulds), 
vorme (form'-1, a'lpect~). 
(g) A fpw diminutives han' a double plural: ­
goedjie - goedjies, goetertjies 
kalfie - kalfies, kalwertjies 
klippie - klippies, klippertjies. 
lammetjie- lammetjies, lammertjies 
maatjie - maatjies, matertjies 
(h) l:iomP IWllllS han' a hol'l'owrd plural: ­
aanbod (offer) - aanbiedinge 
bedrog (clerPit) - bedrieerye 
beleg (siege) - beleeringe 
doel (purpo'-1P) - doeleindes 
eer (honour) - eerbewyse 
genot (enjoynwnt)- genietinge 
seen (hle"sing) - seeninge 
5.3 
7. A large number rJt nouns are only u"ed in the 
plural, and haYP no singular:-
harsings (b1ains) 
pokkies (small-pox) 
masels (mf'aslrs) 
semels (bran) 
koste, onkoste (l'ost~) 
medisyne (medicine) 
komplimente (compli­
ments) 
toiings (rags) 
fraiings (tassrls), etc. 
H. Sonw nouns haYe no plural: -
(a) Xames of materials: goud (gold); koper 
(copper): silwer (silYer). 
(b) The majority tJf ahstraPt nouns: liefde (love); 
hoogmoed (pride) : welsprekendheid (eloquence), etc. 
56 .:\lASKI<~\Y .:\HLLER'S AFRIKAA~S (IRA.:\L\L\R 
n. .Xom1,., expre'>sing weight. measure, or value, 
pre('edrd hy :.1 tlefinitr- numrrnl arljPdivr, arr U'lNl in 
the singular with a 11lural mraning :-
drir- paar kousP (threr- pairs of stockings); 
\',d jaar geledP. (five years ago); 
tiPn pond sterling (ten pounds sterling): 
sewe voet hoog (seYen feet high); 
.Tan is twintig jaar nud (.John is twPnty years uf age\. 
Xotr :-vier pond suil<er ( f'uur p<nnHl-; ot Rugar) 
signitir'l a <1uantit;v takrn eullPL'ti\·rly, 
while vier ponde suiker signifi<·s the iour l'<'nml" 
taken srpm atf•l,v. one by one. 
So al,;o: drie jaar \<me period), drie jare (thH•t> 
year-; tnkPn srparatr-ly). 
EXERCISE 38.--ChaHge the singular i1do the plural: ­
(.Y./3.-- The Yerh in Afrikaans io. nut intieded f11r 
number or person). 
(1) Die prPtlikaTit <lra 'n nwn<·l. (~l Daar li- 'u 
hrood op die tafd. (;~) Die hedrlaur vra 'u JIPllllir. 
(4) Dir sPkrPtaris skrywe 'n l1rid. (5) Dir mrisil' 
maak die raam oop. (G) ~1,v lmH'r se tree is groter a-.. 
mynP. (T) Dnar is '11 wolf in dir skaapkraal. (R) .\s 
ui0 wind waai, trek <lie sto£. (H) ~ly nog is 'u c}pe] Yllll 
my l:vf. (lfl) DiP morder <lnt haar kind np haar ann. 
( 11) 1Jaar was 'n ~kPlm in Oll'l kalllPI'. ( 12) ~I Y <lnni 
het 'u SJll'PPU g'PRkiP,t. maar my hmrr hd 'n lPPU. dnnd­
grmaak. ( 1:1) Die pPrd trt>k 'u swaur Yrng \Tllg'tP. 
(14) ])il' lwn ;;ii op llftar nrs. 1lfl) Uir Y11i•l si11g in 
tliP boom. (}(j) 11aar iR 'n hPAt'lll it• koop in diP 
wiukt>l. ( 17) ln <lie wrgadPring ;;it Pk IJjl 'n ~agtp 
kussing. (_1~) ~fy tante he-t 'n helofip gomaak dai ".\' 
nr m:v 'n mooi ja, sal g-eP. (HI\ .Jan, k11m span diP 
pPrd Yoor die wa. 1~0) Die g'PliPTaal g'<'P \·ir diP 
luitPuant 'n brnl. (~l) DaardiP pad is maklik. 122) In 
di0 stad waai 'n vl:Jg. 12.)) Die Rkip spi] op tlir 'lPe. 
FOR EKGLI'1H STrDr~XTS 51 
1~-:1:) Die timrnermau nwak 'll wa. (:!5) }ly buurman 
lll't 'n dogter en 'n seun. (2o) Uuanlie man se vrou 
i:; 'n maaud gel~>•le dooJ. (:!7) Die vark is in die tuin. 
(~H) Uaar ~ taan 'n mieJ o p die laud. ( ~!)) -:\Iy maat 
"e rug is H!'l'l'; daarom gaau hy met sy pa na die bad toe. 
(;{0) On" lwt gistl•r 'u grout verg,ulPriug- in !lie ~ual 
gehad. 
EXERCISE 39.-l'ut the plural into the ~iugnlar: 
(1) Die geuietiuge van die lewe i~ maar kort. 
(~) Die jukke tlruk up tlie ~kowwe van die o~"l'. 
(;~) Kamelt• mud :-;wuur lu-,te dra. ({) Die kinder:, wat'l 
hulll' voetL' i11 die lmthh·u". ([J) Die FrausP en die 
Engelse was groo t niell(le iu die laaHte oorlog. ( ()) Op 
die grafte van ous •mers ;;taan gedenktdu'ns. ( 7) Die-
lt>de van daunlie n•rPniging is almal vmuens. (8) DiP 
koeie ht>t niP geuoeg melk ,·ir hulle knlwers nil'. 
dl) Die jougeijies in ons slwol dra kakiehemdL'. 
( 10) DiP !laP is 1aiP warm in die somPr. (11) Daar·die 
tautes Hl' kiurlPrH l.et altyd klagtes oor hull!' on<lPr­
wy,pr:-;. ( 1 ~) In diL· kl'I'ke word daar ge•l ure ude oorlue 
gehedP opgP:-.tunr lot 1li£' guJP. 
l·ocabulary: 
predikan t - parson 
'n dPPl ~ a part 
.iuk yoke 
gedPnkteken - memorial 
upg-estuur -- :-.t•nt np 
'n brood - u louf uf bread 
gelPde - ago 
was - - ( 1) to waHh; 
(2) was 
g't'llUt'g' - pnough 
Ill. CASE- NAAMVAL. 
Owiuo- to the Jetiective character uf Afrikaans there 
are no iutlediom; to show the n·lations of a noun to the 
other words in the senteuce; in other words, we have 
no ca::;e-euJings. As iu Bnglish, the relation is shown 
58 ::\1ASKEW :Hll,LER'S AFRIKAAXS GHA1D1AR 
by the position of the noun in the sPni.ent·e, awl h~ the 
aid of prepositions:-
Jan slaan die Kaffer (John bea1s thP Katlir). 
Piet gooi vir Klaas met 'n klip ( PiPt fling~ a stone 
at Klaas). 
Ma, gee vir my brood ("linthPr, give mp [lit. for 
me] bread). 
Thus there is nn change madP i11 ihe noun ibPl£ to 
tlistinguish between the subject ami the ohjert ( din't·t 
or indirect) of a sentence - pxadly as in Engli~h. 
Posset:>t:>ion in Afrikaans is shown hy i.hP u~e ,,f 
the particle se or the preposition van (of) :--
Daardie man se vrou is siek (that man· s wi fp is ill). 
My dogter se voet is seer (my daughtpr's fuot is 
sore). 
Dit is Piet se mes (this is Piet's kuife). 
Die kinders se speelgoed (the childrpn's toys). 
Jan van oom Willem (Uncle ·william's John). 
Die stert van die perd (thP horse's tail). 
·Die perd se stert ., .. 
Die stoel se poot (the lPg of i.hP chair). 
Die poot van die stoel , 
There are a great numbpr of words and expression:-; 
in Afrikaans, however, wh1eh ~how ea~e-inflrxionH, hut 
they are Dutch forms which have hec·ome part of the 
language through the influence of the Hil,le mul Dutch 
literature:--
ternouernood (hardly) 
ter dood veroordeel (to 
condemn to death) 
ter harte neem (take to 
heart) 
ter elfder ure (at the 
eleventh hour) 
terwille van (for the sake 
of) 
saans (in the evening) 
kind des doods (vidim of 
death) · 
stem des roepende (voice 
of one calling) 
brood der smarte (bread 
of a ffi iction) 
engel des ligs (angel of 
light) 
FOR ENG LlSH STCDE~TS 5!) 
mettertyd 
time) 
(in course of desgeliks (likewise) 
byderhand (at hand) 
smorens (in the morning) 
sweet des aanskyns (sweat 
u£ the brow), etc. 
In the following rxJnessions the •S is a ~ngn of ihc 
Partitive Genitive:-
wat moois (something 
pretty) 
iets nuuts ( -,oruething 
new) 
iets wonderliks ( "ome­
thing wonderful) 
niks nuuts (nothing m·w), 
etc . 
• Y.JJ.-'l'he prepusiiion vir (to, fill') is ust•tl with the 
indirect object: gee vir Piet jou rues (give Piet :lit. to 
Piet] your knife); 
~P vir my jou naam (tell me your name). 
Rut it may abo be used after transitive wrbs with 
the direct object, i:f the direct obj<>ct is a proper nnme 
or a pronoun standing in the plac·e o£ the name of a 
per"ou :-
Die onderwyser slaan vir dan (the teacher heals 
John); ek sal vir jou skup (1'11 kick you); die vnbtruis 
Hal vir julie ja (the ostrich will chase you). 
EXERCISE 40.-Translatt> into Afrikaa11s :-
(1) This is John's knife. (2) William's hor:-.P l'tl 
dead. (3) This is something new. (4) l stand on an 
ant-hill. (5) My motht>r's hat is very pretty. (6) The 
leg o:f the chair is broken. (7) Give me the children's 
toys. (8) That is something wonderful. (9) The 
teac·her beats Klaas. (10) My brother's foot is Hure. 
(11) The tail of that horse is very lung. (12) My sister 
gives me bread. 
nO :\!ASKEW .\llLLER'R AFRIKAANS GHA.\r:\L\R 
IV. DIMINUTIVES - VERKLEINWOORDE. 
Diminutives in Afrikaans are funned hy adding· the 
->affixes -ie, ·jie, -tjie, -etjie, or -pie to the noun,. 
1. The diminutin~ suffix ·ie is ud<lPd to Jwuns 
t•nding in f, g, k, p, or s :-
duif ( duw) - duifie 
stof (dust) - stoffie 
saag (saw) -- sagie 
lag (laug-h) - laggie 
dag (<lay)- daggie 
stok (stil'k) - stokkie 
spook (ghost) -- spokie 
gaap (yawn) - gapie 
pop (<loll)- poppie 
kas (cu}J1oard) - kassie 
huis (house) - huisie 
boek (hook) - boekie 
lamp (lamp) - lampie 
~. Xoun~> clllling in d or t take ·jie :-
hoed (hat) - hoedjie meid (sprvunt)- meidjie 
kant (laee, edgr) - voet (foot) - voetjie 
kantjie woord (word) - woordjie 
lint (ribbon) - lintjie 
:t (a) :!'\ ou11s rmling in I, n, or r p1 e<'edPd by a 
long vowel or diphthong, oe, ie or 1,y an unal'cented 
vuwel, take -tjie :-
paal (pole)- paaltjie 
stoel ( ehair) - stoeltjie 
lepel ( ;,puon) - Je,peltjie 
deken (eount<'rpane) -
dekentjie 
toon (toP)- toontjie 
peer (pear) - peertjie 
water (water) - watertjie 
beker (jug-) - bekertjie 
meul (mill) - meultjie 
(h) Xouns ending in a vowel also take -tjie:-
vrou (woman, wife) - leeu (lion) - leeutjie 
vroutjie lei (slate) - leitjie 
koei (<'ow) - koeitjie tree (step, yard) -
tou (rope) - toutjie treetjie 
sooi (sod) - sooitjie buro (bureau)- burootjie 
4. Nouns ending in I, m, n, or r prece<lPd hy a 
FOR ENGL18H STlTDEXTD 61 
short accented vowel take •etjie. ('l'he final consonant 
is, of course, double in this case):-
kam (comb)- kammetjie man (man) - mannetjie 
kar (cart) - karretjie tol (top) - tolletjie 
5. K uuns ending in m preceded by a long vowel 
or diphthong, ie or oe, an unaccented vowel, I, or r, 
take ·pie:-
boom (tree) - boompie 
raam (window) - raampie 
besem (hroom) -
besempie 
balsem (halm) - bal­
sempie 
rym (rhyme) - rympie 
duim (thumb) - duimpie 
halm (stalk) - halmpie 
skelm (rogue) - s,kelmpie 
arm (arm) - armpie 
swerm (swarm) -
swermpie 
G. (a) ~ouns in -ng, with the accent on the seeund 
last syllable, change the final g into k ami add -ie for 
the diminuiive :-
koning (king)- koninkie 
ketting (chain) -
kettinkie 
woning (dwt>lling) -
woninkie 
rotting (cane)- rottinkie 
herhaling (repetition) 
herhalinkie 
vertelling (story) -
vertellinkie 
(b) Other nnum; in -ng simply take -etjie: -
kring (cirde)-kringetjie gesimg (hymn)-
wandeling (walk) - gesangetjie 
wandelingetjie vreemdeling (stranger) -
ring (ring) - ringetjie vreemdelingetjie 
Thero s!'ems to Le a tPndeli<',V, however, to affix the 
elllling -kie al':lo to nouns in -ng which do not .full under 
the rule given in (a). This is e:;peeiully the ease with 
nouns of more than two :;vllables with the ]u..;t twu sYl-
lables unaceentPd. · · 
rekening (account) - rekeninkie 
vergadering (meeting) - vergaderinkie 
wandeling (walk) - wandelinkie; etc. 
ti2 MASKE\V ~1TJ.T,ER'S A~'RlKAAXS GlU:\EIIAR 
7. Irregular diminutives: 
blad !)ea£ of a book) - wa (wag-gun) - waentjie 
blaadjie gat (holt>) -- gaatjie 
glas ( g-lasR) - glasie !ewe (life) - lewetjie. 
nooi (mi;;tresR) - lewentjie 
nooientjie pad (road) -- paadjie 
noi (mistress) - noientjie vat (vat) - vaatjie 
spel (play) - spelletjie, rib (rib)- ribbetjie 
speletjie 
R. The Afrikander is Ro fond o£ diminutives that 
he frPt[uently tries to heighten the eifert by prefixing­
klein (small) to words already in the 1liminutive form: 
'n klein mannetjie; 'n ldein kindjie; ons klein mensies 
(we tiny little people), etc. 
The diminutive is verv widPlv used in Afrika~lll.,, 
not only to l'Xlll'eHs dimin'ution, l;nt also endearment, 
familiarity, ur contempt. 
As a term of endearment it is Pxtensively used: 
(a) H.v parPnts to 1·hiltlrPn: my skapie (my littlP 
sheep); my klein engeHjie (my little ang-el); mamma 
se lammetjie (motht>r's lambkin); etc. 
(b) hy lovers: my hartjie (my darling); my skatjie 
(my treasure); my liefie (my tlear); etc. 
H is familiarly used amongo:t frit>llllH and com­
panions: ou boetie (old chum); oompie (uncle); ete. 
It is very generally used to exprPRS contempt: 
Ag wat, hy is maar 'n ou skoolmeestertjie! (pooh, he 
is only a little schoolmaster); daardie ou klerkie (that 
little clerk) ; ete. 
9. A number o£ words in ~\frikaans have a 
diminutive form, but are not felt as such, being th<' 
only remnants of Dutch nouns which have fallen out o£ 
use, or have acquired another meaning:-
FOR E~GLL''fl S'ITDE~TH li3 
Koppie (!'up). the word kop being used for head iu 
Afrikaan~; mandjie (ha'lket), mand being ne,·er u,.,eJ 
i11 Afrikaans; kelkie (,vinpgluss), kelk bc>ing used i11r 
thP eup of a fit1wer; boordjie (collar), boord " orchard; 
boontjie (hcan); meisie (girl); jongetjie (hoy); ertjie 
(pea); etc. 
10. AcljPdive" UMC'd as nouns may oho take the 
Jiminuti ve form:-
da,mlie kleintjie (i1wt swa11 oue); 
hiPrtlie swartetjie (thiR little hlack une); 
hier<lie enetjie (ihis liHe oJtP); Pte. 
EXERCISE 41.-Put all ilw nouns into the diminuti\ e 
fCJl'l11 : -
(1) Die peru trc> k die kar. ( ~) Die vruu wl·rk in 
die hms. (;{) llaar man werk op die land. (4:) ln 
ous tuin groei baie l1lomme. (I)) Jan is 'u Rtout kind. 
(G) 11 ic>rdie seun is 'n skelm. (_ 7) Jly dogter se arm 
is Reer. (8) Anna, neem die heSl'lll en vee die kamc>r 
uit! (9) Op die ta£Plle 'n lrpel. (10) Die kin<l sped 
mPt sy wa. (11) Oom, sit ma:tr op daar·die slnel. 
( 12) Die vruu knm haar h:ne mc>t 'll kam. (1;)) Die 
me~ster slaan die sf'uns met 'n rotting. (14) Die Loom 
is groen. (15) Daar i::. 'n mui'l in die kas. (Hi) Pid 
"llt'el mPt ".V hom1. (17) llie haan kmai, <lie hen 
kPkkel, die lam hli'r, diP hok -;pring, die vark ,;kree, die 
kar ry, en die hund hlaf. 
trek ~-" to pull 
sc>nn son, boy 
kekkrl - to t'ackle 
bla£ - to bark 
groei -- to grow 
Vocabulary: 
uitvee --" to sweep 
blPr ~- to bleat 
stout - - naug-hty 
ki·aai == to crow 
ry ~to ride 
CHAPTRR V. 
THE PRONOUN - DIE VOOR~AA~IWOORD. 
I. The PERSONAL PRONOUNS are:-
Nom. 
1. ek (I) 
2. jy, u (you) 
3. hy (he) 
sy (she) 
dit (it) 
1. 
<) 
"'· 
Nom, 
on,; (we) 
julle, u (you) 
(jul) 
SI~GULAR. 
Objective (Dat. and Ace.) 
m;v (me) 
jou, u (you) 
hom (him) 
haar (her) 
uit (it) 
PLrHAL. 
Objective (Dat. and Ace.) 
on~ (us) 
jnlle, u (yon) 
(jnl) 
3. hulle, hul (they) hulle, hnl (them) 
XotP.-1. Nome ·writers u-.e ik for the bt per,. 
sing-., but ek is the ~H·reptetl J'nnu. 
2. Jy, jOU, jUJie are the familiar lOl'lllS of aUUl'eSd 
used amongst friends, and towards 1·hildren and 
servants. 
U is the polite form used for -;uperiors and 
strang-ers. There is a disinclination 011 the part of the 
people, however, to use u, as being too t>titf, :md its 
place is take11 hy jy m a repetition u£ the proper noun: 
Pa, hier is vir Pa 'n present (Father, here i::; a present 
FOR EXGLTSH S'lTDEN'fS 65 
£11T you); Dag, Oom! wil Oom nie inkom nie? (Good­
day "Gnrle: won't you come in r) 
0. Jou iR frerpH'ntly used as a Nominative of 
Address in sur' h expr<.'Hsions as :-Jou lelikerd! (you 
ugly thing!); jou skelm! (you knave!); and as au 
Ethic Dative in expressions such as :-Jou waarlik 
(actually); jou wrintig (really). 
4. As in the case o£ nouns, the preposition vir 
is very extensively used with pronouns, even in the 
Accusative Case (Direct object) :-Ek sal vir jou slaan 
(I'll thrash you); die perd sal vir hom skop (the horse 
will kick him). 
5. A preposition + dit becomes daar + the pre­
position :-·Waar is jou hoek? lflk sit daarop (never 
op dit) (Where is your book? I am sitting on it). So 
also daaronder (underneath it); daaroor (about it, over 
it); daarin (in it); daaruit (out o£ it); daaraan (on it); 
daarsonder (without it); daarmee (with it). 'These 
are termed Pronominal Adverbs (voornaamwoordelike 
bywoorde). 
6. .\.s Reflexive (wederkNende) Pronouns the 
Aceusative forms of the Personal Pronouns are used, 
usually without •Se·lf :-Ek skeer my (I am shaving 
myself) ; Piet was hom (Piet is washing himself) ; jy 
behoort jou te skaam (you ought to be ashamed of 
yourself); hy draai hom om (he turns round, lit. he 
turn"l himsPl£ round). 
7. As Beciprora 1 (weuerke1-lge) Pronoun is used 
mekaar :-Bulle soe11 mekaar (they kiss each other); 
die moe<l<'r en uie dogter het mekaar lie£ (the mother 
and the duug·ht<'r loYe ench other). 
8. For the sake of cleamess or of emphasis -self 
may he affixeu to any pel'Stll1al pronou11 :-ekself (I 
mysplf); .i.r sal net vir jouself "eermaak (you will only 
hm t ~ onrsplf); hy het dit self gcdnen (he did it him-
f>li )IARKEW :\r!LLER'R A FRlKAANR GRA1DL\R 
!'elf); f'l{ sal liPwer-; self gaan (I'll rather gn my~-;elf); 
.Tan hd homself ve1inoor (.John killed him.,elf, i.e. not 
~;omehody else). 
!l. Dit is is usually contra!'ted to dis in the -;poken 
la11guage: dis nie wuar nie (it is not true). Dis myne! 
II; nie, dis syne! (It is mine! Isn't, it'., his!) 
II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS- BESITLIKE 
VOORNAAMWOORDE. 
1. The following Pnt'se;;si.ve Pronouns are used 
a<ljedivally:-my, jou, u, sy, haar, ons, julie, u, hulle. 
Dit is my, jou, u, sy boek (Thi.H iH my, your, hi;; 
hook). Nee, Jit is haar hoek (No, it is her hook); i~ 
dit ons, julie, of hulle grld? (is it our, your, or theit· 
money?) 
Xot('.-Tnstead of julie, hulle, the ahbreviatf·d 
form'! jul, hul may alHo he use!l. 
:.!. The following l'osse'l'llVl' Pronouns are U'lP!l 
suh'ltautively) :---
myne (mine}; joue (.vomH); syne (his): hare 
ihrr;;): ons s'n (ours); julie s'n, u s'n (yours); 
hulle s'n (theirs). 
\Yie se meH iH !1it hie1die!-' 
dit iH syne (Whose knife is ihis? 
his). 
Dit i-; myne. XrP, 
It i'l minP. Xo, it i-; 
I" 1lit ens koeie :- XPe, !lit is hulle s'n (.\rr the~P 
Olll" ("OWl' r Xo, ilwy are theirH). 
Is hierdie appels hare of julie s'n i' (Are these 
a]l]11Ps lwrs or.\ our~~) 
IlPrr, is d:.umliP Riiplekke ons s'n nf u s'n ~ 
(f~rntlemen, arf' thoHe R('nts ours ur yours~) 
67 
EXERCISE 42.--Fill in i.he Pronouns in Afrikaans:-
(1) Piet, waar is (your) stoel :' (2) Ek sit (on it). 
<a) }Um~ gann Cwe) kuier. ( 4) Kinders, (you) moet 
(your) f'Omme maak. (5) Wie ~e hoed is dit ~ Dit is 
(mill!'). SPP, dit is (herH). (li) (Our) appels iH llllg" 
nie ryp nie. <)) Jan, gee vir (them) (their) hoeke. 
\t') (They) sm•u (eaPh other). (9) (I) 'lkecr vir (myself), 
Pll my broer was vir (hilliHel£). (10) Dit is nie (our) 
hnis niP, llit is (theirs). (11) KlaaH het (his) suster :;e 
huPk gaan haal. !12) IliPrllie ri11g is (my mother's). 
!1a) Pil•t gaan (his) hoed sol'k, maar kom terng- (with-
uut it). (14) ~IenePr, is clit (your) hniH ~ Ja, dit i"l 
(mine). (15) (Their) pa hd vir (ihem) (hi~) perd 
gegre. (Hi) 11 eisies, is hierdie prune (yours) P J a, dit 
i~ (ours). (17) (You pl.) moet mekaar so sonde 
wrgewe. (18) Piet rn Jau i.rck (eueh other':;) hare. 
( 19) Kinders, ek wil vir (you) 'n mooi Htorie vertel. 
t :20) Die man het (his) hoed vergeet, en die vrou (her) 
hamlskoene. (21) Ekskuus, :Mcneer, maar dam die 
l-'itplek is nie (ynurH) nie, tlit is (min<>). 
V vcubularp: 
stoel ' !'hair 
vPrgewe = = forgive 
handskoelit' = gloves 
knier - pay a vio;it 
trek _-, to pull 
eb,kuu'4 =~ excu'!e me 
ryp =~ n pe 
verg-eet -_, furgpt 
Ill. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS - AANWYSENDE 
VOORNAAMWOORDE. 
1. Dit (this) as a demonstmlive can only be usPLl 
~ulJsiantively :-- dit is myne (this is mine); hierdie 
(this, ihese), daardie (that, those), dieselfde (the 
... rmw), sulke (sneh), dergelike (Rueh likr), are nsuallv 
u 'led u cljectivally. • 
~Y.H.- Rome writers use die iu~tead of hierdie or 
daardie. 
68 MASKEW :\ITLT,ER'S AFRIKAAXS GRAM~lAR 
2. Hiervan (of or about this); daarvan (of or about 
that); hierin (in thiR); daarop (on that); daarmee (with 
that); daarsonder (without that) may all he claRsed 
under demom;trative pronouns, though they are really 
pronominal advPrbs. They are sepambly compounde!l: 
Daar weet ek nikR van nie (I don't know anything about 
that). lly wil daar niks mee te doen he nie (IIP doesn't 
want to have anything to do with that). 
IV. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS- VRAGENDE 
VOORNAAMWOORDE. 
1. Wie? (who?), wat? (what?), wie s'n? (whose?) 
arP used suhRtantively, watter? (which?), wat vir 'n? 
(what Aort of ?) , wie se? (whose ? ) are used adjectivally. 
2. Wie il'l used for pPrsons; wat for thingR; while 
watter is u<ied for both. 
E.ram plfs :-Wie loop llaar? (who is walking 
there?) 
Wat RP jy? (what do you say?) 
Wat het jy Jaar? (what have yon got there?) 
Watter vrecmde man is daardie? (what strange 
man is that r) 
Watter tafcl ncem jy? (which tahle do ~ ou 1 akP ?) 
Wat vir 'n geraaR is dit hier? (what noil'e il'l going 
on here?) 
Wie se bock is dit? (whoRe b<lok iR this?) 
llif'r le 'n hoed. Wie s'n is dit? (llere liPR a hrd. 
·whose is it?) 
:1. A preposition -t wat? hecomf'R waar thP 
prepuHition. 'rhus we do not say van wat? op wat? 
in wat? hut waarvan r waarop? waarin r etc. 
Waarvan praat. hy? (what is he talking about f) 
Waarop sit jy? (what are you sitting on r) 
FOR EXGLISH STt;DEKT:-; 
V. RELATIVE PRONOUNS- BETREKLIKE 
VOORNAAMWOORDE. 
1. Wat (who, which, or what) is usPd :for both 
person and things, anrt is thP relative mn~t frpqucntly 
used:-
DiP man wat jy uaar siPn, is hair r:vk (The man 
whom you see there, is very rich). 
Ek het die pPrd g-ekoop wat h:y gehad het (I bought 
the horse which he had). 
Die boom wat hu11e afgekap hd, was nog groen 
(The tree which they cut down, ·was still green). 
2. Wie (he who) is a compound rclatiYe, used to 
intrortuce an inuefinite sentence:-
Wie 110 praat, is mal (He who speaks thus, is mad). 
Wie steel, is 'n die£ (lie who steals, is a thief). 
3. Wie is also used inRtPad of wat :for persons only 
after a preposition :-
Die kinuerR met wie die predikant gepraat het, 
was haie bedroef (The chilllren to whom i he panmn 
spokr, were very sad). 
4. Wat is also used as a compounu relative:­
Wat jy daar sf>, is waar (Wbnt you say there, 1s 
trut>) . 
. Jy k::m doen net wat jy wil (You ma:v do just what 
you plt>a'>e). 
5. Wie se is sometimes useu f,n· whose:- -
Dil' man wie se dogter gaan t11 m, i11 ons burge­
meel'iPr ('l'he man whose daughter is a bout to get 
manied, is our ma:vor). 
70 MASKE'Y l\riLLER'S A.I<'RIKAANR GRAJ\fl\IAR 
Hut mmallv the sPntence iR cil'rumscribed to avoiJ 
the relative po~Rcssive :-
Die man van wie die dogi er guan trou, of Die 
vader van diP. clogter wat gaan trou, etc. 
6. A prepoHition + wat heeomes wa.ar + the prr­
position when refprring to animals and things; thus:­
waarvan (ahnut which); waarop (on which), etC". 
(Compme Personal Jlrunouns, ~ 5, and lniPJToga­
tive Pronnmts, ~ :3). 
Die huis waarvall' ek g<'praat hrt, is uog ie lmur 
(Thr house ahout which I spoke, iH still to lr>t). 
In the rase of pPrHc1u~ tho formH van wie. op wie, 
f't<·,, Ql'f' llHl'cl ( SC:'C § :{). 
EXERCISE 43.-Vill in the prououus in their cmTPd 
form in Afrika am;:-
( 1) (What) wil jy hC P Ek wil (this) heRem he. 
(~) (Whose) appPl is uit hierdir ~ (Tt) is (mine). 
(3) (Whic·h) peru wil jy h<' !' Ek wil (this) een he. 
(4) (What) wil jy (with that) maak? (5) My hoed iH 
(the same) as (your,;, sing.). (6) (Whose) pen is (this)!' 
(lt) is !Amtir',;). (7) (.\bout what) praat .i.\ r Ek 
pwal van oom (Gert's) huis. (H) Die man (who) vir 
my gPld gegee het, is 'n winl,elier. (9) Die mei'lie (to 
whom) ek brood geg<>e bPi, is baiP ann. (10) (What) 
hulle daar iH\ is 11ie waar niP. (11) Dir huis (in which) 
ek woon, is verkoup. (J:!) Die sloel (on which) hy sit, 
is van hout. grmaa k. (13) Die ktwi (which) jy daar sien, 
gro haie melk. (14) Rf\ vir my (about what) jullt> 
praat. (15) PiPt, guun na die timulf'rman (who) daar 
op die hoek Yan die slraat woon, eu ,;p. hy moot ow; 
(tahle'H) pooi kom rrgmaak. (16) Ek was hy dil' vrou 
(whose) man p;i'lter dood is. 
FOR EXGLT~H STGDJ£XT8 71 
EXERCISE 44.-Trtmslute into Afrikaans:-
(1) ·what du you want~ I want that knife. 
(:.!) 'l'his is the same Look as mine. (:1) That shop­
keepel's sweets are very nice. (4) \Yhere is John's 
hat r Hert is sittiug- on it. (5) This is a silver spoo11; 
but that one is matle of golJ. (I)) Tho grass in our 
guHleu is green. (7) ·what is your name~ (8) The 
c·hildren whose mulher is ill, are very sad. (9) The 
wan with whom l Hpuke, is my ±ather's ln·other. (10) Is 
your si-;ter i11 her room~ Xu, she i-; at school. 
(11) \Yhose ox is that!' It is my uncle's. (12) \Vhat 
do ynu -;ay~ I uid not speak. (13) Children, luke your 
slates and write what L shall read. (14) .T ohn, tell 
me what you kno\v about thi.;;. (15) SuC"h people do not 
kuow what they ~ay. ( 1 G) Is this money ours or theirs r 
(17) It is a pity thut his father is not here. (18) 'l'hat 
house is to let. 
VI. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS - ONBEPAALDE 
VOORNAAMWOORDE. 
l. lemand (somebody); niemand (11ubndy); iets 
(H<llUPthing); niks (nothing); 'n mens (a pprson); 
enigeen (anybody): iederee,n, elkeen (everyone, every­
bocly); almal (all\; party (some); een (one); alles 
( eYerythi11g). 
~- Instead of the lhttt·h men zegt (it is said), we 
use hulle se (t1H'y sa~-) in Afrikaano;. 
:L 'n Mens i-; u.-wd Vt'ry ex.tenHively and in nll the 
<·a~es :--
'n Mens weet nie wat jy moet cloen nie (One 
clue~m't kll(J\V w1JUl t<l d11). 
}loenie 'n mens so seer mauk uie! (Dun't hurt a 
ppr..;on like that !) 
:HASKEW MnLER'S AFRIKAA~S GRAl\DfAR 
Hy wil vir 'n mens niks gee nie (Ire uoe~n't want 
to give one anything). 
4. Jy is Rometimes used indefinitely imtead of 
'n mens, and jou in the oblique pases :-
As 'n mens maar weet hoe jy mo<'t handel (H onp 
only knew how to act). 
In die krygswet Jurf jy nie jou mond ooprnaak nie 
(During martial law one dare not open one's mouth). 
5. Party ...... party is equivalent to the Engli;;;h 
some . . . . . . some; and die een . . . . . . die ander t.o the 
English the one ...... the other :-
Party is jonk en party is oud (Some are young 
and some [others] are old). 
Die een werk en die under ~'P<'cl (The one works 
and the other plays). 
EXERCISE 45.-Tmnslate into Afrikaans:-
(1) Somebody is knocking ( = knocks) at the door. 
(2) Nobody knows when he will return. (~) 'I'here is 
nothing new under the sun. (4) Everyone must do hill 
duty. (5) John, come here, l want to tell you some-
thing. (6) Some say "Yes " and some say "No." 
(7) One does not know what to do. (8) The one il4 big 
and the other small. (9) We must all di.e some Jay. 
(10) Give everyone what he wants and nolfcly will pry. 
CHAPTER YI. 
1'HE ADJECTIVE - DIE BYVOEGLIKE 
NAAMWOORD. 
1. "C" rHler the AdjectivE' are also included the 
Articles (Lidwoorde). They are of two kinds:-
(a) Definite (BPpaulde) :-die (the); 
(b) Indefinite (Onbepaalde) :-'n (a, an). 
Thesp artidcs are nut subject to inflection. 
2. ~\.djectivt>s may be divided into the following 
classes:-
(a) Adjedives of Quality. 
(b) Adjectives o£ Quantity (Xumeral Adjective->). 
(c) ParticiplE's (present and paf't) used as adjectives 
(see ChaptPr XV.). 
(d) Demonstrative Adjecti,·es 
(e) Possessive Adjective:-~. 
(f) Interrogative Adjectives. 
The last three classes aro really pronouns use,d 
adjt>ctivally, and us they have already been noted under 
the Pronoun (see Chapter V.), they need not detain us 
here. 
:1. Use of Adjectives. 
Adjectives of Quality and of Quantity may be 
used:-
(a) Attributively :-'n sterk man (a strong man); 
'n hoe boom (a high tree); 'n groot stad (a large city); 
baie mense (many people); min water (little water). 
i4 ~L\~KEW .:\IJLLER'~ AFRIKAAX=-' GH.\:11:\TAU 
(1,) Predicatively :- eli<' mnn is sterk; diP huom lyk 
hoog ( t hl' t rP<' a ppP:m; hi ~ .. dll ; rli<' -.:tarl is groot ; die 
mensr is baie; tlie "ater word min 1_1he water gf'1~ 
,en rce). 
4. Some ad,ieetives :nt-> g'en<'tall;\ uspd Dnly 
attributively:-
(a) !.hose Rig-nifying the ma!Priul of whic·h a 1hing 
i~-; macle :-'n goue ring (a gulr1en ring); 'n silwere Rtem 
(a silvery voic<'); 'n kopere vomhnof (a hra;-.en fnrP­
head). 
'l'hese adjedive-; must he carpfull.v distinguishPrl 
from material nouns. Material acljt>el j, e-; alwayR end 
iu -e, and are mostly nRed in a iigurativ<' ;,emw. }fair­
rial noun,; oftpn qualify other nnunR likt> an arljecti\e, 
hut then (hev arc USeU lll a Jiterul srnHP, al'C C0ll1-
JlUUndrd with' the nouns so qualifiPrl, ami are wriHPn 
aR rompound words:-'n ysterring (an iron ring); 'n 
silwerlepel (a silver spoon). 
(h) adjedin's formpd f10m proper names:- Wei· 
lingstonse vrug-te (Wellington fruit); londense nede 
(peace of London); Heidelbergse katekismus (cu!.Pchism 
of Heidelberg). 
(c) adjective's formed from adverbs of time: ons 
daelikse brood (our daily bre-ad); hulle jaarlikse 
~alaris (thei1· yearly salary); etc. 
(d) a few others like :-etlike Ummel; die huidige 
dug (this very da,v); ganse (whole); geruime tyd (fairly 
long time); boonste (topmm;t); binneste (innermost); 
onderste (nethermost) ; voorste (foremost). 
5. Some adjedives, again, are only used predica· 
tively :-bevrees (afraid); bysiende (shortsighted); 
geheg (attached); geneig (inf'lined to); gedagtig 
(mindful); kinds (childish), etc. 
75 
So we w:mallv sav :-Llio kin<l is bevrees vir :;lac 
dhe rhild is afrai<l of l1lmu< 1; daanlie kerel is bysiende 
(that .fellow iR t-.hm1Rightt,d); my oupa is kinds (n1y 
frl'Umlfather is <·hiltlish), e1<·.; hnt wr clo not usually 
:-.ay :-'n bevreesde kind, 'n bysiende kerel, 'n kindse 
oupa, Ptr. 
lL The u<ljPI'iivrs jong (yunng), lang (lung), when 
ll"Ptl pre<li<·ativPly, elwnge the g into k; ::mel the adjer­
tivt'H oud (lll<l), koud (cold), when uRed attributivrly, 
drop the ·d :-
'n jong meisiP - <lie meisic is jonk; 
'u lang HhJk - <lie stok is lank; 
'u ou man- die man is oud; 
dit is 'n koue wintrr - <lie winter is koud. 
EXERCISE 46.-Csc each of the following adjedivr~ 
in a RPntener, fin;t atirilmtively, and then pre­
dieatively :-
gmen (green); geel (yellow); swaar (heavy); 
lig(te) (light); swak (weak); klein (small); verkeerd 
(wrong); reg(te) (<·orred); ~tout (naughty); lang 
dong); kort (short); oud (old); wild (wilu); vet (fat); 
laag (low); gehoorRaam (obedient); Hwart (black); wjt 
lwhite); nou (narrow); ryk (rich); arm (poor); magtig 
(mighty); Pentonig (monotonous); mooi (pretty); lelik 
(ugly); Rlim (cl<'ver); dom (stupitl). 
EXERCISE 47.-1Jse each oi' the following adjediYPR 
in a short sentence:-
Etlikr, vonrste, kinds, PaarlHe, koprre, geruime, 
geheg, bevrpes, hoonstP, stale, geneig, Amsterdamse, 
binneste, silwere, jong, jaarliks, Vrystaatse. 
CHAPTF.R VII. 
lX.FLRXIOX OF ADJRC'riVES. 
Adjectives may be inflected:­
I. By adding -e to the stem. 
II. For degrees of Comparison. 
1. Only adjectives used attributively may be 
inflected by adding -e to the stem; when they are used 
predicatively, they never take -e. 'fhus for thi~ 
inflexion we are only concPrnt:>d about adjectives used 
attributively . 
.For English students it is very difficult to know 
v. hen an adjective should get this -e and whPn not; 
and even Africanders, when writing, experience a good 
deal of diffieulty in this respect. When speaking the 
language it is ea~y for the Africander to determine the 
form of ihe adjective, because he feels whether an -e 
must be added ur not. .For the English student, how­
£wer, who does not posseRs ihis intuitive feeling f.,r 
the language, it is very !li.fficult to use the adjective 
corn'etly. \Ve f'hall, therpfore, lay down some rules 
here which may prove of help to the f'tudent, but we 
wish once more to Pmphasize what has bPen said in 
Pllnnection with Jn'oimnciation, viz., that the corrcd 
u>-o of a modern language if' acquirPd by hParing it 
spoken, by reading hooks written in the language, and 
by speaking it, and not solely hy memorising numerous 
grammatical rules. 
For the Rake of cleames" we shall divide the 
attributive adjectivps into 
A. ~'hose of one syllable. 
B. Those of more than one syllahle. 
FOLt E~GLLt-iH STCDE~TS 77 
A. AujPdives uf une s,v Hable:-
1. Those Pnuing in d, f, g or s, take -e :-breed -
'n bree rivier (a hroau rivPr) ; wreed - 'u wrede vrou 
(a cruel woman); doof - 'n dowe man (a dt>af man); 
hoog- 'n hoe hoom; dwaas- 'n dwase daad (a foolish 
Jeed) . 
. V.B,-(i) H g and s stand fllr gt (chi) aml st in 
Dutch, then tho adj. takes -te :-reg - die regte weg 
(the right way); vas -- 'u vaste hesluit (a fixed 
resolve). 
Otherwise the g usually drop:-; out before ·e: -laag 
- 'n lae tufrl (u lnw tahlP); leeg - 'n lee dop (an 
empty shell). 
(ii) If the f is precei!od hy a l11ng- vuwel or a ,[iph­
thong, it changE's into w hcfure ihe -e :-braaf - 'n 
brawe uaad (tt nohle deeJ) j if it i:-; lJl'E'Ct'dPd hy a short 
vowel, it ehangPs into ww lwfore i be -e: :-la-£ - '11 
lawwe grap (a silly juke). 
(iii) .\djt>dives of nne :-;yllal1le ending- in s (relJrE'­
SPnting s in Duteh), pn•t•oded hy a short vowel, do not 
take ·e :-los - 'n los innd (a loose tooth); kras - 'n 
kras uitdrukking (n simng exprPssion). 
Iu thP follo"·ing cases udjcdivE'-4 ewling- in •S 
always take an ·e: -
(a) whPn thP adj. is derived hom a lll'llper llnme : ­
Jood - 'n Joodse fees (a Jewish feast); i!io Roomse 
kerk (the Roman r. churrb); 1lie Franse troepe (tho 
"French tr11ops). 
(b) whPn i.ht• adj. is dt>rivetl from a noun ;-dood­
'n doodse stilte (a dPath-like silenc·e); stad - steedse 
manierl' (city mannrr'l); aarde - aardse besiti.inge 
( Parthly poRSE'ssion s) . 
(e) when the s is prerrded by p, t, or k: -trots -
'n trotse vadl'r (a proud father); ftuks - 'n ftukse 
werker (a rliligPHi, workf'r): 'n hupse offi.siPJ' (a li.vPl:V 
officer). 
G 
IR :\IASKI~\Y .:\1 I LLI~H'H A I<'HfK.\A.\'H (; I{A :\BlAH 
Ubs. The rule for adjectives in g cloes not apply 
t 0 u n.i. in -ng, u H -ng re]ll'l'HPllt s one souud i 11 Afrikaans: 
"n lang Rtok (a long Htif'k); "n jong gPnPraal (a ~'oung­
gt'lJeral), etc. 
2. .\djectives of OliP syllahlP PtHling in a l'oWt>l, 
a diphthong, or onP n£ thP c·on,oiJalJtR not meniimJt'<l 
under 1, <lo uoi. take -e:-'u ru land (a, rough r·otmtry); 
'n mooi hlom (a pretty floWC'l'); 'n mak JWI'd (a tanH• 
horse); 'n diep Rlnot (a clce11 furrow); 'n stout seuu (a 
11aughty hoy); 'n vuil hord (a dirty pbiP); 'n dom 
rneisie (a stupid g-irl); 'n dun uel'k (a thin nerk); 'u 
swaar vrag (a h0avy load); etr. 
,V.l-J.-(i) Adjeriives mentinneil nmlPr this rnl<' 
take -e in the following raSPR: -
(a) \\Then they are u:.;ed in a figurative> ~PIISP or in 
devated st_vle:-'n duur ring (an expPnHiYP ringl - 'u 
dure les (a coRtly leRson); 'n sterk prnl (a strong­
horse) - sterke clrauk (Htrong ilrink); rein water 
(purP water) - cliP reine waarheicl (uothiug but thP 
truth); 'n groot huis Ia lurgr houi'IP) cliP grote 
oseaan (th0 mighty orPan); d!'. 
(h) whpn tlwy are strongly PmphaHi;w<l: -wat '11 
grote g-ebou iR <lit (what a tre111Pndous huilcling this 
is!), jon stoute kiml! (yon mwghty rhild !) ; Plr. 
(ii) AcljPrliv<'~ whic·h l1an> found 1lil'il' 1\ a,r into 
Afrikaans at a later clatP, aucl aJ'P thus nnt hO '"<'ll 
known, do uot alwayH l'!mform 1o il1e nilr•s laid down 
for thP -e·:-log (h;•rny), vlug (rapid), muf ('ltnffy), 
duf ( cloHP, Rl uffy), PI r. 
8,-,\djectives of more than one s,vllahle :-
ThPse ahvayH takP -e. PX<'<'Pl when t hpy Pnd in -er 
(thih inr·luclC'R all eomparati\l'H) mHl in -;oml' rase . ..; in 
-el :--'n beter plan (a lwttPr plan); a groter stnk Ia 
bigg<'r piere; 'n edel lwraldPr (a no hlP f'lJUradPI'); Ptc·. 
Thr iutit>xion u£ tuljPdivr,.; in -el and -er (ot1wr than 
c·olnimrativp,.;) is, howrver, uncertain. Thus we often 
mert with expressions like :-ieder or iedere kans (rvery 
opportuuit,\): seker or sekere mense (c·eriain 11eoplt>); 
'n edel or edele vrou (a JJohle woman); etl'. 
EXERCISE 48.-,Yrite tl1e adjedive in it-; <·orred 
Jurm :-
(l) 'u (on) perd. (2) claanlie (vet) vrou. (:1) sy 
(vas) ourtuig-iug-. (4) (clroog) grond. (5) '11 (vrug-
1aar) land. (ti) (~um) ap1Jek (7) 'n (woo,;) w&rdcl. 
(8) 'n (warm) sent. (!)) \lwu) watrr. (10) hienlie (mooi) 
Llng-ter. (11) 'll (dig-) hus. (12) die (under) kamer. 
11:1) 'n (wrrksaam) kiwl. (14) 'n (uicp) rivier. (15) 'n 
(duuh•r) huis. ( lG) «lie' (Romeins) ryk. (17) (st>ker) 
:-dudrnte. (18) 'u (douf) nor. (19) (werklik) griewe. 
(20) ( g-oddelooH) men.se. (21) 'n (spma1n:mam) lantr. 
(~2) clir !hlou) lug. (2:~) 'u (vas) t,vd. (24) 'n (grater) 
"tad. (25) '11 (skrlm) kl'rel. (26) ('lpe1end) kindPrs. 
(:!j\ 'n (g-omll pnml. (;28) my (iunig) dank. (29) 'n 
(wonilrrlik) di11g. (;~()) 'n (rPsprktalwl) mau. 
II. DEGREES OF COMPARISON- TRAPPE VAN 
VERGELYKING. 
1. Tltt• ('mnlJUI':ltive deg-rrr (verg-rotPnde trup) is 
formed hy adding -er, and the 8uperlative (oorhrffende) 
l•,v n<lcling -ste to tho PositivP (;;trllrnrle): 
wit (w11itr) wiilrr witstl:' 
lllU[ (old) UU!:'l' llll(lStC' 
laag (low) lal'l' laag-stp 
wrped ( c·1·np1) Wl'PI l<>r \YI'eNlstC' 
brred (broacl) hrrt'r brerus1 r 
don£ (c1Pat) dowPr <lon£sle 
rlof (muffied) clowwrr rlofste 
grhoorsaam ( n he,liPll t) g-P1I llOl'Samer gehoorsaamsto 
.\' .73. In 1his l'onnrdinn siudeuts must lwar 1n 
mi11<1 lhe hints nu sprlling· g-ivPn in ChaplPr TIL 
2. Adjectives ending in -r take d hefo1·e the 
Comparative ending -er :-
bitter (bitter) hitiertlt>r hitterste 
ver (fur) wrdPr \"erste 
guar (cooked) guarder gaarstC~ 
teer (tender) h~erdcr teerste 
seer (sore) -;eerder ~">l'L'r:-. I.e 
suur (sour) :murder suun;te 
!3. Adjectives 111 •S also add -ste for the Superla-
tive:-
w:vR (wiRe) wyser wys<;te 
dwaas (foolish) d~·aser tl~·aasstt' 
finks (diligent) flukser fiuk-;stc 
skaars (scarce) skaarspr s kanrsstP 
woes (wild) woel'ter woesste 
va'l (fixed) vastPr vasste 
juis (Porred) juister juiRste 
4. ~\djectives in -g take -ter in the Comparative 
i£ the g is tl1P modifiPd form of thP DntPh -cht; other­
wise the g dropR out lwfore -er :--
lig (light, D. liPhi.) ligter 
sag (soft, D. zacht) l.mg·tf'r 
laag (low, D. laag-) laPr 
vroeg (early, D. vroeg) vroei;r 
clroog (dry, D. droog) ,Jroi'r 
~agRte 
bagstf' 
vroegste 
.lroogstP 
fl. Meer (u1ort>) m1ll mees (most) arP rarely U<'Pd 
in the <·nmparison nf adjN·iivP.s, Pven though they 
consist of many s;vlln blPR: 
on billik (unfair) un billikt'r on hillikste 
verdraagsaam (tolerant) verdmagsamer venlraagsaamste 
Rut meer and mees are generally used with past 
participles of vNhs used as adjectives:--
gebroke (broken) meer gebroke mePs g·ehroke 
heskadig (damaged) 111cer bPskadig mees bPslmdig 
(Vor adjectives formed from partic·iples of vPrbR, 
see under the Verh, Chapter XV., Rection 11.) 
!'OR ENULTHH 1:-.TCDl~XTR Hl 
u. 'l'l.1e followiug- :uljedives havP. inegular 1legreeH 
of comparison : -
goeu (good) hei.er heRte 
siek (ill) sicker, erger siekstc, ergsi.o 
bfi:ie (ma.u~, much) lllE'Pl" mpp,;te 
!Dlll, wenug 
(little, few) miuder minstc 
uuut, nnwe (new) uui.Pr, nnWPl' nuutste 
kwaarl, kwaai kwaier, kwaadste, 
(aligry) kw::wier kwaaiste 
laut (lltte) latPr laatste, lanste 
vroeg (early) Yl"Of'Or, eerder vroegste, ePrste 
jong, jonk (young) JOnger jong·stP 
lung, lank (long) langPr langste 
7. (a) ·with the Positive is usPd so- soos:-Piet 
is so groot soos sy l1roer (Piet is aH inll as his brother); 
hy is SO sterk SOOS ~imo;on (he i;; as str11ng as Ram son). 
(h) \Vith the Comparative iR usell da.n or as:­
Sannie iR mooier as (or dan) "1[iemie (S. is prettier than 
11.); KuapRtad is g-rater as (or dan) Wt>lling-ton (Cape 
Town iR grPater than \V Pllington). 
(c) To strengthen the Huperlative aller may be 
uRed :-Dit iR 'n allerpragtigste blom (this is a most 
beautiful flower); 'n mens kry die allerlieflikste natuur­
Rkoon in die Kaa1Jse Rkiereil:md (one finds the most 
lovely seen Pry in the Cape Peninsula). 
H. When comparing two nou11s with!Jut using dan 
11r as, i.hc Supe,rlative mm;t he ns<'cl ancl not the Com­
parative, aR in English:-
Van die twee hnwrs is .Jakob die slimste, maar die 
luiste (oi' the two brothers .Jaroh is the smarter, but 
the lazier). 
Ons voethalspan is !lie sterkste van clie twee (our 
football team is the Rhonger of the two). 
D. i)mtw adjpc·tin•s do Jitd :11llnit cd" dl'/-P"l'l'" of 
eompariHon: 
(a) Those dPnoting material :-'u goue ketting (a 
g-nldPn C'lwin); 'n stale gPhPue (a mrmory likP Hil'el). 
(h) Thosp drrin•ll fmm proppr namrg and advPrh~ 
of timr: Magaliesbergse iahak ()lagnlieHhPrg tnhaC'C'o); 
ems maa.ndelikse verga<lPring (our monthly mrPiillg). 
(C') 'l'llose likP :- -dood (rlracl,1; leeg (empty); bloed· 
rooi (hluod-rccl); ontelbaar (innumrrahlr); almagtig 
(almighty); pikswart (piich-hlack); goudgeel (yellow 
as gold): doodmoeg (uPacl tirPcl); t'iC'., >\hi('h ahNuly 
dPnotNI a Htah• of C'Ompll'tPnesH. 
10. l)ome prepositions. as bo (alHl\'P), onder 
(helow), binne (insi<lr), buite (outsidr) may l>e nsP<l 
adjec:tivally, allll thPH han• a Superlative:--
Di0 boonste stt'Pn (thP iol>mnsi hriC'k): clie onderste 
plank (the lowprmost plank; die binneste Wlc van 
'n horlm1i<' (ibP lllliPl'mosi <~prings of n wateh); diP 
buitenste mme vall J prusalPm (the outprmosi walls of 
J erusalPm). 
EXERCISE 49.-(-i-ive lh1~ dPgrePs of enmparison of 
the following adjrdive:-. :-
Swart, lig, sterk, cluu, laag, gPrl, dik, woe-;, hong, 
luf (insipid), maklik, Juur, Ylol'g-, sag-, clroog, dwaaR, 
geweldig (hrmendou:-.), Yer, hrPrd, om], uuui, kwaad, 
finks, doof, lank, wit, min, bait~, suur, laat. 
EXERCISE 50.-Use eaf'h o£ thl' ahoYe adjPdivPR 111 
the <lifferent cleg-n'PS in a shurt RP11il'll<'l' :-
Example :-(1) 'n Hottentot is swart, 'n Kafl'Pr i" 
Hwul'ier, en 'n ~PgPr iR die !'lwart'lte. 
(~) Piet is lig, .Jan is lig-trr, Pn Kl:ias i;; diP lig-siP. 
(:1) \YatPr i, -;waar, sanrl is -;wnm dPr, I'll klPi iH clit' 
swaar-;tP. 
C'HA P'l'ER Ylll. 
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES- TELWOORDE. 
1. Cardinal Numerals ( llooftt'lwoonle) :-
(a) Definite (Bcpaalue) :-een (one); ses ~~ix); 
twintig (twPnty); duisend (thommn<l); halwe (half); 
albei (both); ete. 
(h) Indefinite (,Unlwpaal<le): baie tmmty): weinig, 
min (tow); etlike (several); sommige (some); party 
(sumP); verskeie (spveral); al (ail); elke (ea<'h); etr. 
2. Ordinal Numerals (Hanglelwoortle): -
(a) Definite (Hepaalue) :-eerste (firsi,); sewende 
(1wn•nth); honderdste (hundredth); Pic. 
(h) Indefinite (Onbepaalde) :-laaste (last); hoe­
veelste ( whi(•h in mnneri(·al nrdrr) ; sovee·lste (Hu mauy 
iII nnnt rral order) ; e te. 
:~. Ilere follows :t li~t of Definite Cardinal unJ 
( lnlinal X nmeuth :-
Symbol. Cardinal. Ordinal. 
1 l'Pll l'Pl'Stl> 
') lWPl' t wec1P 
;{ drie derde 
4 HE'l' vierde 
,) V.\ f vy{dl' 
(j SPS l:'e~clc 
t!4 MARKF;W ~fTLLER'R AFlUKA,\~R GRA;\L\L\H 
Symbol. Cardina.l. Ordinal. 
7 sewe sewenrle 
8 ag agste 
9 nege, nrc negende, neende 
10 tien tiende 
11 elf elfdo 
12 t;waalf twaalfde 
1a dertien dertirndo 
14 veertien veertiende 
15 vyftien vyftienrle 
16 seRtien sestiende 
17 sewentien sewentiende 
18 agtieu agtiende 
19 neent.ien, 
negentien neeu t.irnde 
20 twintig t.wintigste 
21 een-en-twintig Pen-en-twintigste 
22 t.wee-rn-twint.ig t wer-Pn- t. wint.igst.e 
23 drie-en-twin tig rhie-en-twintigste 
29 neen-en-twintig neen-en-t. wintigste 
:30 ·dertig de.rtigst.e 
40 veertig Yeertigste 
50 vy£tig vyftigst.e 
60 sest.ig Hestigste 
70 srwentig SCWPUtigsto 
80 tagt.ig, taggent.ig tagtigste, tuggentigste 
90 neentig, negentig net;ntigste, negentigste 
99 ne£in-en-neentig nee n-on -nei.intigste 
100 honderrl honderdste 
101 hondenl-en-ren hondt>r<l-l'll-eerst.e 
200 t. ·weehonderd t weehondrrdRte 
300 driehondPrd driehon rlenlstr 
1,000 dui;:;erul duisendste 
1,001 duil'<md-en-een duisend-en-eerstE' 
1,100 eenduisend een-
honderd duiseud en eenhonderdste 
2,000 tweed uisen rl tweed uii'irnrlRtP 
1,000,000 miljoPn miljoenste 
FOlt RXGL!Sll STUDENTS 
4. Observations: --
(a) Ag, from Dutch acht, still retains the t before 
uur :-agtuur (eight o' dork) ; also used for breakfast: 
het jy al agtuur geeet (have you eaten your breakfast 
already~) 
.Y.B.-ag uur (written a'l i wo wurrlR) -~ f'ight 
hours. 
(h) Baie (mueh, lllany) has taken the plaee of veel 
except in the ex]lrf'ssiun te veel (too much, too many):­
daar was te veel nwnse (there were too many people) ; 
jy het te veel wutpr hyg-egnoi (you have adcled too murh 
water). 
Veels is r;till use<l in the expressions:­
Vee,ls geluk (hParty ('(mgrutulations ~). 
Veels te veel (far too much, or too many). 
(c) Bietjie (a little) is ihe word eommonly used to 
qualify or extenuate a statement :-'n bietjie lelik (some­
what ugly); f\'P<' vir m~· 'n bietjie water (give me a 
little water). 
It is even found in Pxpresswns like :---'n bietjie 
groot (somPwhat big); 'll bietjie haie (iiomewhat 
much), eic. 
(d) Ceen, with its unuceentf'd form g'n, is used fur 
no, none :-geen mPns wcct wat HY plan is nie (no one 
knows what his plan is); danr help jou g'n dokter af 
nie (nobud~-, lit. uo tloctur, (:an save you from that). 
(e) Enige may mean:- (i) any: enige dwuas kan 
clit doen (au~· fool eun clo that); (ii) some, a few: enige 
due gelecle (a few days, >:ome dnys ago). 
(f) Party and sommige tne used indiseriminately, 
alt.hou!fh ihPre is a tendency t.o use party more fre­
quPntl~·- party (or sommige) mense hou van hom (some 
people like him); sommige (or party) dae is die pasient 
heeltemal betPT, en nmler due is hy weer erger (on some 
days the patiPnt is mu!'h hPtier, but on other;; hf> i~> 
worRe again). 
Kli ~IARK]i]W ~fTLLER'R AFHIT\A,\XR nTL\:\nL\H 
fi. 'l'ht! equivale11i !'or i hP E11p;li"lh -fold i~:> -voudig: 
tienvoudig (trnfoltl); honderdvoudig (hnndrrdfolcl), 
etr. 
G. ThP w•,nl"l slag, maal, keer· may l1r aJtlrd i.o 
ilw c·arJiJJal nume1 alH to form Atlvi'I'hs: h.v ~HI dit nog 
nrt eenslag tloen (111' "ill tlo it utlC'P lllill'l' only); die 
',YtlllU !Jp.f vyfmaal aatlp;rval 1. tht> Pllrmy atlat•kf'd five 
times) ; on,; het tli t a 1 baiekeer p;PtloeH t wP ha \ P tlnne 
it mnn,\ a i ime). 
vYhen ad<letl in any c·tmliual lmt een, ilw plural of 
s.lag (viz. slae) is used as a nom1 allll selllll ntt'tl from 
the e:.mlinal :-Pk hPt vir jou al drie slae geld grlreu 
(I lrnt you mon<'y nn thre<' or·c:1sion:-. 11ow). 
Maal aHtl keer may also he used in thf' plural as 
nouns whrn ihey express ihe itlea of different occasions, 
and arp tlw11 al-,o ~:>eparatpcl from the 1 ardinal as ill the 
ras<' of slae: - Pioi hrt al drie kere N,v been geureek 
(Piet ha,.; hrokPu l1is lPg on three, i.e. separatr, oeea­
'lion~'>); twee male hei ek hom iu clie "ltmat outmoet 
(L met him in the street 1111 two ot•easiunH). 
7. l<'mr:tious (lHeuke) are also !'lassi±iPtl a,; definite 
cardinal numerals :-een-vyfde (one fifth) ; drie-vyfdes 
(three fifths); vier-sewendes (four :-.rnnths); veertien­
vyftiendes (fourteen fifteeuths); etc. 
EXERCISE 51.-\'rrite i11 wonls in Afrikaans: 
R8; !l; 3- ; 1 Hth; :!H; !Hli h ; r,fi7:!; 12!)RH; 40lst; 
1_:~4~12!J; 1!-; 1U6; ~~· 
EXERCISE 52.-'l'ntllHlate into .\ frikaans: 
(1) -What is the time~ H is •'-' o'dock. (:2) Few 
shall part whrre many meet. (:n I ,.,aw ,;pn•J al 
lions nt (Jrote Schnur thP otlH·r day. ("t) The la-d. hut 
not the least. (5) Eight times eleven are ~~. (G) Om 
team has wou man\ a i.iHH'. ti) ThP l:!th uf ~la:v; 
the 1 Gth nf Drt'l'nt fa•r. · 
CHAP'I'EJt IX. 
TITE .'\.11\'J•:RB- DIE HYWOORll. 
I. ADVERBS OF TIME- BYWOORDE VAN TYD. 
aans, uanl'.tons (jnlil 
now) 
al, alrPcd R (already) 
altoos, altyu (nlways) 
aluug ( f'YPry day) 
hf'tyds (in tim P) 
dan (then) 
tlibnls (ofteu) 
dit'Hlug, hi.Prdir !:'lag 
(this 6me) 
daurdie ~;;lag (lhat timH) 
t'f'r (before, pre) 
eers (nt first, fnrmer·ly) 
f'CI11I1Ul ( Ollf'P) 
eillllt'lik (at la'lt) 
!'f'rgister (Jay lwforp 
\'el'tf'rda:v) 
l'f'rla.nk (hefo.re long) 
ewio· ewi O'lik (rtt'rna ll:v) 
t:)' n • 
geler1e (ago) 
gi-;tl'r (yestPruay) 
goon, go u -gou ( S()f m. 
quickly) 
hiPrna, hiernunwal,., 
(hereafter) 
ltede (now) 
hedeni ondage ( nowatla,Y") 
illlmrr (alway~'>) 
intu"HE:'Il (mPanwhi]p) 
kor\, tevore (a HhorL whill' 
lrefore) 
lankal, lank g-Plrtlf' (long 
ago) 
lntrr (latrr on) 
menigma:tl (frPqueutly) 
mei erns (suddenly) 
mow (to-morrow) 
nimmrr, nooit (nf'\'Pr) 
nPhwu (just now) 
nog- (still) 
nog nie (not yPl) 
non (now) 
nouliks, pns (hardly) 
omnilldcllik, dudelik 
(immPtlinirly) 
Ol}(lerwyl, onderimHwn 
(meanwhile) 
tJOi l ( evf'r) 
oormore (day nfter 
to-morrow) 
llplaas, lenlaaHie (at lu;,t) 
suans (in the pvening) 
sPldo (seldom) 
Heclert, sinds (since) 
smiddags (at midday, m 
thP nfternoon) 
smoren-.;J soggens (in thl' 
morning) 
RR 'IARKJ•~W :\ll LLER'S AFRIKA,\ "NS OR HnUR 
snags (at night) 
Roewe (a while ago) 
~>oms, somtydR (Rome-
times) 
teenswoordig (nowadays) 
telkenR (repeah•dly) 
tevore (before) 
toe (when, then) 
vandag (to-day) 
vergoed (for good) 
voortaan (henceforth) 
vanmelewo (in olden 
dayR) 
vroeer (formerly) 
wanneer (when) 
weer (again) 
welPrr (long ago) 
II. ADVERBS OF PLACE- BYWOORDE VAN PLAAS. 
a£ (off, down) 
agter (behind) 
binne, binnekant (inside) 
binnetoe (inside [ direC'-
tion]) 
huite (outside) 
bo (above) 
boontoe (upwards) 
bymekaar (together) 
daar, daarso (there) 
daarheen, daarnatoe 
(thither) 
daarlangs (thereaboutR) 
daarnaas (next to it) 
duskant (this Ride) 
(h·ens, iewers ( sonww herP) 
elders (somewhere else) 
ginds, gunter (yonder) 
heen (away) 
hier, hier·so (here) 
hierheen, hiernatoe 
(hither) 
hiervandaan (from hrre) 
huis-toe (home) 
inwendig (internally) 
links (to the left) 
mee, saam (with) 
naby (near) 
nerens (nowhere) 
om (around) 
onder (lwlow) 
ondertoe (downwards) 
op, opwaarts (upwards) 
oral ( s) ( everyw her<') 
regs (to the right) 
rond, rondom (round 
abont) 
saam, tesame (together, 
with) 
Aooutoe (thither) 
uit (out) _ 
ui tweudig (ex tern ally) 
uitmPkaar (apart, 
separated) 
ver (far) 
voort, vorentoe (forward, 
to tho front) 
voorwaarts (forward) 
waar, waarAo (where) 
waarheen, waarnatop 
(whither) 
WPg (away) 
Ill. ADVERBS OF MANNER- BYWOORDE VAN WYSE. 
anders ( othPr·wise) hoe (how) 
blindelings (blindly) kortaf (abruptly) 
hroekskeur (with much lieflik, liefies (sweetly) 
difficulty) liewers(te) (rather) 
hekoorlik (enehrmtingly) langsuum (slowly) 
uuidelik (plainly) mooi (prettily) 
effentjies (a little, moPilik (with difficulty) 
lightly) onderstebo (upsidP down) 
ftuks (diligently, wPll) reg (eorrcctly) 
gaur, goed (well) JUstig (peacefully) 
heerlik ( <lclic·ious) :mggies, ,.;octjies (softly) 
hemels (heavenly) "tilletjics (quietly), etc . 
. Y.B.-~1 t'OllliiWn and an easy way of forming 
~\.llvcrhs is b_y doubling wonlR: -
1. Two verbs :-Tiy doen sy werk sing-sing (He 
does his work while l'iinging). 
gk sal tlmmlit· som fluit-fluit maak (I'll tlo that 
-;nm pasily, lit. whilt> whistling). 
Tiy lwm rook-rook a an (He approaches whilP 
smoking). 
Ons het gesels-gesels gesta11 (We walkPCl on while 
talking to each othPr). 
2. Two adjectives or adverbs :-Jan, kom gou-gou 
(.John, come quiekly); dit reen vanjaar kort-kort (it 
rains every now and again this year). 
IV. MODAL ADVERBS, which express:-
(a) Affirmation (hcvestiging) :-ja (yes), sekPr 
(certainly), ongetwyfeld (undoubtedly), natuurlik 
(naturally), stellig ( PPrtainl.v), werklik (really), 
waarlik (really), darem (neYPrthelesR); mos, E'k. 
1l1 l Doubt 1 tw.vfcl): ali emil (perhavs), miskieu 
(IJerha]JS), waarskynlik (probahly), vermuedelik 
(Jll'PIHtrnahly), dalk (perhapH), toevallig (hy ehlllll'f'), 
"trakH (perhapH), kllnsuiR, kumma (oKtPJJsihly), etc. 
(C') Negation (ontkenniug) :-npe, (no), uie (not), 
nnoit (never), tPYPrgeefs, verniet (in vain), volstrek 
11tP, glad uie (not at all), Pte. 
(d) A Wish ('n wem) :-tog - kom tog~ (do 
t•ome !), maar- help hom nmar: (do a,.,~i-;t him!), 
dan - prllat dan! (do speak!), etc. 
V. ADVERBS OF DEGREE OR QUANTITY- BYWOORDE 
VAN GRAAD OF HOEVEELHEID. 
ampt>r ( almo~ t) 
ha ie. (very, ltllll' h) 
h,'>'na (almo!'lt) 
hoonop (in addition) 
tlPur pn deur (thoronghl,\) 
duhhel (doubly) 
gcnoeg (enough) 
glad (<wite) 
hal£ (hal£) 
hoog·s, hnogste11s (highl~') 
hePltemal (quite) 
hoof'4aaklik (pri11ripally) 
juis (exactly) 
mPer ( morf') 
minHtenH (at lt>a~t) 
nng (still) 
om trent (alJoni) 
op sy mPC'~te (at lllttHt) 
HlegH, J1ei (only) 
skaarH (searcelv) 
HO (.,;o) , • 
tc, alto (too) 
iaamlik (tolerably) 
uiterR (verv, moKt) 
welH (muPh) 
vprrPweg (hy far) 
veral, vcrnaam 
( PRpeciall,v) 
VI. ADVERBS OF CAUSALITY- BYWOORDE VAN 
KOUSALITEIT, which express:-
(a) The Reason (rpJe) for an :.JI'tion: -duurmn 
(i.hereforP), hicrom (fo~ thiH reason), ook (alHo), duH 
(tlmH), derhalwe (henec), ct<·. 
(h) A Purpose (doel) :-hiertue (for this purpose), 
<lnari of', etc. 
(C') A Cause (oorsaak) :-wnunlPm (hy what meanH), 
tlaardeur, hiPrdeur, etc. 
1<'01{ I•:KULISIJ ..;'ITDK\'T~ Ul 
(d) .\ Concession (i.twg-L·Willg) :-- l'g'ter (howPvPr), 
Hog-tans, ewenwel, niei.emin (nevertlwlrss); tog- (.vrt); 
tlrsnieh'l'liStaandl' (ltoiwith..,ianaing thai.); ete. 
(e) A Means (mitldd): wannnee (wlwrewith), 
tl:Hll'Jlll>.f', hiPl'lllE'l', t'IC. 
~IL'ntiou mu-.t al-:o lw matlP lwn· of 1 hl' Pronominal 
Adverbs likt· daarin, hieroor, daaruit, hierop, dC'., 
which Jwvp hl'Pn noted in C'hapi.Pr Y., and Rome of 
which lwve alrPaclv hl'l'll l'la-:-:ified un(]pr the differPnt 
henuings in ihi-: c·l~aptPr. 
VII. ADVERBS OF NUMBER AND ORDER- BYWOORDE 
VAN GETAL EN ORDE. 
rlaanw (ufipr that) 
PPrs (firsl, at ftrst) 
PPllllluul, ecn-:lag (mtt'L') 
Wfl'Prs (1trstly) 
lweemaal (twic·e) 
tell t wedn, t 'H'LlPBS 
(scC'onclly) 
ieu tlenle, dcrdPns 
(thirdly) 
venlPr (furthPl'lllUl'l'), etc·. 
VIII. CONJUNCTIVE ADVERBS- VOEGWOORDELIKE 
BYWOORDE. 
SumP of tltP"l' udvPrhs also uu the work uf I'Olt ­
jml<'tion-:, viz., to join co-oruinntive sentences, and 
fur this rPasoH they are iPrmPd conjunctive adve·rbs 
( vorgwoordt>l ikl' hywoordt>). 'l'h<7 art> usf'd in tl1P 
fnllowing· fundimts: --
(a\ Copulative (a:mePn'lkn kl'lewl): uuk (also), 
selfs (eYL'lt), daarl1y (in :ultlitiun to ihat), daarna 
(ihrrpafter), nog (iu addiiinu ttl), a~mok (a~ wPll al-l), 
PiudPlik (ai. lasi.), etC'. 
(b) Adversative aiUl Disjunctive (i.eeusiellend): 
pgfPr (howe\PI'), tog (yet), claurentPi\ intPt>ntleel (on 
ilw C'nntr:uy), uic>iemin, PWPH\\'Pl, nogtans (Iwverihe­
lPss), de. 
(c) Illative (oor~o.aaklik): daar,deur (bv that 
means), hiPrdrur, dus (thus), Llerhalwe (tlu:rcforc), 
hierom, daarom (heiH·e), hygevnlg ( con~rqu<:>ntly), PtC'. 
The conjundive adwrb may he disting-ui~o.hed frum 
thP. pure conjunction by noting:--
(i) That the euujundion must always stand at thP. 
beginning n£ the sef'ond sentPnf'<', when•t1s the f'onjunc­
tive adverb may stauu in the secund sf'ntenee, or even 
at the end. 
(ii) That a eonjunei.i\e tulverh, wltl'tl i1 stands at 
the beginning of the second sentpnce, alway:; hring 
about inversion in the sN·ond sentenec, i.e. the predi­
cate comes before the suhjert, sinf'f' the verb in Afri ­
kaans always stands as npar to thP adverb as possible. 
'I'he following examples will ~->f'rYC tu illustrate the 
difference between thPse two parts of spet•rh: 
Hy is arm, maar hy is eerlik (Conj.) 
Hy is arm, tog is hy ePrlik ( Conj. Aclv.) 
Ek is siek, en jy mort my help (Conj.) 
Ek is siek, dus moet jy my help (Conj. Ark) 
Dit reen, dog ek g-aanuit (Conj.) 
Dit reen, tog gaan ek uit (0onj. Adv.) 
Die plaas is goed, maar ek sal rEt me koop nrr 
(Conj.) 
Die plaas iR goed; ek sal dit egter uie koop lllH 
(0onj. Adv.) 
IX. DEGREES OF COMPARISON . 
• \.dverbs are compared just likl' adjectives. 'l'he 
following romparisons may be no1.Pd herr:-
Positive. Comparative. Supedative. 
agter (behind) [ verder agter 
(further 
agtPrste 
bPhincl)l 
erg (vt·t·y, badly) erg-Pr <'rgsill 
FOH 
Positive. 
di.kwels (often) 
graag (gladly, fnin) 
nn by (near) 
selcle ( RC'lrlnm) 
vroe g (car ly) 
Wt>ll, g·oecl (well) 
Comparative. 
meer, rneermale 
liPw<'r(R) (rather) 
11 aclPr 
m inder (les:-. 
frpqurntly) 
ec>uler, vrtlei;r 
h(•l('l' 
X. NOTES ON ADVERBS, 
1. Toe ma~' hr used:--
Superlative. 
meeste 
liefs, liewersi e 
grnagfdC' 
naaste 
minstP 
l'end.e, \Toegsle 
heste 
(n) ns an A ciT. of ~Iannpr: sluil clie deur toe 
(lnf'k the door). 
(b) aR an Adv. of .Plnl'e, Pnf'lilieally :--nns gaan 
clorp-toe (wr nre going to the village). 
(c) as au Adv. used as an Adj. :-om; staan voor 'n 
toe cleur (we arc standing in front of a dosed door). 
(d) as a :-:lub. Couj. of Time:-Toe clio jagler die 
leeu sien, skrik hy so dat hy sotmu· heeli emal miRskiPt 
(when the hunter RDW the lion, hr gnt tmf'h a fright 
that he miRRed him altogether). 
This la11l usage of toe iR vPl',Y c·ommon in narrative 
style, and alwa~·s refrrs to past time (ttlthough used 
with the histmic preRPltt). 'Vhrn rrferring to C'Vents 
in the future, we use as ur wanneer :-as .i:v hom sien, 
moot jy hom g·elukwenR (if y•m sec him, you musl con­
gratulate him); laat vir my weet wanneer .i:v kom (lt>t 
me know when yon are f'nming). 
:!. Dan, mos, tog, maar are very extensiYely used 
as expletives in ~\.frilmans, for whiC'h there are no 
ec1uivalents in English. The following cxamplrs will 
give some idea of tho force of these words in a sentence: 
Kum dan, Piet, ek is hastig- (Ilo eome, or come 
thPn, Piet, I am in a hurry). 
II 
~luak dan tog gou, dil' treiu trek n£>tnuu! (Do 
hurry np then, the train is going just nnw !) 
Jan, loop Jutal tog 'n PillllH~r water! (.J olm, do go 
and feteh a pail of watPr !) 
Annie was maar swak in haar klaA, maar sy het 
tog dPur haar eksamen gekom (Annie was ruther weak 
in class, yet she passell hrr rxamination). 
Om jou ie pleo;icr sal ek dit maar doen (To please 
you 1 shall dn it [i.e. as a favonrJ) . 
. ly wil my mos uie help nie, daarom sal ek nie my 
werk doen uie (SePing that ynn do no1 want to assist 
me, I shall not do m,y work). 
:3. Seide is an Adverb :-li,y kom selde bier ( ITe 
rarely, or seldom, comes he1·e). 
Seldsaam (rare) is m:ed m: an adjediw :--llit is 'u 
seldsame geheurteniH ('l'hi:-; is a rmP" occurrant·e). 
4. Daarom (therefore) is a Conjunctive Adverb:­
Die kind het seer gekry, daarom huil h:v (The f'hild got 
hurt, therefore it eriPs). 
Darem (nevertheless, indeed) is a .JloJal Adverb:­
Ek bet nie lus nie, maur e k :-;al dit dar em do en (I 
don't like to, but I'll do it nPYeriheleHs). 
Tly het gese hy knn1 nie, maar h,v heL tog darem 
gekom (lie said he would uot (•ome, lmt nevPrihele:-;s 
he camr). 
PrPsident \VilHon i~' darem 'n man! (Pre:-.ident 
Wilson iH indeed a man !) 
5. Mee (with), the A<lverb, must be carefully 
disting-uished £rom met, the Preposition:-
Ek gaan dorp-toe; gaan jy mee? () am gomg to 
the village; are you going with ~meJ r) 
Gaan jy saam me,t my r (Are you going with me?) 
Jan gaan met die kar, maar PiPt gaan met die 
trein (John is going hy eart, but PiPt is going hy train). 
f'HAPTER X. 
TITE PR BP08l'I'IUX - DIJ<j VOOHST•JTSE,l,. 
I, In Afrikuunt:~, as iu English, all l'repositiuns 
g·overu .S ouns or Pronouns in the Ubjeetive Uase. '.l'hP 
fnlluwing list o£ Prepositions may be found useful: -
aan (to, at) 
auugaande (concerning) 
agter (behinu) 
behalwe (exPept) 
benewens (besides) 
binnekunt (inside) 
bo, lH1kant (.outside) 
by (at: by uie huis) 
betreffende (concerning) 
lleur (through; by 
means of) 
digteby (near to) 
g-euUI'ende (during) 
in (in, into) 
in plaas van (imtead o£) 
in weerwil van (in spite 
of) 
lang-s, lang·er'l (lwsiU<') 
met (with) 
na (after, towardg) 
naby (near to) 
namens (in the name o£) 
uewens, neff ens ( n<>xt to, 
beside) 
naas, naas aan (11ext to) 
nieteenstuande (notwith­
standing-) 
om (at, round, £or tho 
sake o£) 
uor (over, pasl, on 
account of) 
onder (under, among) 
omtrent, omstreeks 
(about) 
ondanks, trots (in spite 
o£) 
np, bo-op (on, upon) 
rondom (around, round 
about) 
1mam met (together with) 
sedert, sinds (since) 
fmnder (without) 
teen (against) 
tePnom· (over against, 
towards) 
ten spyte van (in spite of) 
tPrwillc van (for the sake 
of) 
ten behoewe van (on 
behalf o£) 
tot (to, until) 
tussen (between) 
t.vdm1s (at thP time of) 
uit (out of) 
uitgenome, uitgesonder 
(with the exception 
o£) 
van (of, from) 
vir (for, to) 
verhy (past, beyond) 
vuur (before, in front of) 
volgens, vullens 
(according to) 
WPens, Van WCO (on 
aPrount of) 
II. NOTES ON PREPOSITIONS. 
1. Aan may be used in two senses:-
(a) to :-Ek se aan (vir) my vrou (1 say to my 
wife). 
(b) at:-Die kinders sit almal aan tafel (The 
children are all sitting at table). Die soldate sal 
almal aa.n die Kaap land ('l'he sulfliers will all land at 
the Cape). 
2. Agter is used fur rest at a place or motion, but 
never for time :-Ek sit agter my pa in die kerk (In 
church I sit behind my father). Die poliesman hard­
loop agter die die£ aan (The policeman rm1s after the 
thief). 
'l'o express time, na must be used :-na die vakansie 
(after the holidays), but never: agter die vakansie. Na 
hy dit gedoen bet, stap hy bedaard weg (After he had 
done that, he walked away calmly). 
Na is also used of motion towards, ancl is thPn 
usually i'ollowed by toe (towards):-
Dogtertjie, kom na my toe! (Little girl, Pome to 
me!) 
:M6reoggend gaan ek durp-toe, huis-tue, ens. (To­
morrow morning I am going to the village, home, etc.) 
Die meisies loop hiernatoe, die jongetjies daarnatoe 
(The girls walk this way, the boys that way). 
3. Bo is usually used with op (upon) :---Piet staan 
JJO•Op die berg (Piet stands on the top of the moun-
FOH ENGLI~H STCDJ~NTS 97 
Lai11); Jie 1lnk is plat bo-op die huis (the roof on the 
top of the house is flat). 
4. Oeur may mean (i) through :-Bk steek my 
:mn deur die mou (I put my arm through the sleeve). 
(ii) by means of, through the instrumentality of :-Hy 
het die prys deur jou vrieudelikheid gekry (He obtained 
the prize through your kindness). 
5. Om may mean:-
(i) at (of time) :-om drie-uur (at three o'clock); 
om die anrlcr dag (every second !lay). 
(ii) round :-Die hond loop om die huis ('l'he dog 
walks round the house). 
(iii) for the sake of :-Hy het Jit om jon gedoen 
(lie did it for your sake). 
(iv) on account of :--Bk huil om jou (l weep on 
account of you). 
6. Saam met :--'l'he following examples will illus­
trate the use :-
,Jan, gaan .i.v saam met my dorp-toe :' (.Tohn, are 
you going with me to the village?) 
.Ia, ek :-wl me,t jou saamgaan (Yes, l'll go with 
you). 
Neem hienlie hricf, saam met die book, ua mur. B. 
toe- ('rake this letter, together with I he book, to ::\fr. B.) 
Saam may also he UKPd alone :-Pa gaan Kaapstud­
toe, en ek gaan saam (Fatlwr il-l going to Cape 'l'own, 
and I am going wii.h him). 
, . Teenoor may me:m :-
(i) over against :-TTy stel sy eis teenoor myne (He 
puts in his claim over against mine). 
(ii) towards :-Die gencraal was baie vriendelik 
teenoor sy snlrhtc (The general was very kind towards 
his soldiers). 
UK :\IAHKK\\' 1\liLL~~R'S "\I<'HllCL\~H GHA~L\IAR 
H. Tot may mean:-
(i) to :-Die e11p:ol o;c tot Lot (The angel said to 
Lot). This usage is mosil:v found in hihlieal rxpres-
sions. In ordinary Afrikaans we rather usr vir. 
(ii) until :-Wag tot (of totdat) hy 'n antwoord 
sLuur (\Vait until he senrlR a reply). Om; wrrk \'an 
die more tot rlio aand (\Ve work from morniug till 
night). 
9. Van may express :-
(i) possession (of) :-Die strweltjies van ~annie 
(Smwie's little boots). J)it Jloot van die Atoel (the 
leg of the chair). 
(ii) motion (from) :-'n Brief van Jan (A lPtter 
from .1 ohn) ; Kom jy van die Kaap a£? (Do you eL>me 
from Capo Towu, lit. tho Cape P) Van .Maandag; tot 
Ratenlag (From .:\Ion nay i o f.laturda,\). 
10. Vir is a prepositiou uRell very extensively, 
unJ with a varieiy of mraning'l :-
(i) for :-IIier is 'n present vir you (Here is a 
pre'ient for you). nit is jou kos vir <lie <lag ('l'his is 
your food for the <lay). Vir twee jaar het ek hom 
nooit gesien nie (For, or <luring, two :vears I never 
saw l1im). 
(ii) to :-Vir my lyk die saak maar erwdig (To me 
the matter ap!JeUl'S to be rather serious). ITy sf> vir 
my rk moPt gm1 maak (lie sayR to me ihat 1 must 
hurry up). 
(iii) Vir iH al,o mrcl with the Indirect Object, wherr 
in English we woulJ 11ot use a pl'e}Josition :-Gee vir 
hom 'n stukkie broo!l (Give him a pirre ol' hread). Re 
vir haar sy moet kom (Tell her to en me). 
(iv) It is also nsrd with the nnmrs of 11er~:~ons as 
Direct Object:-Ek sal vir jon slaan (T'll heat you). 
Die Jlerd het vir (iert geskop ('l'l1e horAe ki.ekecl <Jert). 
1Rre alAo the Notr on raNI:' in Chapter I\r., RP('tiOll HI.J 
!JQ 
11. U it 111ay mean:-
(i) out:- Is jou h:1as tuiHr N"r<', h,\ iH vamlag· uit 
(I-; your master at home? Xo, he is out to-day). 
(ii) out of, from: Tiy het. <lit uit afguus gedorn 
(lie did it out nf envy). Ify loop uit diP kamc>r (lie 
walks out of i he rnom). 
(iii) from (moi inn):-W aar kom jy van<laan? Ek 
kolll uit die Hkool 1\Vherc do \'011 rome from:' I rome 
from srhonl). . · 
1 ~. It will lw olJ'leJ·vecl that man v of i,hese words 
giv<'n UH prepuHitions may al'lo he- uHed at-. adverbs, awl 
that many achPrh'l may also he usNl as prepoRitions :-
agter:-Tiy loop agter (Uo walks hehind). lTere 
it is an adverb. 
lly loop agter my (TTP walks lwhind me). Here 
it is a prepnRition. So abo: -
onder :-Piet werk onder (Piet wurks hrlow). 
tl-ert Rit onder 'n boom (Clc>d sits bc>neath a tree). 
om:- As die rivier vol iR, loop ck om (H the rivic>r 
i"l full, I shall walk 10uud). Try reiR om tlie werrlcl 
(lie trasels rouncl the world). 
voor :- Piet, knm "lit hirr voor! (I'., ('ollie and sit 
i11 front here ! ) 
J>io die£ mod voor die magistraat kmn (Tlw ihir£ 
must appc>ar before the magistrate). 
EXERCISE 53.- Twnslate iut<J ,\frikaa11s :-
(1) Plea;.;e g·ive lllP that knife. (2) I'll meet you 
al :L-15 this aftemom1. 1:1) ThL' C"hil<lren lUll round the 
garden. (4) Aftc>r hreakfa,.,t ·we go to wurk. (5) Come 
to mP. (G) Stand hchincl the tloor~ (7) \Vaii. nntil the 
sun set~. (8) Toll us all about your journey. (9) The 
sheep are clying Oil uet·uunt of ihe drought. (10) At•rord­
ing to my watch it is 11ow 9.00 a.m. (11) The1e is no 
rule without an PXC:Pptiou. (1~) During thP 0-reat 
\Var everything- was Yery dPar. 
C'HAPTmH XI. 
'l'Im ()( >~.l PNC'l'ION DIE V()EGWOORD. 
I. CO·ORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS (NEWESKIK· 
KENDE VOEGWOORDE). 
1. Copulative (aaneenskakelend) :- en (and); 
beide ...... en (both ...... and); sowe·l ...... as (as well 
...... as) j further also tJ1e f'Olljundive auwrhs :-nog, 
ook, daarna, asook, etc>. (SPe ChaptC'r IX., § viii). 
2. Disjunctive :111d Adversative (teeustelleml) :--
maar, dog (but), of, Of ...... Of (either ...... or), nog 
...... nog (neithC'r ...... 1101"); fmiher ihe> l'Ollj. ac!Y. 
egter, tog, nogtans, rlc. (Chapter IX.) 
:1. Causative (oorsaaklik) :-want (£nr); £mthPr 
ihe t·onj. aclv. dus, derhalwe, hierom, C'ic·. (ClwpiPr IX.) 
II. SUBORDINATIVE (ONDERSKIKKENDE) CONJUNC· 
TIONS express:-
1. Time:- voor, voordat (bC'£orP); wanneer 
(when); toe (when); totdat (until); nadat (after); so 
gou as (as soon as); eer, eerdat (bP£orC'), Pic. 
2. Purpose :-opdat, dat ( in nrtler that). 
a. Condition :-as (if); mits (pro,·ided that); 
tensy (unlPss); ingeval, ingeval dat (in case). 
4. Concession :-al (although); hoewel, alhoewel, 
ofskoon (although); nieteenstaande (noiwithstanding-, 
although). 
5. Reason:- -om, omdat (hpc·ausp): aangesien 
(:-.in<·P); daar (silll·c). 
101 
!i. Comparison: nes, net soos (jn-;t like); soos 
ilikP); as. dan (than). 
7. Demonstrative:- dat (ihat): Bk weei dat hv 
'n skurk is (I know that lw· is a ~->('(JlJlldrel). 
R. Consequence :-dat, sodat (so that); waarom, 
waardeur (wheure). 
Ill. NOTES ON CONJUNCTIONS. 
1. Tu elau:-.rs introduced hv Subordinative Cou­
junctious thl' verh genemlly co1~1es at the end :-Die 
nnderwyser -;e hy sal ons more straf (The teacher says 
he will punish u~ to-monuw). 
Hut: -DiP underW,Vi'll'l' sl- dat h.v (JllS more sal 
straf. 
,J y sal 'n w.vs kry as jy jon lesse mooi leer (You 
will get a l'rizr if you lenrn your lrssons well). 
Laat vir oll'l weei wannee·r jy huis-tor knm (Lrt us 
kuow whe11 you ttl'P f'Oming- home). 
TTy het !-HlkRP'l omdat hy sy plig- do en (lie i~ 
;Hl('('l'S,..,ful lweu llSf' he Lloes his £lu ty). 
'
1 lu clauses introdtl('P(l hy cuHjuuctive adverLs 
tlw order of words is inverted ; Lut in clauses introduced 
hy co-ordiuative conjunctions the normal order oi' words 
iR not diRiurhed (ser ChapiPrs lX. and XVTT.) 
EXERCISE 54.-Cmnhille the fullowiug- pairs of sen­
tences with eaeh of the following conjunctions and 
conjunctive acherhH: en, daarom, dus., want, 
derhalwe:-
(1) Die lug is hewolk --- - dit reen. 
(2) Dir sou Hkyn lekker --- clie lug· iH onhewolk. 
(:11 Oll-: hc>t swaar gcwerk ouH lH moeg. 
.102 .\IAl4KE\V .\IILL]<;lt'H .\FlUKAANl4 OHA~L\L\lt 
( 4) .T annie hPt 'u prest'll t gr kry - - hy iH hl~,. 
(5) Ons ht't vakausie --- ons gnan piekuiek 
maak. 
(6) Ruid-Afrika is groot - -- hy lewPr baie Roortp 
produkte op. 
(7) Daar i-4 hran<l in <lie stad ---- almnl hnrdloop 
SOOli toe. 
(H) \Vol is goed o_p prys --- rlir Alwaphoere ]mop 
motorkarre. 
(9) Die droog-to druk swaar --- rlir laud g-aan 
ag·teruit. 
(10) Uus ltet min fn hriPkc iu nuH laml - --- ons 
muet haie gnrcl importeer. 
EXERCISE 55.-Complete thf' fullowiug sPntPnel'f; :-
(1) Ons land is gewel<lig ryk aan mitwrnlc, tng ..... . 
C~) Ons werk uou swaar R()(lat .. .. . ... . (_;{) Gee vir my 
jou adreR, ingeval ......... (4)1Torwel daar<lie ho<>k lJUie 
duur is, ......... (5) OnH het bait' arm m<>nsP in ous land 
omcla t . . . . . . . . . (G) Iu ;:,y .i eng hf't hy al1 yd sy plig 
gedoen, dus .. .. ..... (7) Ons vopthah;pan hPt pragtig 
gPspeel, nogtans . . . . . . . . . (R) E<>n; moet <ntH hienlie 
werk klaarmaak, <laarna ......... (9) Jy nuwt jou saum-
hrPel suamneem, want . . . . . . . . . (1 0) .Tan het l1y llio Pinde 
van die jaar gedrui1,, ufskoon .. .. . .. .. I 1 1) Unt-1 het nlmal 
g-edink dit sou 'n mooi dug WPPS, <lug . . . . . . . . . ( 12) Ek 
sal juu die geld leen, mits ........ . 
CHAPTJ<m XIJ. 
TilE VBHB- DTB \V.EHKWUOHD. 
A vrrb signifies:-
(a) au aetion :-Piet werk (Pie>t works): 
(b) a condition : -Jan slaap (John sleeps) ; 
(e) a chaug-e: -Koos vertrek (KooK lravr'l). 
I. THE REGULAR VERB- DIE RE~LMATIGE 
WERKWOORD. 
1. Strong and weak:-"'With the rxeeption o£ such 
ul!l Past Tense forms as was (was), dag (thought), wis 
~knew), and a nu1n ber uf Past Pr~rtieiplN; of verbs 
whirh wert> OJH'l" t>lrong, t hP vrrh in .\Jrikanns is always 
weak, that i,;, ihr root-vu\\ l'l i'l not chauged for the 
Past 'reuse and the Past Par1i<·iplr. Thus leer -
geleer, kom - gekom, ete. 
:2. Transitive ( o!llgauklik or trausitief) and 
Intransitive (onoo,·gr~nklik or intrnnsitief) :-
• .\ YPrl1 is trau'litive when it may have a Direct 
Ohjerl :-DiP kiml roep ,.,~- nurrH ('I'h~ el1ild ea1ls his 
parents), hut inhausitive whPn the udion iH limited to 
the subjeet :-Die slang· slaap ('l'ho snake sleeps). 
Very ofte11, howpver, the same verb is nsed 
transitively as well as iutr:msitiwly: -
])ir man <1raai <lie wirl IThr man hnm; the wheel). 
Die wirl draai ('l'ltr wlLPrl iums). 
JOt :\JASKg\Y :\IILLJ<~R'S Al<'lUKAAXiS GltAM:\JAR 
Die hout brm1d (The wood burns). 
Die vuur brand my hand ('l'he fire hums my hand). 
:L Voice (Vorm) :- -
(a) A verb is in the Active Voice (Bedrywend or 
Aldie£) if the Subject is the doer of thE' action):-
Die e1wls trek die ploeg (The mulE's draw tht• 
plough). 
(b) A verb is in the Passive Voice (Lyden de or 
Passief) if the Subject suffers the action:-
Die ploeg word deur die eNels getrek (The plough 
is drawn by the mules). 
(c) 'l'ho Passive is formed from the Active by the 
help of the auxiliary word, which is followed hy the 
Past l)artiriple. 
Active. 
Die seun skop die voet­
bal. 
(The hoy kicks the foot­
hall.) 
4. Mood (Wyse) :-
Passive. 
Die voetbal word deur die 
senn geskop. 
(The foothall is kiPkPd b~ 
the boy.) 
(a) The Indicative (Aantonende vVys or Indikatief) 
expresses definite action:-
Hans slaan die bal (Ham; hits the hall). 
(b) The Imperative (Gebiedeuue Wys or Imperatief) 
expresses a command :-
Saal op die perd! (Saddle the horse!) 
Laat, my los ! (Let me go !) 
Moenie raas nie! (Do not make a uoiHe !) 
(c) The Subjunctive (Aauvm•gende "\Vys or Kon-
FOR E~GLISH S'I'lTDENTR 105 
junktief) signifiPs indefinite action, that is, action which 
is desired, possible or probable, etc.:-
Hulle mag vanaand opdaag (They may turn up 
to-night). 
Washy tog- maar hi£>r ~ (Would that hP were here!) 
(d) The Infinitive (On bepaalde W ys or lnfinitief) 
<lues not exprPss any relation of the action to reality. 
It simply names the action and bears the character of a 
Yerb and a noun at the same timP, :- -Ily het WP1·k om te 
doen (Ho has woTk to do). • 
(1) .Functioning- as a verb the Infinitive may be 
followe<l (i) by a DirPct Ohject :- -
Vra die man om vir ons blomme te pluk (Ask the 
man to pick flowers for us, when blomme is the Object 
of te pluk. 
(ii) by an adYPrb or adverbial phra'le: -
Ek het Yerlof om in die tuin te wandel (T haYe 
permission to walk in the garden). 
(2) As a noun the Infinitive may be 
(i) The Subject of the Rentence :-
Om te vlieg is .-ir die mPns onmoontlik ('l'o fly 1s 
impossiblo for man). 
~ii) 'l'he Ohjcd :-
Hulle hcwonller Jie sing van die koor (They admire 
the singing of the choir). 
(iii) The Complement of the Predicate:-
.Tou plig i::; om te swyg (Your Juty is to be silent). 
(iv) The Enlargement of the Subject:-
Die kans om te kies i::; wrby ('rhe opportunity of 
choosing has passed). 
lOfl MA~KEW :!\ITLLER'R AFRTTL\ANR GR,\Ml\JAH 
(v) 'l'he Bxteusi1J11 of the Predicate:-
Die arm man moet werk om te Jeef (The poor man 
must work in order to live). 
(vi) The ObjPctive after a Preposition):--
Hy eet sonder om te bid (Ile eats without prayir1g). 
(:~) There are two TenHeA of the Infinitive:-
(i) The Present Infinitive, that iA, the si<'m of the 
v<'l'b with or without te or om te :-
Dit is swaar om arm te wees (It is hard tu be poor). 
(ii.) The PerfPct Infinitiv<', which ill formed from 
the Present by means of the PaAt Participle with the 
auxiliary het :-
Dit is hetcr om eers arm te gewees het en dun ryk 
te word (It is better in l1ave lH:•eu poor first and then 
to become rich). 
(4) "\Ve have seen that the Infinitive may be written 
with or without the ~:~igns te or om te. Tt stands alone: 
(i) After an auxiliary verb:--
IIy kan, mag, wil. Hal gaan (He can, may, wiRheR 
to, will go). 
(ii) As Subject or Object:-
Loop is goeie of'ff'ning (Walking is a good exercisE'). 
Ek hon van perdry (I likE' riding on horsehack). 
(iii) In such expressions as:-
Ek sien die trein vertrek (T see the train leave). 
Hour jy die hond blaf? (Do you ht>ar the Jog bark?) 
Help my die wiel draai (fTf'lp me to turn the 
wheel). 
Die voel'l gaan sla.ap (ThC' birds go to slPep). 
107 
H is wriltcn with te :-
(i) ln adverbial phraRe'l of r·ause or means which 
l1egin with deur or met:-
Deur dit te doen Hal jy my 'n guns bowys (Hy doing 
thi" :vou will do me a favour). 
Die sprPker begin met sy Ollponent sleg te maak 
(The speaker hrgins by slandering hiR opponent). 
(ii) ~\bo after other PrrpoRitions when it is uHed 
more aR a verb:-
In plaas van te werk doeu .i.'' niks (iusteuu of 
working you arf' doing nothing). 
(iii) After hoef, behoort, is:--
J ulle lwef nie te skryf nie (You ueeu not write). 
Om; hrhoort (lit te doen nve ought to do it). 
DiP rywiel is te koop (ThiH hir:vrlP i'l for RalP). 
It iR written with om te: -
(i) Iu the BxteuRion o£ Purpose: 
Om mopt eet oom te leef (\Ve must eat to live). 
(ii) In the Enlargement of tho Subject or Object: ­
Hy is 'n goeie man om die po<> te vul (Tie is a goou 
man to fill the poRt). 
(iii) A Ttrr Adjective:-;, especially m sPntenees 
l,egiuning with dis (dit is):-
.IIulle het genoeg om van te leef (They have enough 
to hve by). 
Dis moeilik om die pmbleL'm op te los (1 t is uifficult 
to solve this prohlPm). 
(iv) After hoe, wat, te + Adj., sonder :-
Hy wert wat om te doen (He knows what to do). 
ll)k "!ASKEW .\IILLEH'S ,\ I<'RTK.\.\XS (iLL\.\1.\fAH 
vVeet jy hoe om die som te maak ~ (Do you know 
how to do the sum?) 
Ry is te lelik om uuntreklik te wees (Rhe is too 
ugly to be attructivr). 
'u )fens kan prokureur "\Vees sunder om te bedrieg 
(On<' c·an he an nttorney without heing rlishonest). 
( v) As Object after certain 'l'ram;itiYe V erh~, stH'h 
as begeer, he lowe, gr hied, raai, mee11, lwrimwr, ete. 
Hegeer julle om alles te weet? (Dn yon wiHh to 
know everything?) 
Ierland vrrlung om vry te wees (T n· land longs to 
he frP<'). 
(5) [n a few words the Infinitive is sometimes 
written with an -e, which is a rPmnant of the fnfinitivt> 
rnding -en in Nederland-;: -
Die toe<~tand van die pad laat veel te wense oor 
('l'hP condition o£ tho road lpaves mw·h to bP desired). 
ITo!' kun 'n mens rlit le wete kom? (Tiow can onP 
get to know this ?) 
Dis te hope dat 011s sukses sal hi> (It is to he hoven 
that Wf' shnll have SlH'f'f'S<~). 
(G) lf a Past Participle is followed by an Infinitive, 
the Participle may heeome an I nfini Jive too :-
Bk het dir man gehoor ( L havr hrard the nw11). 
Ek het die man hoor sing (I heard the man sing·). 
Het jy vir Piet gesien r (Have you seen Piet i') 
Ju, ek het hom sien loop (Yes, T <~aw him walking*). 
* The Infinitive in Afrikaans is very often rendered by the 
Present Participle in English. 
CHAPTER XHI. 
TilE VERB (continued). 
Tense (Tyd) :-There are eight Tenses o£ the 
Indicative:-
(a) Present Incomplete (Onvoltooide Teeuwoordige), 
which signifies that an action is incomplete in present 
time:-
Ek was my hande (I am washing my hands). 
(i) In the case of a few verbs we have two forms 
for the Present:- ga.at or ga.an, slaat or slaa.n, staat 
nr sta.an, siet or sien, doet or doen. 
(ii) Verbs cntling in ·f (where the f represents a v 
iu the TnfinitiYe of the verb in ~ederlands) have an 
alternative form in -we in i.he Present 'l'ense as well 
a<> in the Infinitive:-
Ek skryf or skrywe 'n brief (I write a letter). 
Skryf or skrywe aan my as jy daar aankom (Write 
to me when you arrive there). 
(iii) Note also the following alternative forms:-
vraag - vra (question) kleed - klee (clothe) 
waug - wac (risk) bedrieg - bedriee 
draag - dru (cnrry) (cheat) 
leg - le (lie or lay) behoor- behoort 
seg - He (say) (belong, ought) 
jaag - ja (chase) geloof- glo (believe) 
veeg - Yee (sweep) reen - reent (rain) 
saag sue (Haw) terg - tere (tease) 
lieg- lie (to tell a lie) sorg - sore (care for); 
ryg - rye (to thread) etc. 
110 l\IA=-'KE\Y :\fiLLER'S .\FlUKAA;\S GRA.Ml\lAR 
The forms tm the right nre l'erhap'l the more 
c.:nmmon. 
SometimPs WC' have three cliffcrent forms of the 
PrPscnt: -
vlieg- vliei' vlie (to fly), ploPg ploee- ploe 
(io plough), heloo£ - helowP - - 1wlo (to promise), 
begin - begint -- heg-inne (to bPgin). 
OcrasionalLr also we find sueh forms as bidde and 
spelle for bid <.iway) and spel (spell). 
(iv) l'here is no form of the verh to exprpss 
prug-ressivP artion as is the case in English. 'l'hP idPa 
is pxpre,;sed in other ways. The English: "He is 
writing- '' would be translated in Afrikaans as follows: 
(i) lly is aau die skr.}f (skrywe). 
iii) 11.~- is aan 't skryf (skrywe). 
(iii) 11y is nan skryf (skrywe). 
(iv) lly is hesig met (om te) ~kryf (skrywe). 
(b) Present Complete CY oltooiJe Teeuw.), 'vhil"h 
signifies an nrtion which is complete in prPsPnt timP :-
~~k het my haTille gewas Pn gaan nou eet (l ha vp 
waslte<l my hands and am now going for my meal). 
It is formed hy means of the auxiliar:> he with 
the Past Participle. 
(i) \" erhs sig-ni!ying a c·hange of plucc or conditio11 
may take either het or is to form the Present Compll'lr :-
Wat het or is met hom geheur (What has bap­
prnPcl to him ~) 
Hy is or het baie verauder (He has altprpcl much). 
(ii) Sometimes the verb "to be" is used alone with 
an adverb or adverbial phrase to expre-;s c.:hange of 
place:-
IIy is vanuag Karo-toe (IIe left for the Kun-o last 
night). 
FOR EXGLISH ~TCDEXTS 111 
Hoc laat is jy van die plaas; (What time did you 
lPa' e the farm r) 
(e) Past Incomplete (Omolt. Verlede), which 
signifies that an action is incomplete in past time. In 
form it is the sume as the Present Complete:-
Uister het ons hier gesit (Yesterday we sat here). 
(i) \Ve have met the forms was, dag (dog), and wis 
a~-1 thE:' Pa1-1t Ten,;c form,; of is, dink, and weet. Werd 
aiHl had are also still u,;ed by some writers as the 
Past Tense of word and het respectively. GenPrally 
~peaking, howevPr, these forms seldom occur in ordinary 
~peech, and must he lookc>d upun as forms which are 
kept alive under the infinence of Xederlands. 'rhe fact 
that these forms for t wn different tenses are i.he flame, 
lloes not lead to confusion of thought (in Latin amavi 
might mean "1 have loved' 'as well us "1 loved"). 
From the context it will always be clear which of the 
two times i~-1 meant. (Thus :-Cister het ek hom gesien 
(1 estcrday I saw him). 
(ii) In narratin' the form of the Present Incomplete 
is very often used io l'Xpress artion in past time, just 
us the Tiistoric Pre-;ent in Englit~h, for example. But 
in Afrikaans Present and Past forms are mixed up in 
the same paragraph and in the same sentence. Thus 
we can say, e.g. '' "Ek het geweet clut jy sal kom" (I 
knew that you would vome). 
Instead of i nftectrd forms for the Past 'I'ense the 
little word toe (then) does 1luty in Afrikaans, just as 
nou (now) is often employed with the Present, anJ. al 
(already) for the Pa-;t Complete or Past Perfect. 
Examples :-
Toe ek gister daar kom, was hulle almal tuis (When 
1 arri veu there yesterday, they were all at home). 
Hulle vra my toe om 'n koppie koffie te drink (They 
abkeu me to drink a rup of collie). 
11~ ~IASKEW :\liLLER'S AFRIKAANS GHA:\1:\IAR 
::\Iaar ek bedank en se nee, ek het nie tvd nie (But 
I derlinod and said I had no time). • 
(iii) Instead of the fotm werd fur the Past Tense 
uf word, we use is, which is not to be confused with the 
.l!;ngli'lh "is," used in the Present 'J.'Pnse o£ the Passive:-
Die leerling word g-eprys = the pupil is (being) 
}Jraised. 
Die lP.erling is g-eprys (gewonl) - ' The pupil has 
<been or was praised. 
"\V anneer is die hnis gehnu ~~ \Vheu was this 
lhouse built ? 
Die huis is in 1875 gebou = This house was built 
in 1875. 
Just as in the ease of ihe Active, so here, too, toe 
will be usPd when there is any po:>sibility of doubt:-
Xadat hy sy skuld erken het, is hy gevonnis (AftPr 
he had pleaded guilty, he was sentenced). 
Die dief wou hom nie o01·gee nie en is toe dood­
geskiet (The thief would not surrender him-;el£ and was 
shot). 
(d) Past Complete (Volt. Yedede) signifies that 
an action was C'ompleted before some other action took 
place in past time. Tts relation to the Past Incomplete 
is the same as that of the Presont Complete to the 
Present Incomplete. But instead of using the Past 
Tense o£ the auxiliary, he, which is used for the Prese11t 
Complete, the same as is done in English and Ncder­
lands, we generally use ihe same form as fur the Present 
Complete and the Past Incomplete, i.e. het + Past 
Part. and avoid any am higuity in meaning by intro­
rlucing the little word a.l (already). The form had 
(Eng. had) is Rtill sometimes uRed by certain writers, 
and occasionally it is heard in ordinary speech, but 
l<'OR ENGLTSH ~'J'UDENTS 113 
there iR no donht that thPse are the rxceptions. It 
occurs fairly oftPn nnlv in Corulitional sentpnces us an 
independPnt verb:- · 
As ek tyd had, "un Pk jou LPllJ (If l had time, I 
would help you). 
(i) The following ,.;eutenerR will illustrate the 
rendering- of the Pluperfect in Afrikaam:-
Toe hy gisteraand in my kamer kom, het ek my 
opstel reeds gc•skry£ (When he entered my room la'lt 
PYPning, I had already written my essay). 
Toe Pk claar kom, het hy die peru al verkoop al 
('Vhen I arriwd there, ho had soltl the horse). 
(ii) Sometimec; we find that the Past Part. comP"l 
to be used somewhat in an adjectival sense, and the 
Past Part. of he, i.e. gehad, is added:-
Toe ek hom gister ontmoet, het by sy op,.;tel al 
geskrywe gehad (When T met him yesterday, he had 
l already] written his pssuy, literally: lie had had his 
pssay written already). 
(iii) In the Passive the Past TenRe of is is uRed for 
the Past ComplPte :-
Gister tePn hierrlie tyd was ek nog nie gevra uie 
( Y esterrlay by this time I had not bt>en aRkPrl yet). 
};.B.-Was must be UHPd for the PaRt Complrtt> 
Passiw only, and not, as in English, for ihe Pust 
IncomplPte PaRsiw. Do nnt, for example, Ray :-Die 
huis was gister afgebrand, when you mean: "The home 
was burnt down yesterday." Was must he suh"ltitntPd 
hy is. · · 
(e) Future Incomplete (Onvolt. Toeknmende) sig­
nifieR that an action is incomplete in some future timP, 
114 .\fASKK\Y ~[JLLF:R'S AFRIKAA~S GRAJ\DfAR 
and is formed bv means of tl1e auxiliary sal with the 
Infinitive*:- • ' 
More sal hy die lH1ek bring (ro-monow he will 
hring the book). 
(i) In Afrikaans sal is the only form of the Future. 
English " will " must then•fore also he translated by 
sal. Wii alwa:ys means ''to be willing, to wish, to 
want." Similarly WOU nevPr meum; "would," hoth 
"should " and "would " being translated by s,ou, the 
Past Tense of sal. "Should," meaning ''ought to," 
is translated by behoort :-
Jy behoort Jit i.e weet -= You should know this. 
(f) Future Complete cr olt. 1'oPk.) signifies that 
an action \vill be complete in slllne future time, anJ 
therefore requires the auxili~.ny fnr the Perfect as well 
as that for the Future, i.P. sal a1Hl he. 
Vanaand om tienuur sal ek die spel gesien het 
(To-night at ten T Ahall have sePn the pluy). 
(i) Sometimes the form he is u,ed, hut this i.;; 
wrong. With the Past Part. we generally find het: 
Om dit te gedaan het (Infin.) is 'n eer vir jon (T,, 
have done this iRan honour for you). 
(g) Past Future Incomplete (Onvnlt. Yerl. 'l'nek.) 
;;ignifies an udion whi<·h is i1womplete at a time which 
was futme in the past:-
H v het laat weet dat hy sou kom (lie sent word 
that h~ would come. 
* Futurity may abo be e11.pn•s:,cd by tlu• form for tl1P PrPsent 
Tense and by gaan + Infinitive, P.g. :-
(1) Ek skryf vanaand hui~-toe (T am writing home tu-uight). 
(2) OnR gaan vanmiddag swem (We are going to swim this 
afternoon). 
FOH, l<jXflLlSH STl~DEXTS 11.3 
(h) Past Future Complete \ Y olt. Y erl. Tnek.) ~ng­
nifies the romplctc action namrd in (g) n b\)ve, nllll 
therefore requires het in addition:-
IIy het geskry£ dat hy die werk teen v:.mdag sou 
gedaan het (lfe wrote ['laying] that he wunhl have dune 
the work by tu-day). 
(i) Seeing that the Subjunctive implies the idea uf 
futurity, the Future Tenses are nut of place here, 
whereas in the cnse of the Imperative only the l're:-;ent 
l'Pnse comes into consiLleratinn. 
Number and Person ( Getal en Perso1m) :-
ln Afrikaans tho form o£ the verb Lloes not change 
to exprc\~S a difl'Prence in number or in person. Both 
are suffiC'iently indirated l•y the form of the noun or 
JlrnnnmL lf, thereforP, we know ihe bt Pers. Sing. 
u£ any Teuse anu we know the J:>ronoun.;;, we can writo 
down tho C'on.i11gatirm of the vrrb for ibat 'l'cnse. Thub 
we huve :-
Sing. Plur. 
1. l~k :-;kry£ Uns skry£ 
') u, jy skryf u, julle skr.d ... 
;;, hy, 
"'Y• clit -;kry£ hulle skryf 
C'llA PTER XIV. 
'l'TIE P ARTICIPLRS -DIE D.EBLWOORDE. 
Participles sometimes £unction as verhR and some­
times as adjectives, hence th~ir name. There are two 
Participles :-
(a) Present Part. (Teenwoorrlige dcelw.) 
(h) Past Part. (Verlede dePlw.) 
I. THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
(a) The Present Part. signifies an incomplete adion. 
(i) Exrept in the case o£ doen, staan, sien, slaan, 
gaan, and their compoundR (doende, staanrle, sirnde, 
slaande, gaanrlo), the Pres. Part. iA obtained £rom thr 
Infinitive hy adding -ende: -skryf - skrywende, lees 
- lesende. 
(ii) The Pres. Part. has an adive, the Past Part. 
a passive meaning :-skrywende studente; geskrewe 
briewe. 
(iii) In Afrikaans the Pres. Part. is found ehiefly 
as an adjective used attrihutivrly :-kokende nwlk, 
staande water. Many adjectives have still the fonu 
o£ the Pres. Part., and uo <louht were such once up\lH 
a time, but aro not £rlt to he such any more, e.g. 
opleUend (observant) :-'n oplettende kind (an ohsrr­
vant child); vallende: die vallende siekte (the fallinf< 
sickness); uitstekend :-uitstekende dienste (eminent 
Rervices). Whero in English the Pres. Part is Yel',\ 
often used to introduce an adjective or adverb clame, 
we prefer the Relative or the Adverb:-
Die man wat op die strand gestaan het, het geroep 
(The man standing on the beach, shouted). 
FOR E~GLISTI 8Tl:DENTR 117 
Terwyl ek p;ister in die straat loop, oui.moet ek my 
vriend (Walking in the sheet :vesterday, I met my 
friend). 
In orrlrr to avoid multiplying- short Rentences, the 
l 1:.nticipial phrase is sometimrs userl in writing, P.g·. 
"Van !lie Vrystaai.Re kant is Drakeusberg hier 'n 
}Jlato of hoogvlakte, en 'n mens kan ,inu voorstrl hoe 
hul, met dag·lemier uit die laer onder die rand vertrek· 
kende, lauk sal gerus hrt op die hoogsto punt van di0 
lJPrgrug " ......... 
(iv) Although the Participial phrase is not common 
in ronversatiounl language, there are srntences in whirh 
its use is quite legitimate, e.g.:-
(a) Die hele le1'r, bestaande uit 3,000 man, is op 
looJl geja (The whole army, ron.'listi11p; of 3,000 mrn, 
was routed). 
(b) Jy knn al die huisraad, insluitende die klavier, 
vir £400 koop (Yon ran buy al1 the fumiture, including 
tho piano, for £400). 
(c) Wetende wat my gevoelens is, moes jy geswyg 
ltd (Knowing what my feclingR are, you ought to havP 
kPTJt silent). 
(d) Ingr'4lote viiHl u 'n tjek vir £R, synde rente op 
£100 (l<~ndoRrd yon will fmcl n c·heque for £8, heing 
intereRt on £100). 
(v) In a few rases the Vrr-;. Part. is userl prerli-
catively :-
1 a) Die snak iR hangende (The raRe iR penning 1. 
(h) DiP vrou is sterwende (Tho woman is dying). 
IC") Die nwn is Jydende (The man is suffering). 
(vi) It is sometime!' med adverbially, aR in :-Hy 
do0n RY werk sing-ende (Tie Rings while he works). 
"More rnmmonly, however, we cxpreRs this 1rlea by a 
rerlupliratlon of ihP infinitive form, e.g. 1Ty rloen sy 
werk sing-sing. 
11~ :\fASK.EW .Uli~LRR'S AFRTKAX:-IS GRA:M:\L\R 
II. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
(i) The Past Part. is formed from the infinitive 
or stem by means of prefixing ge-, unleRs the verb is 
inRepara bl,v compounded (see Chapter XVI.) Verba 
who~o Rtem contains one of tho fullowing prefixrs : ­
be-, ge-, er-, her-, ont-, ver- are not, as a rnle, looked 
upon as compounded verbi-l, hut they follow the sam~ 
rul~ as inseparably rornpounded verbs, and have the 
11ame form for the PaHt Part. aR for ~he stem, i.~. they 
1lo not tn kf' ge- :--
Bk bewoon 'n huis in Oranje~:icht (I live in a hou"'o 
in Orang·ezicht). 
Natal word grotendeels deur kaffers bewoon Cfa tal 
,., brgely inhabited hy Kaffirs). 
(ii) Verbs of mo1e than one syllable, ruding in eer, 
nwy be written with or without ge .. in the Pa,-;t Part., 
e.g. ITy hPt stu deer or gestudeer (He .,t udied). 
(iii) ThE' Past Part. of verLs which end in I, m, n, 
r, ur a vowel, if they are used prcdicatively, arr some­
time,; written with a final d :-verander or veranderd 
(changed). 
Oenerull,v 1-lpeaking, the Part. tahs d when it 
functions as an aJjeutive, but not when it fu11dionR a'l 
a verl1 :-
Hy het my teleurgestel (lie disappointed 111 r). 
Ek voel teleurgesteld (I feel disappointetl). 
(iv) Nometime'l, howevN, it i'l difficult tlJ Jpritlt~ 
in which of the two cnpaeities the Part. functions. In 
tho ,;entenee Die huis is gemeubileer, it may be 
the one as wPll a'l the other. If the act of furnishing is 
thought of here, ihen gemeubileer would stand. But 
if the speakf.r thinks of the quality of the house as o£ 
'n gemeubileerde huis (a furnished house), th0 ten­
dency is to write gemeubileerd. 
119 
llut as then' is what apiJears tu h~ a growmg 
ten<knf'y to <liHC'ard the d even where it if' clrar that 
ihe Part. is used as an adjective, or where there is no 
original verh from \\ hif'h the Part. may be derived, it 
will be better to ;;tate the rule more widely. Thus:­
\Vhen the Part. can l>o referred to some aut or con­
nedPd '\\ith action, the d i~-1 1111t written. In this wav 
nnly <·an we acf'ount for sueh f01ms as onbepaal (nt;t 
fi'l:cd), ongepoeier (not powderet1), gestewel en gespoor 
(with hoots and spurs), ete. :-
Die ilatum is nog- onbepaal [ _, uie he1Jaaluie] (The 
date is not fixPd yet). 
Die man is ongekam en ongeskeer (The man 1s 
unkempt and 1mshaven). 
(v) The Pu.->t Part. or the al)()ve-JJ:tllle<l verh, lS 
always written withuut d: -
In tho Pa:>t Tense after het til" is: -
Ek hct my planne verander (I have eha11gecl my 
plans). 
Die grunJ is verdor (The ground is rlried out). 
Daar wunl van<lag gestem (Voting takeo; plaf'e 
tu-<1ay). 
Die skoal io; lanka] gebou (The t:.dwul \vas built 
lung ago). 
(vi) The verbs frum which some Past Part. are 
formed, have fall!'n out of use, e.g. bemiddeld (well-to­
tlo), welgesteld (wrll-off). In such cases the Part. is 
purely an adj ccti ve and will not Jisf'ard d :-
}ly nirnJ is welgesteld ( ~ly :friend is well-off). 
,J uu maut is ongesteld (Your matr is unwell). 
DiP riers lyk bebroeid (The eggs luok had.) 
(_vii) ln a few f'ase;; the Past Part. is ul.4et1 ad ver­
hially, with d :- -
liy is bepaald lelik (liP is as,uredly ugly). 
Sy is ongetwyfeld mooi (RhP is nndoubteuly preit~ ). 
(viii) Compare now tlw purtiriplPs in the spntPJWC'! 
bp]o'll· :-
J y het jon te veel ver­
moei. 
,J au het hom daaroor 
bekommer. 
Die publiok hct hom 
geeer. 
Ous het 'n go<'ie IPs 
geleer. 
Die perd het in die 
water geduiwel. 
Die kind het sy ouers 
beskaam. 
Die om·log het ons ver­
arm. 
Hy wPrk onvermoeid 
voort. 
Pid lPwP onbekommerd. 
DiP man lyk geeerd. 
Daardin h<>Pr is haie 
geleerd. 
DiP vpnt lvk my bedui· 
weld. · · 
\Yaarom is .i.t" so 
skaamd? 
Dir tmkkelaar hly 
armd. 
be-
ver-
(ix) THE PAST PARTICIPLE OF STRONG VERBS. 
\Ye havP seen that it is not nec·essury to speak of 
WPak and Rtrong vprhs in Afrikaans. In the raRe of a 
large numhPr of VPrhs, howPVPr, WE' haYc retained the 
)l'" Pdel'lrmds strong form in tlw Past PartiriplP whPn 
med attributively. Romdimr~ :1 'H'Uk form ha~ arisen 
a loll gsi de of the. strong fmm, in whiP h case the formrr 
has thP litrral, and the lllttrr the figurative meaning. 
'l'hP following list will give thP mnRt enmmon VPrhc: 
whiPh have a Rtrong past padiriplP :-
bly ~~ n'muins; die agtergeblewenes ~ · those who 
remain behind. 
kry --get; ons verkree regte the rightR we obtainPd. 
ly = suffer; gelede onreg , - RuffE>red wrong; die 
oorlede man · the dPad man. 
prys ~ prau;e; 'n veelgeprese boek -- a mnch-praiRed 
book. 
FOR EXGLISH STVDENTS 1:!1 
ry - ride; die berede poliesie = the mounted police. 
skryf - write; 'n onbeskr·ewe wet =an unwritten law. 
slyt = wear out; verslete klere =- worn-out clothes. 
stry - strugg·le; onbestrede mosie - unopposed motion. 
begin = begin; die begonne werk ~ the work that is 
begun. 
dwing = force; gedwonge onderwys -= compulsory 
education. 
krimp -= shrink; 'n bekrompe man = a nurrow-mimletl 
Illall. 
wen (wind) = wind: opgewonde mense = excitrd 
1•euple. 
wen -- win; herwonne vryheid ~ regained freedom. 
sing smg; die gesonge lied -- the hymn that wa~ 
sung. 
skend -~violate; geskonde eer ---= violntrd honour. 
trek = pull or dl'aw; betrokke lug =-= overcast sky. 
bedrieg = deueive; bedroe onskuld - deC'eived mnn-
cence. 
bied = - offer; verbode dade =-= forbidden deeds. 
kies eled; die gekose lede = the chosen members. 
sweer - - Hwear; geswore vriende - swo1·n friends. 
sluit ~- luck; met geslote deure - - with locked doors. 
genees - ' heal; genese wonde == healed wounds. 
gee - , give; my gegewe woord my pledged word. 
lees - read; die gelese ra.pport - ~ the report read. 
vergeet - = forget; langvergete dae = long-forg·otten 
days. 
bid -- pray; haar aangebede beeld = her worshipped 
idol. 
le -= lie; 'n vergelee land -- a distant country. 
sit= sit; die aangesetenes the guests (at a table). 
1 'N 11ASKEW l\ULLER'S AFJUKAANS GHAl\ll\JAR 
neem - take; genome besluite = - :.uluptcd motions. 
spreek = speak ; die gesproke woord - the spoken WLlrd. 
val = fall ; 'n gevalle. meisie ~- u fallen girl. 
hef - raise; 'n verhewe posiesie = - a dignified position. 
skep er0ate; Cod het die aarde geskape God 
created the earth. 
bederf -spoil; 'n bedorwe kind - - a spoilt t·hild. 
werp - throw; die verworpe voorstel the rejpc·ted 
proposal. 
graaf dig; uitgegrawe goud - gold dug out. 
vang =· catrh; ge·vange sol date -- c·aptured soldiers. 
span .stretch; met gespanne aandag ~= >\ ith fixL'd 
attention. 
beveel - - r·ommeiHl; die aanbevole kandidaat - ihe 
eundidate l"ecurumendrd. • 
doen ~- dn ; gedane sake = deeds done. 
In the followi11g sentences the Past Participle il'l 
u;;;rd both strong and weak : -
Ons staan voor 'n toegesluite deur (We stand 
before a larked door). 
Die oorsake van die rebellie is vir hom 'n geslote 
boe·k (The can>1es of the rehrllinn are a sealed hook to 
him). 
Sit die geslypte messe eenkant (Put the sharpruecl 
knives aside). 
Hendrik is 'n geslepe vent (Henry is a rute fellow). 
Pas op! daardie gebuigde tak breek maklik 
(Look out~ that bent branch will easily break). 
Met geboe hoof staan hy by die graf (With hnw0d 
head he stands at the graveside). 
Pak die vasgebinde gerwe op 'n hoop (Pile the 
bound sheave<; in a heap). 
1<'01{ EXULISH S'l'CDBXTS 1:2:~ 
Winkelklerke lei in die reel 'n gebonde lewe 
I Shop-clPrks, as a rule, lead a c·haineu life). 
Ek hou van 'n volgeskinkte koppie koffie (I like a 
full C'UIJ llf collie). 
Die beskonke Hotnot is tronk-toe (Tbe drunken 
Hott entut has gone to prison). 
Die tan darts het my uitgetrekte tand gehou 1 The 
dentist kept my exhac·ted tooth). 
Wiskunde is 'n afgctrokke wetenskap (~1atht>matic·s 
is an a hstrad science). 
Ons eet gebreekte mielies in plaas van rys !.We eat 
crul-.hed mt>a1iPs in'lteucl of rice). 
Hierdie Engelsman praat 'n gebroke Afrikaans 
(This Englishman ~peak'> a brokPn Afriknans) . 
.Frum all these sentcn• l'S it is dear that tbe btluug 
form of the pariic·iple has the fig·urative, not the liteutl 
meauiug-. \Vhen both forms are found abo prcdiraiiYel.r 
u~wd, the strong form will baYc ndjPrtiYal force:-
Die dorp is deur die Duitsers ingeneem (The t.>wn 
ha'l hPen taken by iho Oermans). 
Die profess.or is ingenome met sy nuwe woning 
('l'he I>rofPssor is taken up with his new house). 
Die Boere het besluit om te veg ('l'ht> Bc>c·rs decirled 
tu fight). 
Ek is vas beslote om jou in die wiele te ry (I am 
determined to thwart you). 
Het jy die horlosie opgewen? (liaYe you w•mud the 
watch?) 
Die skare was baie opgewonde (The C'rowd wa:-. 
wry PXC'ited). 
1:.!4 ~USKEW :\HU.ER'S A FRIKAAXS GH.A:\L\lAR 
(x) THE PAST PARTICIPLE OF WEAK VERBS. 
I£ the Past Participles of verbs whieh ·were weak 
abo in X ederlands, are used attributively, they take 
-de or -te, e.g., die gevreesde moordenaar (.the feared 
murderer), die verligte eeu (the enlighteued cen1ury). 
Those which take -de end in b, d, I, m, n, r, f, g, s, (.if 
f, g, and s are prerPded hy a long vowel, a consonant, 
ie, or oe) or a vowel. 1'hose that tako -te end (in the 
stem), in p, t, k, f, g, and s (if f, g, and s are not 
]Jl'Pceded by a long vowel, a consonant, ie, or oe). 
There is a slight tendency in some parts of the 
euuntry to pronounce -te instead of ·de in Home cases, 
e.g. geploegte instead uf geploegde grond. But it is 
doubtful whether this tendency is general enough to he 
of significance just yet. 
(xi) If the s1em of thP verb ends in d or t, the 
d or t is doubled when an extra Hyllable is added in the 
shape of ·6, unless the d or t is preceded by a long 
vowel, ie, oe, or a eonsorllln1 :-
verlaat - verlate huise (deserted houses) 
beklad- 'n bekladde dokument (a soiled documPnt) 
opvoed - 'n opgevoede man (an educated man). 
(xii) ""WhPn the participle is used Jlrediuatively, it 
will of course Pnd in d ur t according as the stem ends 
in d or t:-
antwoonl - wat het h.r geantwoord ~ (What did 
he reply?) 
]Jraat - hoc lank het hy gepraat? (llow long did 
he speak?) 
CHAPTER XV. 
TIIE VERB (continued). 
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 11 PRYS" (VERVOEGING 
VAN DIE WERKWOORD 11 PRYS "). 
""\V e have seen he-fore that the furm n-£ the verb is 
the -;am<' for all numbers and persons of the ,.,arne 'l'ense, 
so ihat it will not he neceHt.ary to give all the persons 
and numbers in eaeh ease. 
I. ACTlVB VOICE. 
1. Indicative:-
') 
Pres. Inde-£.: ek prys. 
I>er-fed: ek het geprys. 
Past JndeL: ek het geprys. 
Past Perf.: ek het geprys, (ek bad geprys). 
~'ut. ]nde£.: ek sal prys . 
.Fut. Perf.: ek ,al geprys hel. 
Fut. Past: ek sou prys. 
"Fut. Past Pe1f.: ck sou g-eprys het. 
Subjunctive:-
Pres. lndd.: ek sou, mag prys. 
Per£Pct: ek sou, mag geprys Let. 
Past Intle£.: ek sou, mag gcprys het. 
3. Imperative :-
2nd: prys, jy moet prys. 
3rd: laat hom prys, by moet prylj. 
K 
126 MASKEW l\1TT,LER'S AFRIKAANS GRAl\Il\IAR 
4. Infinitive:--
Present: prys, te prys, om te prys. 
Perfect: (om) te geprys het. 
5. Participles:­
Presont: prysende. 
Perfect: geprys. 
II. PASSIVE VOIUK 
1. Indicative:-
Pres. Inde£.: ek word geprys. 
Perfect: ek is geprys (geword). 
Past Inde£.: ek is geprys (ek werd geprys). 
Past Per£. : ek was geprys. 
Fut. Inde£. : ek sal geprys word. 
Fut. Per£.: ek sal geprys geword het. 
Fut. Past: ek sou geprys word. 
Fut. Past Per£.: ek sou geprys geword het. 
2. Subjunctive:-
Pres. Inde£.: ek sou, mag geprys wonl. 
Perfect: ek sou, mag geprys geword het. 
Past Indef.: ek sou, mag geprys geword het. 
3. lmperative:-
2nd: word geprys, jy moet geprys word. 
0rd: laat hom prys, hy moet geprys word. 
4. Infinitive:-
Present: (om) geprys te word. 
Past: (om) geprys te geword het. 
5. Participle:­
Pe.rfect: geprys. 
FOR EXGLlSH HTODRNTS 
CONdUGATION OF AUXILIARIES (HULPWERKWOORDE). 
He -to have. 
He, meaning to pnssrsR, is used as an independent 
Yerb :-Hy het die masels (Tie has the measles); wat 
wil jy van my he? (what do you want from me?); ek 
het die laaste woord gehad (I had the last word), etc. 
It is also used as an auxiliary to form the Past 
Tense :-Wie het my pen geneem? (Who took or has 
taken my pen?) 
Present. 
Sing. Plur. 
1. Ek het Ons het 
') jy het julle het .... 
3. hy het hulle het 
Past. 
Sing. Plur. 
1. Ek het gehad Ons het gehad 
2. jy het gehad julle het gehad 
3. hy het gehad hulle het gehad 
Future. 
Sing, Plur. 
1. Ek sal he Ons sal he 
') jy sal he julle sal he ..-. 
3. hy sal he hulle sal he 
Fut. Perf. 
Sin,g. 1. Ek sal gehad het. 
Pres. Subj.: ek sou he. 
Past Subj.: ek sou gehad het. 
Pres. Infin.: he, te M, om te he. 
Per£. Jnfin.: te, om te gehad het. 
128 MASKEW l\llLLEH'S AFRIKAAXS GRA:\Il\IAH, 
Pres. Part.: hebhendP. 
Past .Part. : gehJ.d. 
Imperative: het. 
Het is seldom used iu the imperative in AfriknnHs, 
neem, to takP, being sulmlituh•d for it. The Englii'ih 
have is not always translated by he, as the following 
sentences will show:-
llave my share of it --- neem my deel daarvan. 
Have Jlatieuce with me = wees geduldig met my. 
ITave your uwn way - gaan jou eie gang. 
Have the courage of your convictions 
vir jou oortuiging. 
kom uit 
·will yon han time to-day? - sal jy vandag tyd 
hei' 
·will yon have- fish for hreakfast? =-= sal jy vis vir 
ontbyt neem? 
You can have the lot jy kan die hele boel kry. 
Wees -to be. 
This verb, which is uRed aR a copulative as well a.'l 
an auxiliary, is somewhat irreg-nlar. In· Dutch wezen 
and zijn have the same meaning, and me the InfinitivPs 
o£ the verh to be. lu AfrikaanR zijn has disappeared, 
Pxcept in the ease of the Present Pal'ticiple, which i"l 
very ran•ly used, wees bPing the only form o£ the 
InfinitivP. 
Prese11t: ek is. 
Past: ek is gewees, het gewees, or wa~. 
Future: ek sal wees. 
Fut. Perf.: ek sal gewees het. 
Past Perf.: ek was gewees. 
Subjunctive: ek sou wees. 
Imperative: Wet'S, jy moet WPes. 
FOH, EXGLISII S'l'UDEXT~ 
Pres. Infin.: wees, te, om te wees. 
Per£. lnfi11.: te (om te) gewees het. 
Pre~. Pad.: ~vnde. 
Past Part. : g~wees. 
129 
XotP thllt there are three forms of the Past Tense, 
lmt was is the commonest of the three:-
Ek was gister ook by daardie plegtigheid (I also 
attended or was present at yeste1day's ceremony). 
Hoe lank is dit dat ons daar gewe~es het or was 
( liow lung ag-o is it that We W!'Te there r) 
Celliers is een van d'ie eerste Afrikaa.nse digters 
gewees (Celliers was ur has been one of the first Afri ­
kaans poets). 
Was gewees is someti111es wrongly uHod for was iu 
the. Past 'reuse. In the sPntence :-Twee jaar gelede 
was ek daar gewees, gewecs is out of place altogether. 
It i.s only u.-;e<l for the Past Perfect, and even then not 
always. Toe ek om 10-uur daar kom, was hy reeds daar 
is to br hanslatcd l•v :-"·when I camr there at ]() 
!o'rlork, ho was ther~ already." But if the English 
had: he had been there already, the Af1ikaans would 
hn.vP: was hy reeds daar gewees. 
From an ol!l Pa'lt Participle gewezen in addition in 
geweest iu J)ui<·h we still have gewese' used attributive!.\ 
aR an lldjective, with the meaning of that which has 
been. lu English it iR translllted hy late or by mean<; 
1of the prefix ex·, r.g. Die gewese burge:meester het 
baie goed gedoen (The rx-~layur tlid a lot of good). 
Word - tn loPrnme. 
(Thr use of word is discussed undrr Voice.) 
1'1eR. lndic.: ek word. 
Fnt. Indie.: Pk sal word. 
Past ludir.: ek lwt geword, i:-; geword. 
Fat. l'Ptf. : f' k sal g-ewonl heL 
130 l\IASKEW .MILI.ER'S A FRIJCL\NR GRA:\1:\-fAR 
Subjunctive: ek sou, mag word. 
Imperative: word, jy moet word. 
Pres. Tnfin.: word, (om) te worcl. 
Perf. lnfin. : te geword bet. 
Pres. Part.: wordende. 
Past Part.: geword. 
Word, to become, implies a change, and is there-
:fc>re often usrd with is in the Past. (See Tense.) 
dy het 'n groot man geword or jy is 'n groot man 
geword (You have berome a great man). 
Sal, wil, kan, moet, mag, durf. 
He, wees and word are always used with the Past 
Participle, and sal, wil, kan, moet, mag, and durf 
always with the Infinitive. These auxiliaries have a 
.Past 'l'ense :-sou, wou, kon, moes, mog (rare), but no 
Past Participle. Durf, to dare, has no Past Tensr, 
but a l1ast Participle gedurf :-Hy wou dit doen, dog 
hy het nie gedurf nie (He wished to do it, hut did nut 
dare to do it). 
Wil is not u~eJ to express future time, as in the 
ease of "will" in English. Tt always meana: to wish, 
to desire, to be willing :-Ek wil jou nie seer maak nie 
(I don't wish to hurt you). 'l'o express futurity sal is 
used for both " sh a 11 " aud " will." 
EXERCISE 56.-Tran'llate into Afrikaans:-
I have a friend. I hu ve had a friend. l bud a 
friend. I had had a friend. l shall have a friellll. 
I shall have had a friend. You are my friend. You 
have been mv friend. You were my friend. You had 
been my fri~nd. You will be my friend. You will 
have heen my friend. Lrt us l,e friends. Be my 
friend. Let him have a hook. Let me have a hut. 
!<'OR ENGLISH STUDENTS 131 
Let us have books. You had been in Cape Town. They 
will have the pleasure. She had had a messag-e from 
her nnrle. Tie quiet, children. 
EXERCISE 57.-'l'ranslate into Afrikaans:-
(1) I have a hook. (2) They had their hats on. 
( :-3 1 You will have the benefit o£ it. ( 4) We would have 
had the opportunity. (5) To have money is a good 
thing. (G) I am g-lad to have had the experience. 
(7) John is a good pupil. (8) Always be at your post. 
(9) l would have been there, if it had been possible. 
(10) Were you present this morning? (11) My father 
haH g·one to tho village. (12) 1£ my brother had been 
there, they would have acteu differently. (13) To 
have been absent would not have helped me much. 
(14) You must be a brave man in the struggle. (15) This 
hr-ing the case, I must bid g-ood-bye to you. 
EXERCISE 58.-Put the verb (a) in the Future, 
(h) in the Past, (c) in the Future· Perfect. 
(1) Daar is dertig dae in September. (2) Jan 
hring my elkc dag 'n hcsoek. (:~) Hoe laat wek jy die 
mPid om koffie te maak? (4) Die stout seun verlaat sy 
ouers se huis. (5) Bk sien uit na die somervakansie. 
(G) Hy clink aan sy jong dae. (7) ·wat skeel jou, ou 
vriPnd? (8) Daar staan 'n poliesman op die hoek van 
die Htrnat. (9) Ek maak kennis met die vreemdeling. 
(HI) Die norse man draai ::<y rug up ons. 
Afr; k...ld-11!> 
EXERCISE 59.-'l'ram;late into Bttgl±sh, paying 
special attention to the Infinitives:-
!,1) I shall a'lk him to do this for me. (2) My 
father sent me to call the doctor. (3) 'l'he teacher 
teaC'hes me to write. ( 4) I dare not leave him alone. 
(5) \Yalking is lJleasant. (G) To tell lies means to 
132 ~lARKI£\V :\liLLER'S AFRTKAAXR GRAM:IfAR 
dt>eeivP. (7) IIe iR too lazy to work. (H) Is thiA fon!l 
good lO eat r (9) 1t is enough to pay for hath of U:-,. 
(10) Allow me to can',\' your hooks. (11) Have you 
hPard him f;pen k :wt? (12) You 'lhould have gi V<'l1 him 
the parr<' I. (13) By working hard he will :mcceed. 
(14) To haw rnn away would have lwen lH'tter. (15) Yon 
muAt st.op Ringing now. (Hi) liP iA gone to work in 
tho garden. (17) AftPr having Raid that, hr left. (18) 1 
Raw the bird Hitting on the hranrh. (19) Tie has com<' 
to vi;;it me. (20) \Ve Ahall llOW pnrt nrvrr to IDf'Pi 
flg':1lll. 
EXERCISE 60.-\Vrite tlw following HPllll'n(•p.;; witl1 
the- verh in the PasRive Voief':-
(1) DiP li!Ull slaan die hond. (2) Die JWrd het die 
kar g-rtrrk. (3) Die kat cet dif' muis. (4) Oor twe<' 
jnar Aal on;; 'o hniA hou. (5) Om Aal die werk teen 
aaustaandr DinAdag- gedoen hct. ((j) \Vi0 hd ~uid­
Afrika ontdt>k? (7) Die magi;;traat mag diP <liP£ nie 
vryAprcek nie-. (8) ~fy vricnd f;OU diP RtO('l gekoOJI lwt, 
a A dif' winh,lier minder daarvoor gevl'::t hrt. (!I) Ek 
lwsoek die teater dikwelA, maar Pk h0t hom nog uooit 
daar geAien nic. (10) Ek het hom g-i;;iPl' grnnoi, ma~u 
toe hf't hy al 'n ander uitnodiging aangeneern. 
EXERCISE 61.-He-write the foll11Wing 'WHtPllf't'"· 
changing the Verhs from tlw Pa:-;:-;ive to thp .\divp :-
( 1) Die hrug :-;ou deur cliP ingf'ni<:'ur gehnu g<'Wf'eK 
hPl, ns ek f'Pnlrr Yan die man gPhonr lwt. (2) l>i1 
wonl ges(• dat die myn gesluit sal word. (:~) DiP haa . .; 
is deur die jagtcr neNge,;kiet, nadat hy clenr die hnncl 
opgrjaag waR. (4) Deur wifl is hierdie woorcle in my 
hoek g-eslu:vfP (5) Al die horne is drur diP tnimnnn 
Yrrplant, sander dat hnm claarvan iets deur my vadPr 
ge:-;e was. (6) Dour sulke lmlp sal di£' vrou nie YPl'l 
gPhant word nie. (7) Daar is in die baste t,nl YPPl 
l!'OR ENGUSH STUDBN'IS 133 
geld L.v ons gekollekteer. (8) Die man kan me van 
die waarheid oortuig word nie. (!)) Deur wie is die 
boekdrukkuns uitgevind? (HI) Dio diewe sal kan 
gevang wonl, aH daar meer moeite Jenr Jie poliesie 
g't'nnen word. 
EXERCISE 62.-Fill in the correct form o£ the 
Past Part. in plaee o£ the Infinitive:-
(1) Va was rrg (teleurstel). (2) Uns is (beskerm) 
teen die kou. (a) J<~k eet graag (bmai) vlt>is. (4) Die 
huis is verlede jaar (bou). (5) Die mense is (venlePl) 
in hul npiPnirs. (6) Dit lyk of my YTiend (verander) 
het. (7) ls 8,Y (verander) van dat sy daar was~ (8) Die 
pakkie is vir jnu (benoel). (9) Die kind is (beRtem) on1 
'n grout man te word. (1 0) Die wa Rtaan klaar (laai). 
(11) Daardie vrae het my heeltemal (vrrwar). (12) Ek 
sit (on + stoor) in my kamer. (13) ..My vader is 'n (ont­
wikkel) man. (14) Die hond iR (leer) om to jug. 
(15) Vir watter dug is die vergadPring (bepuul) r (lG) l•;k 
voel my buie (ePr) uor die Raak. (17) Drie man is deul' 
die poliesie (dagvaar). (18) Dit is 1Pkker (inl&) vis. 
(HJ) (Afsomler) van sy medemense, leef hy ruRtig en 
stil. (20) Die skelm iR uit die trunk (unbnap). 
(21) (Vra) of (on + vra), ek guan <laarheen. (22) Dte 
grond is (ploeg) en (eg). (23) IIy hPt (verhaus) na 
my Rtaan en kyk. (24) Die ruimte is te (brpPrk\. 
(25) Tiru pond iR die (vra) som. 
EXERCISE 63.-Fill in the Past Purtic·iple in~tead ()f 
the Infinitive giwn in brnckds: -
(1) Jy Pet met (on + wus) handP. 12) lfpt .i.v 'n 
(t>kry£) kontrak? (3) In (vervlieg) duP bet ek hom 
geken. (4) Die (graa£) gaat is rliep ~·entwg. (5) IIulle 
is (inneem) met die idee. (G) IIy verkuup (stPel) gnPd. 
(7) Dio suak is (afspreek). (8) Ek reken op sy (gee) 
woord. (9) Dit is 'n (verlaat) huis. (10) Piet iR 'n 
134 MASKEW :\ULLEH.'S AI<'IUKAAXS GRA:\1:\IAR 
(bedrieg) man. (11) Ons het vandag (betrek) lug. 
(12) Vir my is dit 'n (sluit) boek. ( 13) J ou moeite is 
(verloor). (14) I.1ees die (insend) stukke. (15) Ily is 
'n (slyp) vent. (16) Hy is 'n (bedry£) werksman. 
(17) Die twee sake is nou (verbind). (18) Ek sal jou 
dit (wen) gee. (19) Ek was toe 'n (opskiet) seun. 
(20) Hy is van die duiwel (besit). 
EXERCISE 64. 
(a) (J se the word skryf in four sentences to show that 
the Past Perfect can be expressed in four 
dilforent ways. 
(L) :Make sentences to show whether there is any differ­
ence in meaning between the following forms 
of the Future 'l'ensc :-
(i) Ek skry£ vanaand louis-toe, 
(ii) Ek sal vanaand huis-toe skryf, 
(iii) Ek gaan vanaand huis-toe skryf. 
(c) What is the difference in meaning between:-
(i) Die onderwyser sou graag die sin verander wil 
he, and 
(ii) Die onderwyser Hon graag die sin wil verander 
het. 
(d) Distinguish between the following two sentence,.,: ­
(i) My vader woon hier nou twintig jaar, 
(ii) }1y vader het hier twintig jaur g;ewoon. 
CHAPTElt XVI. 
THB VERB (continued). 
I. THE COMPOUND VERBS. 
(1) Verbs may be compounded with nouns, adjee­
tives, or adverbs :-gelul<wens (congTatulate), misdoen 
(do wrong), onderneem (undertake). Tho verb alwa~s 
forms the second part of the compound word. When 
once a noun, adjective, or adverb loses its original an<l 
literal meaning in the compound to form, with the verb, 
a new word, having a meaning different from that con­
tained in the two parts separately, the verb is said to be 
inseparably eomponnded. Such a verb will always havP 
the accent on the second part, i.e. on the verb, e.g. 
onder (under) + wys (show) = onderwys (to teach): 
aan + vaar - aanvaar (to begin). If, on the other 
hand, the first part of the compound retains its original 
meaning and bean! the accent, the verb is said to be 
separably compounrled, e.g. voor + stel = voorstel 
(move or propose); weg + neem ~ wegneem (take 
away). 
(2) Tho parts of inseparably compounded verbs are 
nPver separated, and they do not take ge• to :form their 
Past Participle :-Die onderwyser onderwys die leerling 
(The tearher tcarhes the pupil); die onderwyseres het 
die kleintjies deeglik onderwys (the lady-teacher taught 
the little ones ihoronghl.r); dis nie almal wat kinders 
van omtrent veertien jaar kan onderwys "'ie (it is not 
everybody that can teach L'hilrlren o£ about 14 years of 
ap-e). 
~Yote.- -onderwys (inst1 uction), when used as a 
noun, has the accent on th0 first syllable. 
136 l\1ASKEW ~!ILLER'S A FRIKAAN::l GRA~ll\IAH 
(3) 'The partA of separably C'ompouwleJ verbs, how­
ever, though not Aepara.ted in the infinitive without te, 
are separated in otlwr cases. All separahl:v compounded 
verbs are <·onjugated like gelukwens, g-iven here:-
etr. 
Prel'. 1ndir.: f'k "·ens geluk, etr. 
Fut. Tndic.: ek sal gelukwC'nH, etr. 
Past Indic.: ek het gelukwC'ns, ct.· . 
. l:!'ui. Perf.: ek l'al gelukgewenR, etr. 
Subjunetive: ek sou gelukwens, gelnkgewC'ns hrt, 
Pres. Tnfin.: gelukwen..,, !reluk tf' Wf'll'l, (Jill geluk 
te wens. 
Perf. l11fin.: geluk lf' :.n·wen-; lwi, om geluk te 
ge-wens hd. 
Imrwratin•: wr>ns geluk, etc. 
Prf'A. Part.: gelukwensend<'. 
Past Part.: gelukgf'"·rn". 
(4) From the above it is clear that it is only in the 
Present Infinitive without (om) te nnd tl1e PreHent 
Participle that gelukwens does not have it'l two parts 
separateJ. In the SuborJinate clause, howevf'r, ihP 
parts are not separated in th<' ra'le of ihe Present 
Tense :-Hy se dat hy my met die aanstelling geluk­
wens (IT<' ~ays that he congratulates me on the appoint­
ment). H the co1mertive dat i'l }pft nut, Wf' 'lhall haw: 
Hy se hy wens my geluk met die aanstellin.g. 'l'hP. 
form of the verb which i., used in tht' Prf'srut anJ tht• 
Future aft<'r thf' auxiliaries sal, kan, wit, moet, mag, 
durf is the Present Infinitive. Henee-Ek sal (ka11, 
wil, moet, ma:;r, dm£) gelukwens. 
FOR EXGLISH STUDENTS 137 
(5) Some Inseparable Verbs. 
agterY6lg (pursue) 
aan vuar (begin) 
agterhaal (overtake) 
miRhnlik (abuse) 
misdoen (err) 
miHh:iag (disvleasc) 
mi.'lhtmrlcl (ill-treat) 
miskt~n (misjudge) 
mi:-Mi (lPad aHtray) 
mi•lluk (fail) 
weerle (diHprove) 
voldoen (satisfy) 
voltooi (finish) 
omring (surround) 
ondermyn (undermine) 
underneem (undertake) 
uuderHkep (intercept) 
onders6ek ( examinP) 
on derstt\un (help) 
ouderteken (sign) 
onderwerp (submit) 
onrdink (think over) 
oortn!P (trespass) 
oortref (excel) 
volbring (accomplish) 
volhurd (persevere) 
In each case the accent is given, and is seen to bt) 
on the second part. \Vhen used as nouns, onde,rsoek 
( iuvestig-ation) anJ Onderwerp (Hubject) have the accent 
on the firRt syllable. 
( u) Some Separable Verbs. 
a:inraai (recommend) 
blootRtaan (be exposed to) 
deurloop (go through) 
ho1ithak (cut wood) 
liefhe (love) 
meedeel (infmm) 
mo6ipraat (plead) 
naloop (walk after) 
6mkoop (bribe) 
o6rneem (take over) 
opraap (snatch up) 
uitnooi (invite) 
v6lgiet (fill) 
agternuloop (go after) 
brandstig (set on fire) 
gudeslaan (to watch) 
kw:iadpraat (speak evil) 
losmaak (unloosen) 
meeneem (take with) 
ml.iiap (imitate) 
6rngooi (throw over) 
6orhaal (persuade) 
6ppas (take care) 
t6estaan (grant) 
uftroep (exclaim) 
voorstel (propose) 
138 l.\lASKEW MILLER'S AFRTKAAXR GRAJ\IMAR 
(7) Some verbs are m~ed both sf'parahly and inse­
parably compounded, with a difference in meaning:-
deurloop: ek loop deur (I walk through). 
deurloop: ek het die stad deurloop (I traversed the 
city). 
deursteek: steek die gare <l!~Ur (put the thread 
through). 
deursteek: die soldatp het sy liggaam deurst<'ek (tho 
soldiE'rS pierced hiR hody, i.e. in various place,s). 
ondergaan: hoe laat gaan die son onder? CWhat time 
does the sun set?) , 
ondergaan : die smid het 'n opera si e ondergaa n ( ihe 
smith underwent an operation). 
6nderhou: hou sy kop onder (keep his head under). 
onderh6u: hy onderhou sy sieklike vader (he supports 
his sickly father). 
Oordryf: die Wolke het OOrgedryf (the cloud 'l ha Ye 
passed over). 
oordcyf: moeni£' 'n kleinigheid oordry£ nie (don't 
exaggerate a trifle). 
o6rweeg: weeg die vleis oor as dit kom (weigh the 
meat over again when it comes). 
oorweeg: die raad het die saak goed oorweeg (the 
council considered the matter well). 
voorkom : vandag kom die beskuldige voor (to-day 
the accused will appear). 
voorkom: dit was onmoontlik om die ongeluk te voor­
kom (it was impossible to avoid the accident). 
v6orspel: die meester spel voor en die kinders spel 
hom agterna (the teacher first spells, and then 
the children spell after him). 
voorspel : die noordewind voorspel reen vir die skier­
eiland (the north wind predicts rain for the 
peninsula). 
FOR E:N"GLlSH STCDEN'l'S 139 
(8) The following verbs have the accent on the first 
part and yet do not have their parts separated. They 
also take ge- (which is prcfixed to the compound verb) 
for the Past Partiuiple:-
antwoord: wat het jy hom geantwoord? (what did 
you an:-.wer him!') 
dagvaar: die brandstigters is gedagvaar (the incen­
uiaries have been summoned). 
glimlag: die dame het net geglimlag (the lady only 
smiled). 
waarborg: die J ood waarborg die horlosie vir 20 jaar 
(the Jew guarantees the watch for 20 years). 
wan hoop: dis genoeg om iemand te laat wanhoop (it 
is enough to make one despair). 
Wantrou: ek wantrou nie my Yriende nie (l don't 
distrust my friends). 
seevier: die held hct oor sy moeilikheid geseevier 
(the hero triumphed over his troubles). 
set;praal: ons re.c::jiment het geseepraal (our regiment 
waR victoriouR). 
11. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
(1) A Reflexive Verb is one of which the Subject and 
Direct Object are one and the same person. There are 
two kinds of Reflexive Verbs :-(1) those which are 
always reflexive, and (2) those which are not always 
reflexive. They are conjugated as the following 
example, which may or may not be used reflexively:-
Ek was my (I wash myscl£). 
]. 
'J ... 
3. 
Sing. Plur. 
Ek was my 
jy was jou 
u was u 
hy was hom 
sy was haar 
]. 
') 
""· 
3. 
Ons was ons 
julio was julle 
u was u 
hulle was hulle 
140 ]IL\SKl<~W }I fLLl<m'S AFIUKAAXS GRA}l}IAR 
(2) In the :Jrcl Person Singular and Plural the word 
sig (zirh) is u~ed as the Reflexive Pronoun in Dutch. 
~ome writers of Afrikaans rdain sig, in the helief that 
tlw language will be too poor without it. The fact, 
huwevpr, remains, ihat it is not u;.;ed in spoken Afri-
.kaanR, and therefore !1eed not Le introduced into the 
literary language. As rrgards the ohjedion that hy 
was hom may mean :-(1) he washes himsrlf, and (2) he 
washes him (Homehody el..,r), it is enough to say that 
the llH'aning will always he ;.;uftiri0ntly clear from tho 
!'untpxf. in which th<' word OC'cur;.;. 
Ill. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
Impersonal Yerbs occur only in the 3rd Person 
Singular of any tense. They indicate an acf.ion which 
<·amtnt be ascribed to any 11articular person or thing, 
and alwayR tnkc dit (it) as their grammatical subject. 
8urh, for instance, are the artions of Nature: dit reen 
(it wiuR); dit dander (it thunders); dit sneeu (it 
Rnows). In addition to these a large number of verbs 
in Afrikaans are used imperRona lly, though they are not 
alwayR so used in English. The following are examples:-
Dit verwonder my om dit te hoor (I am surprised 
to hear this). 
Dit spyt ons dat jy nie kan kom nie C"~ e are sorry 
that you cannot come). 
Dit staan jou vry om daarheen te gaan (You are at 
liberty to go there). 
Dit kan my nie in die minste skeel nie (I do not 
in the least care). 
Dit be,taam jou nie om so te handel nie (You hav(} 
no right to act like that). 
CHAPTER XVII. 
8Y~TAX. 
TERMS USED IN ANALYSIS. 
Sentence 
Simple 
Complex 
Compountl 
Principal Sentence 
Co-ordinate Sentence 
Sub-ordinate Sentence 
Clause 
J'\ oun Clause 
~\.Jj ecti ve Clause 
Adverbial ClauRo 
Of Time 
0£ Place 
0£ ~huner 
Of Cause 
0£ Reason 
01 Purpose 
0£ Comparison 
0£ Concession 
Subject 
Enlargement 
Connective 
Predicate 
Object 
DireC't Objed 
lnil.irrd Obj!'rt 
Rxtensimt 
- Sin 
- Enkolvoudige 
Samegosl.elde 
- Samegesteldr, 
Veelvoudige 
- lloofsin 
N ewegeskikte Sin 
- Afhauklike Rin 
- Bysin 
- Sel£standige Bysin 
- Byvoeglike Bysin 
- Bywoordelike Bysin 
-Van Tyd 
- Vau Plaas 
- Van \Vyse 
- V au Oorsaak 
- Redegewende 
Doelaanwysende 
- Van V ergelyking 
- Toegewewle 
- Onderwerp 
- Uitbreiding, Bepaling 
- V erbinding 
- Gosegde 
- Voorwerp 
- Direkte Voorwerp 
lndirekl.e V oorwerp 
-- Bepaling 
14~ .\IAHKE\\' :\IILLI•~H'S .\l<'lUK.\AX~ GIL\.\UIAR 
THE SENTENCE. 
The onkr ot tlte "onls in a '4l'll1t'll<'<' iu AfrikaaiiH 
nftell dift'ers widely from that fnllnwPd in EIIgli-;h, and 
English-spt•akiJtg' P<'"l'l<' g'<'llt•r:tll,\ tind thio- their t.:hid 
<liffiruHy when they try tu "lteak tllP langtwge. ~<I 
ah-;olutP rul<'M <':tll ltP lai<l <lllWJt, for the -;inq,]p 1·easmt 
that Ute regular order is sometiutes chungPd for thP 
purpnsp of t'mphnsis, or 1H•t·aus<> lit<'l'Hl',\ St,\·le demands 
it for the ~ake of the urguJJir rhythm of the -;entpncP. 
Ntill, somP gPnPrnl 111lt's will ht' a gn·ai ltt>lp to thnst• 
to whom AfrikaanH i~ au ultogPthPr f111·Pign laug·1wgt'. 
I. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
The Nimple Seuteuee may tu ke the form of: -
(u) a Hbiemeut, 
(b) a question, 
( C:) a ('t llll lllll JH.l, 
(<l) a \\'i'lh. 
(a) Statements: -(i) \Vheu the PlP<liealt' con;,ist.., 
uf one verb oul,r, i.e. when it has no auxiliary of \'oiC'e, 
~Inod, or ~·ense, the or<ler is \'erv much the "ame as iu 
English :- · 
Die man loop in die straat (The man iM walking· m 
tlw -;treet) . 
. Y.B.--ln AfrikumtR then• i-; 1w Progre-;si,·e 'I'PIJM'; 
'' hP is talking" i~ simply hy praat. 
( ii) \\'hen tl1P l'rPdi<·a te <'OHsistH uf more than one 
part, i.P. of ihr 111ain Ye·rh with auxiliaries, the fin;t 
auxiliary is plarPd immPdiatPly afipr tltt' -;ubjed, anrl 
the re-;t of thP Pre<liente ~~t the Plld uf !lw MPlliP1l!'e: -
Hy het vir my 'n brief gebring (He ha" hrougltt 
mP a letter). 
Ek sal jou die geld binne ses maande betaal (l will 
pa~· y11u tht-> Ullll1P.Y wii hi11 six lllfJUthH). 
(iii) \Ylwn the HeJil.I'HCe begin-; with an atlvPrh, au 
u1ln•rLial IJLrase, or au uh.it'd, the onlrr is invertrd, 
aml the Pretlir·nte pret:ellPs the t:::uhject :-
Gister was ek in die dorp ( Y estenla.~ I was in tlw 
villng·e). 
In die winter is die nagte lank (In winter tlw 
uig-ht'l am long). 
Die man ken ek glad nie ('l'hit> man l Jo not know 
at am. 
t iv) \VhPn the l'n·dil·atP ha'l m1 exien'lion of time 
a Jl(l of pLI(·e, 1 hat of t i ll1 P f!'Pllet·u lly p1 Pcetle'l that of 
plal'e:-
Ek was vanmore op die mark (I was un i he markt->t 
thi-; JJlOl'ning). 
(h) Questions may be a-;keJ l1y means ot c1uesi ion­
wonlH or withtmL them. The interrogativP words used 
ill ~\frikmllls au~ g·ivpn nmh•l' thl' "PrulllJllli." UnleFos 
Uw I[UPSllUJt-\\'(1]'(1 i-, i1sel r the S1lhj!'f t, the Prenir·atP 
alway-; Jll'ec·t•tles the Subjel't :-
Waar gaan jy hcen? 1.\Yhete are .vou g-ui11p: :-') 
Gaan jy vanaand teater-toe? (Are you goi11g' to the 
thPllil'<' to-uigltt r) 
Wie staan daar? (IYho i" ~talllling there r) 
Sien hy my? ( Dot•s he :-ee ll1P r) 
Het jy jou plaas verkoop? (II <In· you -;oltl ~our 
farm r) 
Waarop sit die kind? (On what tlnf's the l'hiltl sit~) 
"Yutc: 1'\ometillles the qupstion ma,r take the form 
nf a siatPmeut, lml with a dift'pJ Pllf'P iu senll'JH'e nt·t·Pui :-
Jy het 'n plan om te gaan veg? ( Y 11u have an 
intPJdioll lfl g'll :wcJ fighi r) 
Ur it may be adde<l after thP ~taiPmPni:­
Maandag is vaka.nsie, nie waar nie? (Monday is a 
holiday' if' it uot r) 
(e) Commands are Pxpre~seu iu the ~a me way as i u 
Buglish :--
Bind die perd aan die paal vas 1 'l'iP thP honw in 
the pole). 
Jy moet voor more vertrek (You Hm'lt lt'aYP hPfore 
to-morrow). 
(d) Wishes may take the form of ~t atemt>nb, 
<1uestious, or commandR :-
Dit gaan jou goed! (l wish you PYPr,v ~u<·ces-;). 
Het my vriend liewer tuis gebly! ( TTad my frienJ 
rathN remained at home!) 
Leef gelukkig! (I wish you happiu!'s'l !) 
Mag dit Saterdag mooi weer wees! (:\lay the 
weather he fine 011 Saturday!) 
Het ek hom tog maar eerder gesien! (Would that 
I had seen him sooner!) 
II. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
llere "'e han' l wo dasFes of co-urdinatP <'ollJ1llH'­
tions: -
(1) those whil'h do nut infiuPJII'e the normal onlPI' 
of the words, such as: -en, maar, dog, want, sowel ... 
as, of, of ... of:-
My vader is Hollands en my moeder is Frans pry 
father is Dutch and my mother is FrPnch). 
Piet is arm, maar Jan is ryk (Peter is poor, hut 
.Tohn is riP h). 
Ek kan jou niks gee nie, want ek is self arm ( L <·an 
g-iYo yon nothing, for I am poor my'lPlf). 
I<'OH K~OLlSH i:i'l'UDJ<~NTS 145 
Sowel die dames as die here moet kom (The ladies 
as well as the gentlemen must eome). 
Jy mag gaan of jy mag bly (You may go or you 
may stay). 
Of hy slaap no g. of hy is reeds weg (IT e i~ eit hN 
still aslt,ep, or he has aln•acly ldt). 
Hy kom nooit hier of hy bring vir my blomme (TT e 
lJP\'l'l' <·onws hPrf' hut he ln ings me flowers). 
(2) Those which rettuirc the inverted order, as: ­
egter, tog, nietemin, nogtans, immers, dus, derhalwe, 
daarom, daarentee :-
H ulle is vriende, daarom is hulle bymekaar ( Thry 
mp friends, for that reason the,v nrc together). 
Die eksamen is naby, derhalwe moet ek werk (The 
examination is at hnml, ronserp1ently I must work). 
AI het hy my lief, tog sou hy my dit nie, toelaat nie 
(Even ihough he lovrH me, y<'t lw wnulJ not .allow me 
this). 
Die vader is 'n eerlike man; daarentee is die 
kinders almal oneerlik ( 'l'he father iH nn honrst man; 
thP. rlJil<lrrn, on the cmtlrary, are all diHhonest). 
Ill. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 
li) In a Complex ReuteJtt•e 1hP nrder of lhe wonls 
in the Prinripal ClauHP iH innrieJ, if the Ruhordinate 
('lnno,!' prPC'P<lel'l thr Priueip<~l Clause:-
As ek aan die strand is, baai ek gewoonlik twee­
maal op 'n dag (WhPn l am at ihf' :-;raHidP, 1 n:-;uall.v 
haihe iwiep a Jay). 
Toe hy my sien, het hy my dadelik geken (When 
he ~aw mP, hP knPW me at nnce). 
J ltl 1\lANKE\\' ::\rTLLER'i' A I<'HTKA.\~:-, flH.Uf.\1.\ R 
(ii) Tltis, lwWP\l'l', tlol'H uot happeH wlwn iht• :-;ub­
ttrdinat£> Clausn is tllJC of illllPfinit£> com·p;;siou :-
Hoe groot hy ook mag praat, hy is 'n lafaard 
(HowPvPr mud1 he may hm.JHt, llf' is a cowan!). 
Wie jy ook meebring, julie is welkom (Wlwmstl­
PvPr :-·ou may lu·ing- alo11g, ~-em are we1c·tll11P). 
(iii) 'l'hP PJ·in<'ipal t'!atl~P also lt:ts ihe in\'l'!'iPcl 
nrtlPr whl'll it rll'l'Ul's wiihi11 a quotatioH: 
" Kom," roep die Ceneraal, "laat ons die vyand 
aanval!" ('' Crmtl','' r•J'if'd thf' (iPnPral, "lPi u~ attack 
thP PTif'ltl;Y "). 
(i) Jn thl• 1-\uhtmlinait• ('lau:-.c the \crb, H'l a 1ulP, 
siand'l at ihP Pllrl of ihP spntPncP: 
Ek weet waar hy woon (I know wlwrc hP liYes). 
Dit is die man wat gister in die water geval het 
(This is the· mm1 \\ ho fl•H iuto ihP water .H•sterday). 
Hy speel tennis, omdat hy sy liggaam wil oefen 
(ITP plays tPnuis 1teetm'le he wi"hf'R to f':-..f'n•isc his horl.v). 
lv) lu thPsl' threP SPlllPllt l'S giYen abu\e Wl' have 
an pxample of thP Xouu Clause, thP AtljPdin Clnu·w. 
a Jill i he .'ulverh Clau!'(' J'(':;;]wdivcly. 
1. Till' X()un f'lau~P nw~- ltP:-
(a) ThP ohjPei of a tnu1sitivr vl'rh: -Ek weet wat 
hy wil he (I know what he wants). 
(h) 'l'he suh.i<-'d of a 'Prh: -Wat hy doen, is goed 
(What hl' rlof's, i,;; goorl). 
(c) The Pomph·mrHt t~f thP PrPclica1<' :- Die uitslag 
is wat ek verwag het ('l'hP rpsnlt i-; wkti. l Pxpeetpd1. 
(tl) The htdirPet Ohjec·t ,,£a \'Prh: Ek verkoop my 
boeke aan wie ek wil IT .~Pll my h()t)k., til whnm I likP). 
I'<)R EXC LIHH h'JTDT~~TS 1J7 
il') Tlw .\.ppo;;iliun or tlw ~uhjPd Ill' (}J,jpcf :-Die 
gerug dat hy dood is, is nie waar nie (The rumonr that 
hr is dead, is not tn1P) . 
• Yotc :-In the caRl' uf I ndit P!'i (~UPt-.iiom; the cuH­
lJrdiYP l•rtWPl'IL iho Priul'ipal ClullRe all!l the Soun 
<'lanHl' will lw "'ollH' inh'lTngatiYI' Wlll'll. Fllr ~iate­
meut"', Cmnmand-.; nn<l \Yi;;hes thl' C't111juudiun is dat: -
Hy se dat hy spyt het i.Jie .~ay;; that he io; sorry). \VhPn 
dat is ]pft (Jlll, ih<> order is 11nt inwl'tPll :-Hy se hy het 
spyt ( If e says lw is 'It liT~-). 
'2. TlH· .\.djPI'iiYe Claw;e iR iuhodueetl by the 
Re la ti Yr Pr11t\tlllll. aud g-enPl'all,\ R laucls a;; near to its 
antecedent as llOMHihle. In .\friktlnm wat iM u"ed for 
hot h persoll.'1 u utl i hingH :-
Ek ken die vrou wat daar sit (l know the woman 
whn is MiHing- thc>re). 
Gee my die peer wat jy gepluk het (Give me the 
ltPar whicl1 ynu pi<"krll). 
2•tutc: -\Yhe11 the Hdali\e ProllllUll is guH'l'!Wd by 
a Preposition ancl does not refPr to persons, it is always 
found iu 1 he f.orm of waar + the Preposii ion, sunwtimes 
written as onp wonl, soJnetimes separatetl by niher 
wunls. (fiee ah:o 1 he " Pronnun '') :-
E k hou van die manier waarop hy dit doen I 1 like 
t1tP Way in whit•h he Uoes it). 
Hier is die dam waarin ons gaan swem (Here is 
1 hP ponll in which we nrP g-oing to swim). 
3. Adverb ('lauHes a1e ot variou-; kintls, aud IUP 
iutrndueell by a variety uf ncherbial conjunctions, uf 
whieh the most eommon are: nadat, voordat, eerda.t, 
daar. omdat, aangesien, mits, tensy, opdat, sodat, toe. 
as. wanneer, terwyl, ofskoon., a.l. a.lhoewel, of, sedert. 
totdat, sodra, deurda.t, soos. asof, rte. 
14~ MARKE\V :\liLLER'S A FRTKAA~S GRA:\I.i\lAR 
1'he following al'e some examples of the different 
kinds of Adverh Clause. Nute thP conjunction ann the 
position of the verb in the Ruboroinate Clam~e :-
(i) l'LACE:-
Hy woon nog waar hy altyd gewoon het (HP IR 
Rtillli,·ing where he alwu,rs lived). 
Ek sal saamgaan tot waar die paaie uitdraai (I 
shall go along to where the roadR c;eparate). 
Vanwaar hy kom, daarheen gaan hy terug (Whence 
he comes, thither he goes buck). 
(ii) 1'DfE :-
As hy hier kom, is hy nooit haastig nie (When he 
comf's here, he is never in a hurry). 
Wanneer die wind waai, is dit onaangenaam hier 
(When the wind blows, it is unplrasant here). 
Laat my jou tand trek terwyl jy tyd het (Let me 
rxtract your tooth while you have time). 
Toe hy die konstabel sien, was hy baie bang (When 
hf' saw the constahle, he was very muc·h afraid). 
Ek wil met jou praat voor(dat) jy huis .. toe gaan (I 
wish to r:peak to you before you go home). 
Bly hier totdat die bui verby is (Stay here until 
the shower has passed). 
Ek sal besluit sodra hy aankom (l shall deridP as 
Roon as he arrives). 
Sedert hy hier kom woon het, is ons vriende (Since 
he eame to live here, we have heen fricmds). 
Ons sal speel nadat ons werk klaar is (W <' r:hall 
pla.v alter our work has heen finishPd). 
Nou(dat) ek hom beter ken, hou ek van hom (Now 
that I know him better, I like him). 
(iii) (;Al.TSE and REASON:-
Die man bedel omdat hy arm is (The mall begs 
because he is poor). 
FOR I~XG'LIHH STli])}j~N'l'H 149 
Daar hy nie tuis was nie, kon ek hom nie sien nie 
(As he was not ai. home, I eould not see him). 
Aangesien dit donker is, moet ons hier ve,r'nag 
(SPeing that it is dark, we must spend the night here). 
Deurdat die perd geskrik het, het die kar omgeval 
(Owing to tlw fad tllut 1he hor~P took fright, thP cart 
wa-; upsc>t). 
(iY) H.Et-\t'LT :--
Die fabriek is afgebrand, sodat die mense sonder 
werk is ('rhe fac·tory is 1mrnt clown, su that the people 
are without work). 
(Y) DEGlUlE :--
Vra my om hulp so dikwels as jy wil (Ask me fm 
hPlp as often as you like). 
Hy is so wreed dat hy mense sal ve,rmoor (HeiR so 
cruel tlwt he will mur<ler human heinw;;). 
(vi) PTTHPOSJ~: -
Die student werk hard, sodat (opdat) hy vir sy 
eksamen mag slaag (ThP Htudc>nt works hard in order 
that he may pass iu his Pxamination). 
(Yii) CUNDJTJ( )~ :-
As ons alles kon weet, sou ons ongelukkig we,es 
(lf we could knnw everything, we would be unhappy). 
Ek sal die reis onderneem, mits jy meegaan• (I 
shall undertake the journey, provided you go with me). 
Ons gaan vanmiddag wandel, tensy dit reen (We 
are going for a walk this afternoon, unless it rains). 
Word jy uitgevind, dan loop alles mis (Should you 
he found out, then PYerything will go wrong). 
(Yiii) CO~TE~SIO~ :-
Ofskoon hy my vriend is, kan ek hom nie vergewe 
nie (4\lihough he j., 111~ friPnd, I c·annot forgiYe him). 
l.ill :\IA~KI£W :\IlLLI£({'~ .\I•'IUld \X~ em,\ \1\IAH 
Hoewel die lewe duur is. koop die mense tog baie 
ormodige goed (.Allhough li ,·ing i.;; PXJteu,.;i ve, peo]tle 
~~ill huy many mmN·rssur.v thiltg'H). 
AI is die man siek, hy klaag nie c .\Jthough the 
mnn is ;;it·k, lte 1loes noi l'tll1l]Jlailt). 
Hoe graag ek ook al wil. ek kan nie (lTuwPver 
lll\ll'h I ,;]wuhl likP to, I l':tllll<J1) . 
• Yntt•: In a ( 'oltf'P"si n' Clan,, .. l)('gilllling with al 
thP IJltlPr of tlw \Ynrd~ i~ Jtnl inH'rtPd. 
(ixl jL\XNEH :-
Hy gedra hom asof hy die wereld regeer ( Il t' 
hehaves as if he rules the world). 
Die dief pleit soos 'n advokaat dit nie kan doen 
nie ('J'he thief pleads a~ an adYof'aiP cannot do it). 
(x) CO.\IP.UUN!lX:--
My broer is slimmer as my suster (.\I,\ 111 ot1wr l'l 
"martf'r than my si,;lel·). 
EXERCISE 65.-Trauo:latf' inlu .Urikaan~. nuliug 1 lu• 
po,.;ition of ihP Yerl, i11 tlw Nnhonlin:dt' ('lau~P :--
(1) The f'hild is happy, lto(':Hl'-<' it lw, a nlllthPr. 
(2) Une lta"l friewlH, if cllw is ri('h. (;~) I :1~kl'1l the gill 
why ;;hf' had su littlP wurk. ( 1) Tlw huv wouhl work 
iu the garden, if he lu11l a spaclP: · t_i'l) 1 lilt; rit·li, ht•c·aURl' 
I haYC' pan•nt,;. ((i) I should han• g'OJIP 1111l, if 1 had 
had a horsP. 17) Ill' woul<l he tire<l. if ltP hn1l lll'I'Jt 
at sehool. (H) I n~kl'a ilw man wlwrP he was going. 
!H) He ant'lwerrtlmP that hP wa,; goi11g ill (\qte Town. 
( lll) The ltatTPSi i;; ,n,all, a" tlw WPatlwr ha, lwPn lmd. 
(] 1) AHk thP buy whPlhl'l" lw hall a horKc> n•:-denlaY. 
(l:Z) She told me' i.hni ~hP wn;; wr~· i irf'd I~,L nigl{L 
n:~) I told mv hmlher thai. tlw ('11\V'l \\"l'te very thin. 
(l..J:) Ill• u~kl';l llll' if f lu11l hatl a llll''-SGg'l' frc~m lll,V 
nndt•. ( Jij) ..\Iy hrotltrr tnlcl ll!P that tlw [llltll' man 
cnuld tllli work, hPt·nusP ltP lt:ttl 110 tool~. 
CHA PTEH X YilT. 
R YX1'.\ X ( continunl). 
NEGATION. 
l. As thP StJ-L'Ulletl Douhh· .:\Pg-atin' is vny \\ itlPly 
nt!ed i11 .\frikauus, alltl i<.J 0111' o.t il1e Jno;;t <liilicuh 
thing·,; iu the laug·uug-e, ii "·ill he ltet·Pssary to treat (If 
it in a :-.Pparate chaptPr hPll'. .\frikaans i':l not the only 
laugnagP in whi1 h th<' I>oulJlP X e!-rativP oecms. H i~ 
four11l in (;rPPk u111l al;;o ia Flt'mi'lh. .\lihough it doPH 
not appPar in DntC'h to-day, it i:-; Vl'l,V reaRnnable io 
\Jp]jpyp that it lllURt haYP 0('('111'1 Pel in Hlllll(' SL'YPILtrPnllJ 
C't'll! ury Dui l'h tlialrl't to whieh .\ friku:w:-. owps its 
Ol'lg'lll. 
:.?. The l'hid wo1d~ fur tleli,Viug- arP :- nie (not), 
nooit u1· nimmer IHPYPrl, niks (nothing), niemand 
(1whotl~·), geen !Adj., no), and nerens, (nuwherPJ. 
:-L It will he ~nffi<·ieui to HlJeak of nie ...... nie, as 
tht' <'tmstrudion is the sam<' wltelii'YPT any of the other 
HPp;ai.iveR mentimlt'tl ahuve is ni'Pd. \Yhen nie stanfl;; 
ai. the Pnd of ihe sPnteJIC'<' a"l in: Ek ke'n hom nie (I 
<lo nut know him), there ean, of C'Dlll'Ro, he no talk of a 
DonhlP KL'g·tdivr. !Hut althoug-h tl1is is impos<.Jihle i11 
i he C'mH:> of nie in onlinar.v 11Pgatinu, we fiutl t hut nie, is 
'lomei.ime,. added eYeu wlwn onl• of the other neguiivPs 
slancls at the end of the seTdPnC'P, <>.g-. hy kom nooit nie 
(hP nrvPr <'nmes); hy weet niks n1ie (he kumvs 
nothing); ek beskuldig niemand nie (I hlanw Huhod.v); 
ek sien hom nerens nie (1 saw him nowhere). 
(-±) Tn the l'Xln·p-::-.iun: -So nimmer as te n,ooit \VP 
havP a ve1~ <'mphaiit· nPgalio11. "\Yl1e11 used in a sPn-
152 .\IAFlKEW :\llLLER'S "\FHIKAAX~ GIL\Je.L\R 
tenee wo really get thr·pe negutiw•.-; :- --Ek sal dit so 
nimmer as te nooit doen nie (I will never do it). 
NEGATION IN THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
(a) In the normal SPntenre which consiAtR of a 
1mhjert and a single Yerb, i.E'. without anxiliurieR, nie 
Ktands at the Pnrl :-
Ek weet nie (I (lo Jllli know). 
Jan slaap nie (.T ohn iR not ~leeping). 
(i) B;v enlarging the subjPet the JHlKition uf nie J-> 
not affectcrl :-
Die lui man werk nie (The lazy man doc'l not work). 
Die man wat my dit vertel het, lieg nie <The man 
who tolo me this, does not liE'). 
(ii) ~fodal adverbs, und even an object may bt' 
iutcrpoRed, provided it iR 1111t gnv<>rnPd by a Jnepo~l­
tion :-
Ons verstaan hom miskien nie (Perhaps wP do not 
understand him). 
Hulle begryp jou bedoeling glad nie ('l'hey do uot 
grasp your menuiug at all). 
(iii) Whell in !'imple se1Jt('l1('t:'S of thi~ type tht·re is 
a choice as to the position uf uie, it will he found that 
it standR at the end of tlw RenteiJCe \Yhen it i., .;;pet·ially 
Pmphasizcd: --
Ek doen die werk vandag Hewer nie (I would rather 
not do tho work to-day). 
(b) When the object iR preceded hy a preJJosition, 
WP always have the donhle negative:-
Ek praat nie van daardie dinge nie ( 1 do not s1wak 
of those things). 
I•'OH. 1£.'\GLISH S'ITDEXJ'S l03 
Wie beskou hom nie vir 'n groot staatsman nie? 
("rho dop.;; nut c•oJJHider him a great ;.;tatesman ?) 
lc) \Yheu the Prellieale l'ousisb of a t•ompuund 
\'erb, the rlouhlP negative is the rule:--
Die pasient wil die dokter nie he nie (The palieul 
does not want the doc·tor). 
'n Groot digter word nie gemaak nie (A great pod 
lH JJOt madP). 
(d) The positiou is :<Ollll'lime~ affel'tl'd h,Y iuverting­
j hP order o£ the words in the sentenPe :-
Ek besoek jou nie vandag nie ~I do 11ot vi:-;it you 
to-day). 
But Vandag besoek ek jou nie. 
(e) In queslim1s and exdumations nie 1s used lll 
the same way n" explained above:-
Waarom kom jy nie? (\Vhy tlon't you f'Ollle r) 
Waarom betaal jy nie jou skuld nie? (Why do you 
11ot pay ,vour deht :') 
Hoeveelmaal het ek hom nie hoor sing nie! (How 
often have I nut heard him ;.;ing ! ) 
(£) ln eollllliUnds expressed hy 1he help of moet 
moet nie is ron traded into moenie: 
Moenie hom weer glo n'ie IDo not l1eline him 
again). 
(g) H it i'> lhe Predieate which requires negation, 
the first nie will alwavs be found after the Predicate or 
some part of' it, th~ugh not neeessarily irnmedia tely 
after it:-
Uniondale is nie 'n groot dorp nie ( tTniuJH!ale is 
uoi a large town). 
But ll1e iir-:t nie mav :tl'lo stawl at tlw l,eginniug 
of tlw SPlih'll<'e ii the fi;st Wlll'U iu ilw sellil'lH'e is tu 
be Hegatived: · 
Nie baie mense het hiervan geweet nie t_Xot mnH~ 
JlPoph· krww a hout this). 
(h) "rhen two or more ~impl<' sentem·e~> are l'tlll­
lll'l'tr<l h,\· onp of ihr l'tJ-nrdiuat iug· L'OlljmJctiolll:', illl' 
"~'i'tlllll nie is Jllat·Nl at thP l'llrl of the sPlltPHI'l' whit·h 
requires nrg-ati.,,n: · 
Kos is nie skaars nie, maar duur ! Food i,; nut 
'l!·an•e, hut dem ). 
Die trein sal nie stop nie, want hy is reeds laat 
( ThP train will not stop, for it i:-; latr m; it iR). 
Die water is nie koud nie; dus kan jy gaan swem 
('l'hP watrr is nut col1l, tlwrrfnre you can go and swim). 
Sterk drank is sleg, nie aileen vir die liggaam nie, 
dog ook vir die verstand (Strong drink is hn<l, 11ot only 
for the hndy, hut ul-,o for tlw i11iellPd ). 
NEGATION IN THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 
Ia) If thr l'ri.nl·ipal ('buse I'!IJlleS fir,;t anti t'oJdaiw; 
ilw nPgaLi\·P, tl11• se1·owl nie stanch; at tlw Pnd of 1he 
Subordinate ('lanse (nr <'l:msPR), provitlrd tht> wholl' 
"ll'lllPl1l't' i-: loukt•d npo11 a,; ullP logi.t·al t!Joug-111 :-
Ek weet nie waar hy woon nie 1 l tlo Hilt lnww 
whPrP he live;::). 
Niemand kan se wat more sal gebeur nie CXohotly 
c·:w tPll whnt will h:q1peu t(l-morruw). 
My vriend is nie 'n man wat maklik vir 'n ander 
ingee nie (M,\ friewl i,; 110t a man who pasil,\ g"IVPS 1n 
l'l others). 
Waarom doen jy nie die werk soos die onderwyser 
jou geleer het nie? 1\Vh,\· rlo }on noi rln thr work as thP 
teacll!'l' tang-bt :v•m ?) 
1 h l If i!JP ~nb(lt diJt:tl<· l'lau-;e alstt r•oJttuins a lll'fW­
tiYt>, the nie is nut l'l'lJeaterl iu the Pri1wipal Clause, only 
iu thr ~uhordi nail' ( 'lan'"l<': 
Die son sal nie skyn as die mis nie opklaar nie ('l'lw 
sun will nut "hitw if thP mi!-'1. tloro, not clear llp). 
(f') H ihe Snl)(Jrtlinalp Clau>'e (lllh c·untainl' tltt> 
lteg-atiw, ur if it pn·e<'cles the Prim·i1;al Clause, thp 
Jtositiou ttf tltl' nc·gati1·e is cluntged aeeording·l.v:-
As ek die graad nie nou kry nie, sal ek later weer 
probeer (If 1 do u (It 1-!'et the degree ut tw, I shall tr,\ 
again bier 011 ). 
Die man wat nie wil werk nie, is lui (The· man 
wltct will 11ut work, iH lar.y). 
Hy se dat hy gister nie teenwoordig was nie t lit• 
;,:1~" lH• \YH" !Jilt plP'lt'Jlt ,YP'liPI'day). 
( tll In ilw ca'le of a loJJg 'leutelll·e, in whi('h thP 
fm·c'L' of the >'f't•ottcl nie is Jllti fp)t hr('aU'le uf its distnnee 
from lht> fir~ I, it >:lwnld ht> lPft tml. ,\lllwul!·h it is 
iulptt'l'-'ihle to indit·a te \Ylwn ihi'l ... huuld hP dulll', thr 
iolluwiug Pxautplt>~-> \\·ill illustnde the typ<• of Hentent'l' 
I'OlliL'llJll]:tiL•d: · 
t i) Die spreker kan hom nie verenig met die argu· 
me'"t dat, as Suid·Afrika ooit onafhanklik sal word, dit 
sal moet geskied na 'n bloedige oorlog, waarin sowel die 
gekleurde as die blanke rasse betrokke sal wees t 'l'he 
"ll<'akPr r·:wuttt :J'l'loeiate hillt">elf 1rith tlw argum<·ut 
I hat, if Scmih .\frit·n t:hall en•r hPL'OlllP iwlP]tentleJtt, it 
will lwYe itt lukP ltl:wP n flt>r a hlo(lcly war •. in whirh 
the (•olom'(•tl as wrll a ... thP Enropl'Hll Ulf'l'S will ]Jp l'Oll ­
t'l'lll!:'(l\. 
(ii) Want ons moet nie vergeet dat hoe meer ons 
taal sy eg Afrikaanse eienaardighede in sy buigingslee,r, 
wordvorming en sinsbou laat beinvloed deur die 
Engelse taal, hoe makliker dit vir die Engelse taal word 
om hom te verdring (Fur W<' muHi ~tot forg-Pt thai the 
1.56 l\1ASKE\\' ~IJLLF.H'S .\FJUKAAXI:l ORA.\ll\lAR 
more our language allow:-~ its typical Afrikaans charaf'­
teristics iu its aecirlPnce, word-!urmutiou and svntax to 
he influen<'erl by the l•~ngli~-.h language, the ~aRier it 
lw·Pomes for tlw English language to overwhPlm it). 
(e) When the logical <·nnnf'l'iiou ht>i Wl'Pn the Prin­
cipal Ulause and the SuhorJiJJate ('lmts<' iH not felt to 
he intimate, the second nie is sumetimcs placed at the 
end of the Princ·ipal C'lauHe, in:-;le::ul of at the end of the 
whole sentence. All tlw PmphaHi'l ihf'JI falls ou the 
Principal Clause: -
Ek sal jou nie help nie, tens.y jy my betaal (I will 
not help you, unless you pay me). 
Die dokter kan nie kom nie, hoewel hy dit graag 
sou wil doe·n (The <lodor camud <'Om<', although he 
would like to do so). 
Die regter sal hom nie laat omkoop nie, selfs a! sou 
jy hom ook £1,000 aanbied ('l'h<' judge will not let 
himself be bribed, even if yon shonld offer him £1,000). 
(I) Nie sometime,-; •1cem·s iu n sPntence which i'l 
really positive. It then nPgatives not ihc wrh, but 
some adjective or adverb, and pveu in a ~im11le sentence 
the second nie mav then staml in the middle of 1 he 
sentPnce, instead ,;f at the Pncl of it. ('ow>icler thP'le 
three examples:-
(i) Nie ver van die pad nie staan twee borne (Xot 
far from the road thNe are two tr<'Ps). 
(ii) Daar staa.n twee borne nie ver va.n die pad nie. 
(iii) Twee borne, nie ver van die pad nie, het ons 
teen die hitte beskut ('fwo irf't>S, not fur from thf' rnau, 
:-~helterecl us from the heat). 
In these sentences the positive Mtatement i-;: --Twee 
borne staan, and nie ver va.n die pad nie is a negatiYe 
adnrhia.l phrase, constituting· an Pntity rlistind from 
the 1 Psl nf the sentt>nr·e. Th0 fH'('OliO nie then K<'l'YeR, 
l.i/ 
as it \\ere, as ouP uf two ln-:H·kets, whid1 separate thP 
phrase from the rest of the sentence. In (ii) anu (iii) 
wo finu no rliffil'uHy in iuo.Prting il; in the one case i he 
phrasf' r·omcs Haturally al the entJ of the sentence, UllU 
in the oihf'l' it is Jefinit<•ly marked off hy the IJUll('IUa­
tion. ln (i), however, the second nie c:annot stand at 
ihe end of the senienre, as thE' Predicnte is not iududed 
in the negation. It mu:-;t, therefore, l1e pla(•f'd at the 
<'lHl of the phrase whirh onl,Y i'3 negativf'(l. 
Prom what Wl' have :-;een above il is elenr that the 
correet usP of the neg:liiYL' in ~\.hikaans 1equires cored 
thinking, as well as a filt<' ,;pnse of the orgnnic rh,vlhm 
of the sen triH'E'. 
EXERCISE 66,- Trauslate into .A:f'1ikaans, taking care 
to usc the negative <·orrectly :-
(1) I do not know him. (2) lie does not love me. 
(3) IIe is not a man who will be afraill. (.f) '!'here is 
the horse which you could uot catch (vang). (5) He 
<lid not say that he would llo the work. (6) Cnless 
you try yourself, you will recein' no help from me. 
(7) \Vh,J did you uot go to rhureh yesterday? (8) I 
think there is no more room left. (9) Parliament will 
sit not only to-Jay, but also to-morrow. (10) Sot long 
ago (gelede) I heard the news (nuns). (11) IIe wrotA 
me a letter, and I have not r<:>plieu to it yet. (1~) I 
~huH not giw• you the money, for you will only waste 
(verspil) it. (1;{) ITe Wlll lJOt gjyp in, though you 
argue (argunwntPer) till to-morrow. (14) I do not run 
because I am in a hmry. (15) Do not tell him what 
I told you. (1 G) 'l'hl' corn will not grow if it doe;; not 
rain. ( 17) If the f'hild 1euu~-o, let him stand or sit 
straight up, not lie down, and never let him read in dark 
eorners (douker lwek<•). (18) Xo one is allowed here. 
(19) ~ot one patient in this village l1iell uf thl' influenza. 
(griep). (20) 'Ve have ~earC'hed evpr~wllPn', hut w~ 
f;UU find him nowhere. 
]:)H :\L\SKEW ;\IJLLEH'S .\J<'IOK.\.\X~ GJL\;\1;\L\H 
OTHER REPETITIONS. 
A'l in the case of the neg-ative, there are also other 
examples of repetition in ),Jrikaans, as the following 
sentenrrs will show:-
(1) Wie het daar uit die huis uitgeloop'? (Who 
walked out of the house thl'l'e !') 
(2) Ek het jou al lankal gewaarsku (I warned you 
long ago). 
(a) Maandag gaan ons na Hermanus toe (Un 
Monday we are going to IIrrmanus). 
(4) Moenie te diep in die see inloop nie (l>ou't 
walk too far into ihe sea). 
(5) Van wanneer af kan jy kom? (From when cau 
you come?) 
.VotP aho s1H:l1 rPpetitious for the snke of PtnphasiH 
as:-
Kom gou-gou hier (Come here quiPkly). 
Die meisie doen haar werk sing-sing ('l'he girl sings 
w hilP she docs her work). 
Die lui kind loop staan-staan skool-toe (The lazy 
Phild walks lnr.ily to school nr dawdles on his wa;v to 
school). 
l 'liA l'TF.R XlX. 
\YUHD-Ft JlUU._'l'llrX. 
:X L'W wonls are formed:-
(a) hy IDl•ans of a challge in the vnwrl :-wuud of the 
roul-wonl, e.g-. bind \to bind) - band tnul bond (cull ­
nrctiuu); spreek (to speak) - gesprek (convetsai.ion), 
spreuk (proverb), spraak (language), sprokie (iale). 
(b) by uwuns of prefixes and suffixes, e.g. bind -
verbinding ( conurdiou), ontbind (uuhind). 
(c) hy 111ea11s ,,t eumpuumliug- t\\0 ~eparai.o wonlH 
i11to ono wurd, e.g. huis --1 deur - huisdeur' (door of a 
house), reis t genoot - reisgenoot (travelling com­
panion), handel + stand - handelstand (commercial 
t·lass). 
J~xamplc, of ''"uul;:; tlerivecl hom the same root: ­
wreek (to reY<'llgc), wraak (revenge), wrok (grudgP). 
breek (to breuk), breuk (rupture), brok (piece\. 
sluit (to lock), sloot (ditrl1), sleutel (kry). 
graaf (to dig), graaf (spade), groef (groove). 
buig (to bend), boog (bow), bog (C"urve). 
vlieg (to fl,Y), vlug (±lig·ht), vleuel (wing). 
gee (to give), gawe (gift), gif (g·ift). 
gryp (to clnt<·h), greep (grip), begrip (umlerstandiHg-). 
drink (to drink), drank (<l-ri11k), dronk (<lranght). 
ry (to ride), rit (riclr), ridder (knight). 
lieg (to lie), leuen (lie). 
<Yotc :--All the secontl and ihinl words in each line 
are noun~. 
WO l\fAHKJ;~W MILLER'S .\FHIT\AAI\8 GRA.:\f.:\fAR 
PREFIXES FOR VERBS. 
be -
(1) by :-behoort by (belong·s to), bereik (reach). 
(2) to form transitive from intransitive verbs :-'n 
tout begaan (mah• a mistake), 'n huis bewoon (live in 
a house). 
(3) to supply with:- 'n skip beman (man a ship), 
met moed besiel (inspire with courage). 
( 4) to bring in a eondition of: iemand teen iets 
beveilig (safeguard someone against something). 
(5) to extend the action contained in the verb over 
a larger area :-die grand beplant (plant the ground), 
die land besaai (sow thP land). 
ge -
(I) togetlter :-iemand na 'n plek gelei (take some­
body to a place). 
(2) originally had intensive foree: voel or gevoel 
(ferl), dink or gedink (think). 
er ~- out, but its force is no longer felt: -erken 
(admit), ervaar (experience), erlang (obtain). 
her = again :-herhaal (repeat), herenig (unite 
again), herleef (rPvive). 
ont = 
(1) against:-ontmoet (meet), ontvang (1eceive). 
(2) back :-antwoord (reply), onthou (remember). 
(3) begin to :-ontbyt (hr·pakfast), ontwaak (wake), 
ontgin (clear, fallow). 
( 4) to deprive of :-onthoof (hrhPad), ontbind 
(unbind). 
(5) out, away:- ontkom (eRcape), ontloop (esmpP). 
ver =-= 
(I) forth, away:-verban (banish), verplaas 
(transfer). 
Hil 
1 :!) :1 (•hange in the sense of destruction or dis­
appParance :-vergaan (perish), verbrand (burn com­
pletely). 
(;{) wrong- :-verreken lmisf·alculate), verlei (mi'-1-
lead). 
(4) over: verguld (guild), verglas (Pover with 
g-lass). 
(5) bring in a conditiou oF :-verlos (liberate), 
verbly (gladden), versteen: (petrify). 
((i) nnitc: verbroeder (fraternise), verloof 
( (~ngage). 
(7) a ehange :-verkleur (change in eo lour), verve I 
(r·hange thP skin). 
PREFIXES FOR NOUNS. 
aarts oldest or first in rank :-aartsvader (patri-
arch), aartsleuenaar (arch-liar). 
af -- negation or wrongness:- -afgrond (precipice), 
afgod (idol), afguns (jealousy). 
ant against :-antwoord (reply). 
ge 
(1) with :-gesin (family), genoot (Pompanion). 
(2) Polledion :-geboomte (trees), gera.amte skele­
ton). 
(;l) adiou or coutiuuons aetion :-geskreeu (noise), 
gesang (sung), geveg (battle). 
(4\ result of the :wtim1 :-gebou (building), gebak 
(cake). 
(5\ inshmneut :-geweer (gun), geskut (artillery). 
on nut m· barl :-ondank (ingratitude), ongeloof 
(unbelief), onmens (bad person). 
oor -' out :-oorsprong (origin), oorsaak (cause). 
wan not or had:- -wanorde ( rlisnrder), wan hoop 
I tl(•spair). 
lli:! .\IAI-iKEW .\IILLtm·:-; .\FIUK.\.\~1-i !iiLUL'IIAH 
PREFIXES FOR ADJECTIVES. 
on 11ot :-onwaar (nnirnc), ongewoon (nnu'l11nl 1. 
be - - ~->lllllllirll with :-beroemd (_famon'l), bevlek 
(~pot!rd). 
ge supplied with :-getand (with teeih ), gekleed 
(c·lothed), gewapend (armed). 
EXERCISE 67.-(ijyp thr fon·r ,,f thl' 1•rrfht>s i11 ilH' 
following wunlF: :-
ontmoedig (disrouragP), besmet lcPHi:uninatr), 
verU3 (lay rbc•whNr), ve,rleer (unlearn), verdelg 
(Jestro,v). ontvou (unfold), gespierd (mu'lcnlnr), gelag 
(langhtrr), genaak (appr:Jach), betlroef (grieve), bery 
(ride upon), hervorm (rrform ), ontstaan (orig-inate), 
aartsengel (nrrhang-el), afval (tleg-enPration). gebroeders 
(hrothPr'l), gebe,rgte (mouniaiJJs), getwis (quarrel), 
ontrou (faithless), oorlog (war), wanklank ( clisrorrlan t 
nntr), berug (notlll·inus), gesteweld (with hoot~). 
SUFFIXES. 
For Nouns. 
aar (er), aard (erd), ier, and, rik form )la:-.culine 
name~-> of persm1R nn<l nnimn ls. 
aar :-leuenaar (liar), oorwinnaar (cunquc,.t), Hoi· 
lander. 
aard: - grysaard (gw~ lll•tul), s I i m mer d ( c-lc·n~r 
fellow). 
ier (enier): --offisier (,,fiiL·er), tuinier (gardeiJer). 
and :-vya.nd ( enem:v). 
rik (erik. ik): stommerlik (a stupicl ). 
in, es, ster for forming Feminine' lllllllPR. 
in:-heldin (heroine), Jodin (·lewe~->R), koningin 
(quPen). 
~'OH EXGLI~H S'lTDJ£NT~ lli:3 
es :-onder w y sere s (lady-teueher), priesteres 
( pri estf'ss). 
ster :-huishoudster (matruu). 
ing fmmlol common names:-
sterfling (a mortal), liefling (darling). 
er, el, eel, sel 1urm uames of insh umf'nts :--
gieter ( wate1 ing-enn), sleutel (key), toneel (scene), 
deksel (lid). 
sel also to fuuu names sig-uifyiug the result of an 
aetiou: -
mengsel (mixtme), letsel (injmy). 
nis iudieatf'l'l a l'tJll!lition: -
duisternis (clarkuPs,;), droefenis (sadness). 
heid intliratPs a quality: -
skoonheid (beauty), goedheid 
ct'1llPdion: --mensheid (humanity), 
mf'nt). 
te (quality) :-
(guotllwss) ; ur a 
owerheid ( g-oYern-
grootte (largPnr,.,s), hoogte (height). 
dom:-
\ l) a ronclitinn or creeu :- heidendom (heathendom). 
(:2) tPrriiory :-bisdom (dio1·ese). 
( :3) t·ollediou:- mensdom (humanity). 
skap:-
(1) rondition or tlignity :-d'ronkenskap (druukPn­
neHs), priesterskap (priesthood). 
(:2) collt>dinu :-gereedskap (tools), geselskap (com­
pany). 
(3) territory: graafskap (county, earltlom ). 
~~ \ with vNlm :-wetenskap ('wiPme). 
164 :\JASKEW ~lJLLl!m'bi AlcJUKAA~ti GLU:\1:\IA R 
y (ery), (erny) :-
(1) action or condition :-slawern.y (slavery). 
(2) place of action :-bakkery (bakPry). 
(3) collection :-boekery (library). 
e, te form names of ideas:-
koue or kou (eold), lengte (length), diepte (dPpth). 
(For Suffixes forming Diminutives, scP page 55.) 
For Adjectives. 
agtig:-
(l) possessing :-vreesagtig (tiwnrnus), waaragtig 
(true). 
(2) corresponding to or inclined to :-bergagtig 
(mountainous), veergeetagtig (.forgetful). 
haftig frolll agtig - possessing the quali1 ~, of:-
heldhaftig (heroir), manhaftig (manl_v). 
baa.r :-
(1) earrying :-da.nkbaar (thankful). 
(2) able to bP done :-breekbaar (breakable). 
(3) ahlP to pPrform :-strydbaar (ahle to fight). 
ig:-
(1) having:-magtig (might~·), moedig (('onr-
ageous). 
(2) doing the action :--nalatig (negligent). 
(3) being :-enig (only), tweevoudig (twofold). 
erig = inclined to, resembling:-
slaperig (sleepy), praterig (talkative). 
lik:-
(1) resembliug :--meesterlik (master!~'), agterlik 
(huekward). 
FOR ENGLISH !-''LTDI!JNT~ 
(2) that eau he tlone: --veragtelik (despicable). 
(a) able to tlo:- hinderlik (troublesome), aansteek· 
lik (infedious). 
loos witlwni :-hulpeloos (helpless), roekeloos 
(reelde'i'-1). 
ies or s derived from, cmTespouding ttl:--
Prussies (Prus'lian), slaafs (slaviRh), aards (earthly). 
saam o i11rlincd to, fit for:-
gehoorsaam (nheclieut), buigsaam (pliable), deug­
saam (virtuous). 
ln the following adjeetivc~ the suffixes han' dif­
fprent meaning-s, and shonld he notetl: 
kinderlik r ehilrl-like), kinderagtig ( ehildish), kinds 
( dotin!J·). 
eerlik \ hoHest 1, eersaam (respednhlP), eerbaar 
(ehaste). 
eervol ~ltonoura ble), used only of things. 
verkieslik (preferable), verkiesbaar (eligihlP). 
onmeetlik (immense), onmeetbaar (irnnlf'a~mrable). 
draaglik (tolerable), draagbaar (portable), ver-
d raagsaam ( tolerun t). 
kostelik (excellent), kosbaar (expensiw). 
wetlik leg-al), wettig (lawful), wetties (holding 
'lhi<'tly to the leti.t'r uf the law). 
sedelik (mural), sedig (modest). 
sinloos (nrmsensieal), sinneloos (immue), sinlik 
(sensuous, sensunl). 
meesteragtig (domirwering), meesterlik (masterly). 
wonderlik (strange), wonderbaar (woutlrous), won­
derbaarlik (miraeulous). 
tydig (timely), tydelik (ielllptllltry). 
luG 11A~KE\\' :\1 ILLEI{'H .\FJUKA.\ ~S OI{A.:\DL\ L{ 
vyandig (ill-di>lposed), vyandelik (he longing to the 
Pllem,v). 
gees,tig (witiy\, geestelik (1-lpirituali. 
houte,rig (C'lumR~·), houtagtig (woody). 
buigbaar (that van he lwut), buigsaam (fiexihlP). 
EXERCISE 68.-Name aucl giYC' ilw fo1·ee of tl1e 
snffixeH iu ihe following- wonl:,;: 
behangsel (tapPstry), spreker (Rpeakf'r), bedelaar 
(Leg gar), luiaard ( ~luggard), warmte (warmth), rond­
heid (roumlnes~), heiligdom (~anduary), jongeling 
(youlh), kleurling (coloured 11er.;;on \, blydskap (joy), 
gedagtenis (mrmory), brouery (hrrwrry), spaarsaam 
(frugal), vrugbaar (fruitful), dankbaar ( th::m kfnl), 
vade,rlik ( faihf'rly), eindeloos 1 Pndlr,R), twyfelagtig 
idnuhtful), gemeensaam (familiar), hoofs (Pourily), 
Russies (Rnf'f'iall), hoepel (h!l!lp\. 
EXERCISE 69.-}lalw "enteHI'Pi4 to 'lhow tlw ll!Paumg 
1 'f eae h uf ilw'lP W<ml:-;:-
Leweeghaar - hPW<'eglik; PilHlPiik Piudig -
onPimlig - eindrluus; wrtlik- weitt'lons; lllPltsdom 
- meuKheid; lrprhaar - Ieen:mm; YPrdraaghaar -
nr<lraagsanm; gelykeni'l gdyklwid; kiud>lheid -
kindPrlikhPi<l; hoop·tp - - I11Hl~dwid; opPnlik - oprn­
haar. 
COMPOUND WORDS. 
In tlH' t•ase of compound worcls it musi he notrd 
that iu Afrikaans ihry arc geuerally writtPn aR ouc word, 
without an~' <'olJlll'<'ting hyphrn. )lany of these words 
a1 e written RcparatPly in Eng-lish. Thr hyphf'n is UKecl 
i11 .\frikaa11R only ill UtH·ommnll I'OllllH'si!ions, gengra­
]lhit·td JHlliW'l, 1)1' in I'ODI]ll>llllllK rlt•rivPd frnm fon•ign 
lli7 
la11gnage, e.g. Prokureur-Ceneraal (Attumey-Cieueral), 
Suid·Afrika (Ronih Afrirn), kruid'jie-roer-my-nrie (touch­
lllP-not - tlw HPU'liiive plant). 
SoJlll' WOJLl'l are couqHmmled Himply h.v writing 
them aH <llJP, a-; iu vuurherd (fin'-plaee), othen; have 
an S or an e iwwriPd beiw0en the two parts o£ the 
<'Olll]Hl11Tir1, aH a mark of lho geuii ive ease, or of the 
plurnl fnrm, ur by way of analogy, e.g. skeidsregter 
(arbitrator), vrugteboord (fruit oH:hard). 
ExampleH of compound wnrd;;: 
Adderle;vHlmat- AddPrh'.r StJPPL 
Kaapslnd ('npr Tow11. 
T:1fC'l1JUai - Tal1le Bay. 
Sindshui . .., - City Hall. 
StadHr<J:ul 
P:tl'll'mPHhlli<l lllPllllwr td' Padiuw<'nL 
H aad;;it t ing ,itling LJ± <'uulH'il. 
orkeHlf'ier - <'II!Hln!'im· 11£ the orclH"·dra. 
landlJtJuleultH>nRl l'lling agrir·ultural ;;;lww. 
pa<lint-.JleklPm - l'lHHl-inH]Wdm·. 
kopermyn -- coppN mi11l'. 
hmlo;;;irlu·tlillg' - watC'lt-clwill. 
StnatskuPrant - <loYPlllliiPJd ChuwliP. 
Rnid-.\frikn - StJUlh ~\f'ri<·a. 
Suitl-A frikaa lt:-t• 
toPbliugsek'>aam- Pnlnnt<'P Pxtuninatiou. 
lT 11i YersitPitRkullPp;P -- IT 1l i verHit :v CollegP 
opvttPdingsimigting- Pdut"atioual in:-.tiiutiou. 
GnPWf'rllll'lli ;;gphout> - (ioYPl'nmeul Building:-:. 
CHAPTER XX. 
ADDl 'l'I () K A L J~XEIW lSES. 
I. DIE KRAAl EN DIE JAKKALS. 
'u Ilongerige kraai vlie eendag b.v 'n huis verby, PH 
tleur 'n oop veuster sien hy 'n groot stnk kaas op 1lie 
tafel ill die eetkamer le. Hy gryp die stuk kaas en 
die daannee na 'n boom om <lit daar lPkker le gaan 
opeet. Net loc hJ wil begin eet, kom daar 'n jakkals 
wat uok baie lus vir !lie lmas heL ·Die jakkals begin 
toe die kraai te vlei en sl1 vir hum: ,.Jy is tog 'n mom 
voPl ~ Kyk hoP pragtig hlink jou mooi swart vere ~ 
gk is sPker jon stem iR 11et 1:-10 mooi suos jy. fling tog 
assp,hlief vir my, want ek hou so haie vau mooi musiek." 
Die om1o:-lele kraai was so gestrPPl deur <lie vleitaal 
van diP Rlim jakkuls dat hy hom verhPel dit iR regtig 
waar wat die jakkals se. TJy dink SO haiP OOI" homt<elf 
dat hy clie stuk kaas en sy hong·er lweltemal vergeet. 
IT y maak Hy bek oop om sy mooi stem te laat hoor, Pn 
1lif\ stuk kaas val op die grond, waar diP jakkn.ls dit gryp 
Pn uaarmee weghn.rdloop. Te laat sien die dwa.;;p 
kraai nou dn.t hy gPkul iH rleur clie deiPJ'. 
EXERCISE 70.-HPacl this little stnrv oYer l'arefullv, 
then l'lm;e >our book, nnd try to te"II it in your o,;u 
words. · 
EXERCISE 71.-Head thi'l storv onr carefullv once 
more, then close your hook m{d write down th"e story 
in ynur owu worrl'l, aftprw:ll'dR l'Pferring t n the 
original tn r·mTPrt your mi-,takPs. 
FOR ENULISH S'JTDKNTS 16!1 
EXERCISE 72.- -Pick out all the nouns in thi-, ,;tor,\, 
and give their singular and their plural. 
EXERCISE 73.-Pick out all the adjectives, and g'lVt' 
their rle-grees o£ eomparison. 
EXERCISE 74.-~Iake vour own short seuiences with 
each of thP YPrh-; in· thi" story. 
EXERCISE 75.-Piek out all the Prepositions and 
Conjunctions in this story, and make your owu 
short ~entenCPS with E'tt<'h n£ thPm. 
II. SINDERELLA. 
Daar was t·endag 'n r,vk man wa t n baie goeie 
\Tou g·ehad hPt ell 'n Laic nwoi dogtcr. I•~endag word 
sy \TOU erg· siek, en toe Ay voel dat sy sal sterwe, roep 
sy haar dog-tf'I' en se vir haar: ,~1y kind, wees altyd 
vroom en goed, en dan sal God jou hewaar, en ek sal 
altyd op jou neersien uit die hcmel." 1\ort damna is 
sy dood. Die dogter het E'lke clag gaan huil up die 
gra£ van haar nwedE'r, maar die man het 'n jaar daarn:.t 
weer getrou md 'n vrou wat t we<' baie mooi dogtel'H 
gehad lwt. fiiertlie t WPC t1og-tPrs was vreeslik jaloor~ 
op hullP mooi stieftmstPr, PH het haar haiP wreed 
hchandel. Hulle hE't haar weggeja na die kombuis toP. 
en haar mooi klere uitgetrPk en vir haar ou vuil ver­
skeurdf' klerf' aungetrPk. Toe moos ~'.V \'an 1liP morP 
vroeg tot die aand lant in die kombuis werk, en 1mug-s 
tlaar slaap. Om !lat sy altyd vuil en vol as wa.'l, het hulle 
haar die naam geg-ce van SinuerE'lla. VerdPr het hullP 
haar mishandrl Ao vePl 314 hullP kou, E'll haar lewe 
verbitter. Hinderella lwt maar altyd gaan huil op 
hanr moeder se gra£. 
Eendag ry haar pa l10l']J-toe en vra wat hy vir HY 
Jrio dogten; moet ~aambring-. Die twE'e ,;tiefdogters 
170 :\L\SKE\Y :\JILLEH'H "\J•'IUK.UX<.; GH.L\1:\L\H 
vra juwele en fraai ldere, IU:n.tr Simlerella .-.e hy moel 
vir haar die eerste tak wat teen sy hurd sluau, afbreek 
en saambring. 'foe hy terug-kom, hri11g hy vir "'Y tWPI' 
stiefdogters juwele Pn fraai klPle, maar vir ~inderellu 
hring hy 'n druneiak. f'y plant toP dir <lennrtak up 
haar moeder :-;r g1U£ Pn mnak eli<; ~o tlilnvels nat mei 
lwar trane Jat dit 'n prngtige grout Luum word. Elke 
maul ns Rinderrlla omler claanlie l11111lll kmn huil en 
l1id, sit daar bo in t-oy top 'n ·wit voeltjiP, en a:-; sy iets 
hardop vra, <lau p;ooi die• voeltjie vir haar af JH"t wat 
sy wil he. 
'n Tyu daarua Lesid diP koniug vau clir land 'u 
grout fees wat ch·ie rlne sou clunr, en waarop die prius 
vir hom 'u nou Roll kiPH uit al die mooi meisies van din 
Janel. 'l'oe diP t wee sliPfdog!ers hour da! die kuuing 
ul dit" mooi meiRic'l! nm diP land uitgeunoi lwt na die 
fees toP, Wll~ lmlle haiP ld,\, \Hilit lll!ll1' l1et gedink clat 
Pen vun hullr I'Pkc"r lwningilt ~nu \YC)]'(l. Ninderella 
moe~ ioe hullP harP kam <'II vir hullt' nwoi aantrek, 
maar toe sv vir haar ~tiefmoedpr vra om ook saam te­
gaan na die, feeH toe, lag lmllP ''ir haar uit en stum 
haar kombui.~-toP. ,, \Vat;'' He lmar stiPfmoeder, 
, wil jy met jou vnil ldf'l'e uok freH-loP gaau om mr 
mooi oogiers in tlie HknnclP te strek? Loop l'it maar 
i.u die ~~~. PH cloeu jou werk <;c•n'l gpwooulik ~" En 
to0 gann hulle almal Holik "L'g 1w cliP koniug se paleis 
toe, en armp Sinderdla 1tl~ {JPHl'ig 'lit i11 clio lwmhui.;;. 
:Jiaar tol' hulle almal WPg' wa.,, spriug- ss up ell ]Jartl-
loop na haar ma Hl" gTaf !liP. lhwr ga:w sy lllHler rlit> 
clPune hoom staun P u ToPp : -
,Skud jou, deunelJOnm van uir "'tHHl, 
gn gooi Yir my uf .-.ilwer en goucl ~ " 
Bu die Yoeltjie gooi vir hnar pmgtige klere van 
guucl en silwer a£, en mooi syskoentjies. R,v trrk 
gou-gou haur on vuil ldere uit, £'11 clio pragtige klNfl en 
skoene aun, en toe gaan s-sT ook ua die fees toe in die 
koning He paleis. Toe ~'Y rlaar kom, "'as al clie mense 
171 
verlmus ullr lwal' ,kuuuLeitl, t•n llie priutJ wuu Jie heh­
uund met niemuntl awlL'1'f' a.; mPt haar clans nie. Self.~ 
toe clit lnut word in tlie aatHl, wuu hy haar nie laat gaan 
niP, tmwr f'Y ltm·tlluu11 Wl'/l vall hum uf na die demw­
boom op hua1· ma He gwf. Daar tr<'k 14,\ WPer huar Oll 
vuil klPn' aau, l'll clil' YoL'Hjil' ltt•Pm Wl'Pl' die mooi klere 
tPrug, Pn tot• haut ouer" en -;i.iPf<>1ll4tPn; h,v die huiR kom, 
krv hullt! hanr wt•er i11 t1ie komlmi" nPi suus bulle hnat· 
lat~t h1y hei. 
Die volgt'tHlt• <lag tloPn :,:y WPPr diP;;L'lfde, Pn diP 
prius wurd llftg' ItH:'l'r VPrlief op hatu·. J)jp ll<'nle dag 
gaun sy Wl'Pl' ttlldtT tlie tll'llTl~ huom stmm e11 nwp WPPl' :-
,Skud jttU. tll'tllll'hOttlll YUH Jio WuUtl, 
Eu gooi Yir my a f silwer Pll goucl ~ " 
En di(. slag g'tltll die \ 11i;ltjie vir ltaar at lderp wat 
nog l.::1i!' mooiPr i-. as lliP vorigl' ld<>Te, en twoe t'koPntjie, 
vult pure g·ttml. Up hienhe laa'4te tlag van die feP'l 
hPt die prittf' 11l's1uit llat tlie mooi lllt'isic hum uit• weer 
HOU ont-;nap lti<', l'll tue l'ry die auntl luut WPPr weg­
hanlloop, hurdlttop hy agtPtna so vinuig us h,v kolt. 
~luar sy wu" 1e goon vir hum, en hy lt1Ul'H bedrne± 
i.Prug-kePr uu tliP pulei~ l11P. ~Iaar van diP vinnig 
hart1loolt 1wt PPll vtm lt.1:tr guue Hktwutjie:-; uitgcval. 
Die prins i.t-1 <lit up l'Tl t'P vir ~:v ra tlllt hy lu>t HUl troll 
mPt tlie llll'isie wui t1aanlit> guuP skut•Htjie uau haar vnet 
kan kr~'. "\1 <lic llll'iHiP-. op diP fPP" prolll'Pr btP om di<' 
t'koPntjiP aun 11' irl'k, 111aur bulle kon nie, want lty wa-; 
te klein. Tot• kom Sillfh•rPlla SP t'tiL•fsustPrH probeN. 
:Jlnar ool, hulle kon tliP 1-'kocntjiP nie aanluy niP, al was 
hullP vnete haiP klei1t. 'l'nP Rl; hn1le ma hullc moei 
hullP grooi. tont' Pn huk:.,kPnP aft<ny, tLm Hal die skopntjie 
seker pa"i. IIu11L' wuu Ho gruug koniugiu word dul 
hulle dit doen. :Jiuar dit hel11 allP"i niks. Tot) \TU 
die prim vir hulle ma of ".V nie uug dogters het nic. 
,Ja," "(' die ma, ,l'k lwt nog 'n stieftlogter, maar sy 
is ;;o vuil dat ek :-;\mum is om haar iP laat kum." ~faar 
die prins se H,V lllt\l't haar but haal. Toe ~inderella 
tluar iu die pulei;; kom ill !war vuil ;;lukkentle klt>1e, lug 
al die ander mei;;ies lekker, maar toe sy die goue 
skoentjiP ;;o maklik aan ha::tr voet trek, lag bulle nib; 
meer niP. Die prill'l was net so verwonrlerd ;;oos al 
die ander mense, en toe hy rpg na 8inderella kyk, ;;al 
hy sien dat sy die pragtigP mrisie is met wie hy eli~ 
vorige dril:' dae g<'clans het. Hy gee toe order dat 
bulle dadrlik haar ou vuil kh•re moet uittrPk eu vir haar 
pragtige klere van goud Pn ;;ilwer mo<'t aantrek. 
Daarna Rit hy haar op sy penl en ry 'veg met haar 1m 
sy eie puleis toe, t'n toe hnlle h,v lwur ma ~<' graf verb,\ ­
kom, sing die VoeJtjie bo in die dennPbOOlll :-
''Die edel;;te en mooiste vron 
h diP regte ln·uid vir jou.'' 
Die koning het toe 'n skitterenrle hruilo£ gegec om 
die prins se huwelik te vier, maar ~ind<'rella se t"wee 
stiefsuster;; het hlind gewnrd van pm·p telenrstelling Pn 
afguns. 
EXERCISE 76,-Hear.l this slory over very carpfully 
and aloud. Then cloHe vour book uurl tell it in 
your own words orally or i~ writing. 
EXERCISE 77,-l)ick out ull the wrbs in this '!Lor,v, 
and make short spntenres with ear·h nne. 
EXERCISE 78.-Pick ont all tho prepositions and von­
junctions, and use them in shnrt sentenres of your 
own composition. 
EXERCISE 79.-Answer thP following r1uestinns in 
romplete sentences:-
(a) Wai was Rinderella se ma sr laaste woorde uuu 
haar dogter? 
(1) Hoe bet Sinderplla se -;tiefRmtels mel haar 
gemaak? 
l•'OR !~XU Ll:-ill ~'JTDK:\'TS 173 
(l') Wut lwi. die :-iidlloglPrs vir hulle vu gPvra io!' 
hy dt•rp-ine ry ~ \Vat hPt t-limlerella gevra r 
(n) \Yai hd ~i111lerella llH'i haar lll'(".;rnt gemaak~ 
(el \\rnarom l1Pi tlir l<olllllg' 'n fl·P:- iH"g'f'P~ 
(t'J \Yni hPi SiuLlPrella ~P Hti!'fmnrrlPr gl'-..l~ loP H.Y 
vra om uok ,;nam I P gaan fePs-tnr r 
(g) \Yut hd Sill!lPJPllu g'l'dt~Pll na hullL' wrg· is ft>PS-
1 ()(' ~ 
\h) YPriPl wut mrt t->in!lrrrllu gel•rur hrt op tliP 
frP<.. 
(i) \Vat ltt>i g·pheur Jltl tliP prin-4 SilHlPrPlla sr goul' 
Hkoentjil' opgPtL•l hrl? 
l.i) \Vat hrt vttrt haar ,;jjpfsn,;i PI'-4 gr,vorrl ~ 
Ill. OOM TYS EN DIE BOBBEJAAN. 
llmn '1\·s do Drl'l' Yan LPkkenhaai 
Ret D kl~Prs vo1 panquHm gesaai; 
)Jaar ug ~ I lum 'Iys mops hittt>l' kla 
I hnda t clir boh brjvne pla 
E11 wer'4kaf in sy lanclery; 
II v kon hul uir in lumrle krv. 
II~e hy bckruiv, wat h,\ hrl~lilll, 
X eef KePs is vir uom Ty;.; i e slim. 
Slagy"lter:- stel h,r vir hu1 op, 
.Maar wat! Kee"i het clit omgeto~kol• ~ 
Toe stel hy sy grwert· !lnarhy, 
~1aar daarop brt Kt>es IJerll gery ! 
ToE' stel hv WCf'l' 'n wnlwr>ltok, 
~Jaur l\ep~ ~(>: tlit H'l'HtUHJl LIUH nk ~ 
'J'up JlPlllh OOlll 1'y-; vir LlaP lUllg', 
Hoe ho1dll'jmJC i.og i.P vang. 
JU MARKEW ;\liLLER'S AI<'RlKAANS GltA~DrAR 
En kyk, daar kum uie .,limme man 
Glad op 'n splinternuwe plan! 
Hy neem 'n ronde rooi pampoeu, 
En wat dink julle gaan hy doen ~ 
IIy sny 'u gaat na binuekant 
Net groot genoeg Yir Kees se hand; 
Toen gaan by agter 'n kriebos wag, 
En se: vandag ~-oul 'k lPkker lag. 
Kees kom; hy ~-oteek sy handjie in, 
E,n se: maar hoor, tlis na my sin ~ 
Hy maak sy hand met pitte vol, 
Toe word dit nes 'n krieketbol! 
}Iaar toe hy op RY blyste was, 
Vind Kesie uit, sy hand sit Yas ! 
lly ruk en pluk so van sy ly£, 
Maar ag! die pitie hou hom sty£. 
Daur kom oom Tys met die samuok, 
Geweer, }Jatrone, Pn 'n stok; 
Hy loop hom storm en se: hier jy ! 
Vandag Ral jy jou pakkie kry; 
Kees huil en soebat in sy taal, 
~laur ag ~ oom Tys is hard a 'I s1.aal; 
Hy slaat our rug, E'n kop en poot; 
'roe skiet hy arme Kcsie dood. 
- TV. Hoshoff. 
EXERCISE 80.-Head this poem aloud a few times, 
and then givE' the contents in your own words. 
EXERCISE 81.-Pick out all the prepositions and 
conjunctions in this poPm, and nRc E'ach of them 
in a short sen tenee. 
EXERCISE 82.-Give in your own words (in Afr.i­
ka:ms) a short summary of the contents of each 
verse. 
IV. HAStE EN SKILPAD. 
Dit was 'n pragtige lentemore: die son hot lekkor 
geskyn na Jio reen, die veld was met jong groen gras 
l1edek, en al die diere was nulik. Die voeltjies het 
rondgevlie t us sen dio bosoe PH g-esing so hard us hulle 
maar kon om to wys hoe hly hulle was om up sn'n lieflike 
more ie kall lewe. :-;elfs die lui skilpud het onder die 
klip uitgekrui11 waur hy gedu1cnde die reen golo en slaup 
het, L'll het mPt sy kurt. beentjies so vinnig as hy kon na 
diLl groeu gr,li.l g-Pst.ap om te gaan ontbyt. Terwyl hy 
noo· ,o met sv lano· nek ,·urcntoe 1wur kom hasie met 
;;y lang oro by hum" verhy. llusiP was ;wt so vrolik sous 
ul diP ander diere; Pn tot' hy vir ;;kilpurl sien, hars hy 
hanl uit van die lag. , \V ut lag jy so onbesko_f, jou 
unnosPle languor~" vru ;;kilpuJ ewo \'ercrg. ,,T·~k het 
rode genoeg om te lag," so hasie ewe bruiual, ,as ek 
siell hue stadig jy met jon grlapt.e l1roek voreutoe 
:,ukkel ~" En lty skater Ynn tlio lag. Skilpad 
was 11uu so kwa:ul dat hy glaJ uic kan praat 11ie, en 
hasie llans roHdom hom vall pure ]n·et. ,Kom, oom 
skilpad," spot hy verder, , , kom om; t wrc hanlloop resies ! 
()om sal sekt·r vir my klop, want tJOm hot so'n mooi 
,portsbroekir aan da1. oum seker hnie Yinniger CJS ek kan 
hardloup ~" .,Gue<l." st> die skilpatl, ,ek neem juu uil ­
daging aan, en rk sal vir j011 wys lwo 'n mens gruot­
praterR moei hrhamlel!" ,Ha, ha, ha!" lag hasie, 
Pn h,v svrin~r Jriemaal our .-kilpad se rug, heen en terug . 
.,K,vk oom," -.<~ h,v toe, ,,;;.ieu tHlm daunlie groot wit 
klip daar Yer ll1 die Yela; ])aarnatoC sal OllR hardloup; 
en die eeu wat die eer;,te daa1 aankom, moot net skree: 
,llier }, ek ~ " en dit sal <lie teken wees dat hy gewen 
het.'' ,CJoe<l," se t:.kilpad hierop, ,ck iR tevrede Uaar­
mee, maar ek kau nic nou al hurdloup nie. Gee Yir my 
eers twee uur tyd urn hieHlie lekker groen gras a£ tc 
eet, en dan sal ek stork gcnoeg ,·oel om tern jou te hard­
loop en juu le wys dat jy nooii. jou teem:tnnder te gering 
muet skat nil'~., .,~ou ja," se hasie, ,ek gaan ook 
JiG :\!ASKEW :\lff.LRH'S .\I•'HJJUAX"< C:HA)J:\IAH 
eers in die huPl' ::-r lwriuglauJ my onth,v1. nP<'tll, en olll 
twPe uur is ek weer hier om vir oom mv hak.,keue tP 
wyR." Daarop vrrdwyn haRie met g-root · spronge agtPl' 
die boRsies, maar skilpad rnep s,v non, wat net sooR hy 
lyk, en sP. vir haar f-.:V moPi t1adelik 1111 die grooi wit ]dip 
loP loop en daar gaan Rit, I'll f-.ollm UR haf-.ir tlnar aanlmm, 
moet sy RkreP: ,,ITiPr is ek:" !Jy f-.plf \TePt ioP maar 
rustig arm dir gn1'l tot hasie na t" ee uur WPer ''.'1 Yt•r­
skyning maak e11 vir hom S<~ dit is JIOU tycl vir die 
Wedloop om le begin. TI uJle spri11g <lan tm• ook gp}_vk 
weg, maar in 'n oomblik RP tyd "'as basip met gro11t 
spronge oor die bossiPs vrnlwyu, :-oJui skilpud nog net 
so nou en <lan HY wit siPri sieu soaR hy nor diP llOsRiP" 
Hpring. f-\kilpad draai ioe ewP 11t'<laard om PH wag op 
wat Hal geheur. Tiasie kyk so'u "lag om tor hy nah.v 
die wit ldip kom, tuaar hy sien 11iks vun :-kilpad mrt R~' 
gelaptP hroekie nie en hPgin weer h:ll'!!op lag hy <liP 
gedagfe dat by vir skiJpud SO Vel' niigP:-tnf Jwi. )Jaar 
hy skrik hom h,vnrt lam toP h~' OJH'l'lll-i va11 die ldi1, nf 'n 
Rtem hoar skreP : , , IIier is e k ! '' )f et hfwpudP betl!' 
kom hy nader Pl1 - ja waarlik: clam· si:lan ~kilpad 
alrreds hy diP WPnpaul! ,\llPW<~reld, oom: ·' rol'P hasit' 
nou hPPltPmal rlroukgr"hwu, , ,hoe lH't oom so gou hier 
grkom?" , Cleha.rrlloop natnurlik: " ant wnord skilpad 
se \TOU; ,dink jy dan jy ka11 allrr11 lwnlloop :-'" ITaf-.it• 
kon huil van trlrnrRiPlliug rn RkamniP, maar by wa'l ir> 
trot" om tP rrken cla t lry Yf'l'l onr ltrt. ,Ek di11 k tli t i;.; 
maar 11et grlnk rlai oom.r'f'J".,tl' ltiPr :iaJlg'Pkom b ... t. Knm 
ouR hardloop nou wePr terng, clan snl ek wys wat Pk kan 
doPn!" ,,Goed,'' ;-.[• <liP "kilpad, ,,kum maar!" tioo,<., 
die wint1 was ha"ie wPg-, Pll Ronc1rr omkyk hardloop hy 
net so hard as hy kan tt'rug; manr hy Yal hyna fiou van 
Rkrik toe by hy die weupaal aankom en vir skilpad WN'r 
voor hom daar sieu Htaan. ])ip nPrrlaal-!' was ernmual 
teVPPl vir hom, eu Ry moNl waR gPhrrek. )lPt sy orP 
plat op sy rug hurclloop h~ wPg so vrr as hy kon Pn gaan 
vir hom in die bossies wegsieek. lly waR t<' Rkaam om 
ooit WPPr in die dag voor die antler diNe ie verskyn. 
177 
Yan t!aanlie dug a£ versteek hasic vir l1om aHyd agiPr 
clie ho:-.:-.it'H geclm·l'llllt' die clag en eers RUUllb laat, as skil ­
pad en sy \TOll l'll t!ie under tliPTC' Rlaap, kom hy skaam­
..;kaam nit "-Y skuilplek om kus te Rock in die boer He 
Kuailantle. Sn gaan dit met groutpratf'r" ~ 
EXERCISE 83,-,\.nswer eaeh of the tolluwiug lllH'K-
tinns iu one (or more) l'Ompleie Keutf'JWE'K :-
(a) \Vatter iy1J van die juur \YUS dit r 
( lJ) lies ln·ywe die dag. 
(e) "\Y:d het dieHkilpaclgaau !lot>n:' 
(t}) \Vif' het hom loe 1lanr !llllmOPt r 
(e) Get' diP g·e'lprek tnssPn Rkilpatl en hasie iu u 
l'lP wuul'<ll' >Veer. 
WtllllH'l'l" ... ou h,\ hnrdloup ~ 
(g) "'at ,ou by iuiuHHPn due11; gn ha1-1it' ~ 
(h) \Vat l!Pt Nkilpacl werklik iu claanlie tyd gedof'll; 
( i) lh·.,krywo dil' We1lluop in u eie wuorcle. 
(j) \\rat hd ha1-1iP gelloen mula( hy die ef'l'ste ma~d 
Vf'rloor het r 
(k) vVat 11:1 sy lwede ll{'(·rlaag; 
(l) \Vaarum kon1 hn:-.il' net 'itiHHH uit die hoH~iP~ h' 
YL'l'Hk,Yll ~ 
V. 01 E AAP EN Dl E KATTE. 
Twee knt tP het l'l'tHlag 'laam 'n Htu];; kaaR uit 'n 
wiukt>l ge~tt'Pl; Hlttar loe hulle tlii onder lllPlmar wil 
Yt'l'tleel, 'iud lmlle clat PlkPen 'n g'l'OtPr Rtuk wil he a;; sy 
muat. ITulle lwsluit toe om lta die magistraat toe ie 
g-a:111 Pn Yir hom i.e Yl'U om die kaaH vir hulle in twee 
C'We gToot FotukkP te wnlPel. Die magi"ltraat van daardie 
tltn·p in di!:' lantl Yan 1liP tli,•H• wa~-1 'u aap. Toe die twef' 
kattl' ll,\ l1t•m ko111, "ii hy ngtPr 'n tafel in :-.y kantuor 
118 .:\fARKE\Y )IlLLER'~ .\FRIKAA~S GRA~L\IAR 
met ·~ gruot lJril op sy IH'UR ru ly k r£'gtig streng £'n vrr­
RtanJig. ,.Assel1lief, umr. )fagi'>traat," Re die twcP 
katte, verdrrl tog vir o11s hirrdie stuk kaas in tweP 
stukke, sodat elkren van om; tevrcdr sal wees met sy 
stuk." ,Dit is altyd haie morilik om ultwre party'P 
tevrede te stel," se die aap, ',maar ek sal my hes doeu. 
Gro die kaas hier!" lb neem toP 'n Rkaal, brerk dir 
kaas in twre stukkP Pn gt~oi 'n stnk in elke bak van diP 
skaal. Die een stuk WnFI egtrr swaardrr aR die antler. 
Ewe koel nerm die nap l1ir swaan1Pr 'lluk, hyt 'n mond­
vol af, eu Pet dit smaaklik op. }fuar toP iR daardie Riuk 
weer ligtrr as die under. Daarop nPrm hy die twede 
stuk en byt ook daarvan '11 gPdePlte af, mPt di£' gevolg 
dat die Wr£'r ligter is us di£' rrrste stuk. Die katte siPn 
nou dat as diP. vrn1£'ling so verder aangaan, daar gern 
1mas vir lmllP. Hal oorhlv nie. ,AssrltliPf. mnr. }Jagis­
traat," rorp hullP nnu· aHwee uit, .,grP tog maar vir 
ons daarrlie twee- RtukkiPs wat nng oorgehl,v het; on'> is 
non heeltemal tt:'vrrdP! " , . .T a," RP cliP aap, .,jullr 
mag tevre-tle wet'S, maar Pk is niP: lliPrtlit' twep stukkE:' 
wat nog oorgPhly hrt, n1net ek luy vir my moPitr." Rn 
doorlhedar~rrl ee-t hy hulle altwN' np voor cliP oi; van diP 
h'leurgesi.PldP kr~HP, wr~t 11011 tP laat diP waarhrid nn 
die spreekwoord insieu: .,As twrr honclP hnklPi om r>en 
heen, loop dir drrdr nflnl'Ulf'P l1PP11.'' 
EXERCISE 84.-.\n~wer paeh nf thr follnwing· flUPr­
timlH in onP or morr complrtr srntrn('(•s:-
(n) \Vaar het die katle dir krin'l gekr:v~ 
(b) \Vaarom kon 1mlle rlii nie vcrderlnie- ~ 
(c) Wat beslnit hulh' toe om tP clorn~ 
(d) "\Vaar was die magistraat en hoe het hy gelyk :-' 
(e) Wat hPt tlie kutte vir hom gena? 
(f) Wnt \VUS sy antwoord? 
(g) Y PrtPl hoP hy tlie kaas Yl:'l'clPPl hPf. 
I h) \Vat merk tli~ kai.te- omtrent die venleling ~ 
(i) Wat p,(> hulle toe vir hom? 
(j) \Vat antwoord hy rlaarop? 
(k) \Vat doen hy toP? 
(l) 1Vattrr goeie leR het die ka He gelecr? 
VI. DIE MENSLIKE LIGGAAM. 
li~ 
Die liggaam van die menR hestaan uit die kop, die 
lyf, <lie arms Pn die bene. DiP een helfte van die kop 
iR met hare l1edek, waanan die kleur swart, bruin, geel 
of rooi kan wees. AR die menR oud "·onl, val sy hare 
di.kwels uit; sy kopvel is dan kaal r-n blink, en ons ~e 
hy het 'n bleskop. As die hare Hie uitval nie, word 
hulle grys en later hePHemal wit, Pll <;o'n ou man noem 
ons dan 'n grysaarcl. 
Die under 1Jr1He van die 1nens ,e kop heRtaan uit 
sy geRig, waarvau die vernaamste dele <liP volgemle is: 
<lie voorkop, wat glad is g-e<lurPmle sy jeug, maar vol 
rimpels word na sy YePrtigt-<te jaar. Xet onder die voor­
kop sit die twPr- oe, waaroor twPe wyshroue in die vorm 
van twer- bogies iR. Die oe werd bedek deur twPP 
ooglecle, wanraan die ooghare sit. Die klPur van die 
meuR Rf' oog is g·ewoonlik swart, bruin of blou. Die 
vernaamste dele van die oog is die oogappel en die kyker. 
TuRRen diP oe kn ons die neus met die twee ncus­
g-ute, Pn owler t1ir- n~us <lie monel met die holip en die 
onderlip, clio tong Pn diP :{2 tarule wat in Llie twee kake­
hene vassit, en die taude 1JPstaan wper uit voortande, 
oogtande Pn kieRte (agtPr in diB monel). 
Die kop iRaan clie l,vf gPhPg deur mi<ldel van die uek. 
Die lv£ hPRtaan u1t die twee HkouerR, die Hkouerhlaaie, 
die b~rs, <lie maag (met die ingewande) en die 2 sye-. 
Aan die Rkouers is <lie twee arms vasgeheg. Elke ar:m 
heRtaan uit 3 clde: die bo-arm, die voorarm en die hand. 
Die g-elenk wat diP ho-arm lllrt die voornrm verbind, 
noPm on-; cliP cllt>mhool!. Elke hand hPt G vingcrs: tlie 
•luilll, die vooningeJ'S, die miclclPlvingPr, clit• ringYingt'l', 
Pn cliP pin kip; Pll op tlie pnn1 van elkr vinger sit 'n nuPl. 
XPi Hoos diP armH, lwsiaan t1it• hPIH' ook nit :~ tlrle: 
die skenkPl, diP olHlPrhPl'll en diP voe1. DiP gPlenk 
wa t tli P R krn ke 1 met diP nnrlNhPrn vrrhinrl, hrrt diP 
lmie. Xet 1'001" tlir h~llHlP, hd tlie \'IJPtP ook elkren r, 
viiJg'f'l'H mPt naels, maur hulk wmd ionP gPwwm. DiP 
geleuk \\'Ui die hand aan 1lir m·m Pll tlif' YoPi aau t]j,. 
hPPll vPrhind, hPd g'l'wrig, PH '40 praut Oils van 'n hand­
gewrig en '11 nwtgpwrig. 
Die agie·nltt', sagi P d••el van LliP owlPrhl'Pll uoe111 
oll'l die kuit, pn 1lie 1·oorste, lumlP tlPPl tlir '4kerH. 
EXERCIS·E 85.-TrmJHlat,. i11to ~\frikaa11s: -
Tlw hmnuu l1orly t'ulJ'li~b of four pm·h: lhl' heud, 
ihL' tnmk, tlw :mnH, awl tiH• lL·g·,.,. One-half of Uu• 
hPa<l i'l C'OYI'l'Prl with hair, und th!' oiliPl' lwlf i'l <·ulled 
the fuel'. EvPry l'''r,ml ha;; hY11 1',\'l'S, a HIIHP and a 
mnuih. \Vhat is i ht• c·nl11ur of vour P\'P" ~ )Iv P:YPS un• 
hlm•. 1 havP two par,;: ow· o;1 r>al'l; sidl' or'nn: head. 
\VhPn WP p:row old, wriJ1klP'l ~ippNu in our faf'~R. 1u 
ihe nwuth arP ;{:! iPPih: l!i i11 t•a•·h juw. TllP head i" 
joiHPd to thr inlllk l1,V ihl' ut>ck. From the ;,lwuldi'J'" 
ihl, h'o urms lll"l' ;:u;lpPlH1Pd, :111d ~d 1l1t> l'!lll of ilw arms 
W<' find thr t "''' hallll~ uud thP tPn fiugt>n<. Tlw trunk 
I'Oll,.,i'll;l uf tlJp r·he-;i_, 1 hP '4tonlai•h, j liP l1~lr'k dllf} thP lWII 
'liclel:i. ThP lPg-4 of ;.rnnP 11PO]IlP arP -;lwrt and thir·k; ot 
oi hPrH l1111g' aJJcl thin. Tht• ..,hi11, i he t·tllf, the ankle 
and the foot tll'P all purls of ihe leg·, hut thP dhow and 
the wrist are pur1s of the arm. Othrr partH of the 
human body arP: thP thl'Oat, the l',VehmwH, the- lips, the 
tongnP and the 11ail~. How man,v tePth havr you gni 
i11 yonr lrl\Yl'l' jaw? 
181 
YU(\\lWL\HY. 
A 
ann1rl'k llrPss, 1mt on 
ufguns envy 
afsny r·nt off 
agtpr - afiPr, bPhin1l 
akkers plot"', alTI':-. 
nntwoonl anRWPr 
as , ashe:>, tha11, if 
assehlid plr>tH-H' 
B 
hn k pan, lm kt' 
lmkki fig·ht 
lmn: uit - hn1·si. <mt 
hedu ard l'tllml,\ , <'u11lly 
hPdl'ic c·uver(Pd) 
ltehandel trPtd 
l1ekruip fliulk 
he:> lis <h'<·idP( dl.v) 
heslui i tlN·irlP, tle·l·i -.iun 
hl•staau nit l'Olt:-.i'lt of 
lwstd appoint 
lwwaar prutel't 
hPWPllllP 1J•pmhling 
lwur prP'l"i, struggle 
h1P'lkop hahl hPtl<l 
ltlink shiu<' 
hohLeiaan ba hoou 
bog·il• · -- how 
hnrs - hrl'ast 
hril -- spedarlp,.; 
hrnPk - trousers 
hruilnf wPclrli ng-
hyt · hitP 
D 
duurop t IH'r<'upou 
<lac1Plik - imml'<liate1v 
<lenndak hranch o£" a tir 
tlikwl'l"i - oltPil 
<loo<llwdatll'll - cool aR a 
l.:lll'UIUlJPr 
<lur11 - villngfl 
draai - ' inru 
,]ronkg<'"'luan - floored 
tlwa"lP foolish 
E 
<'gler 
Prken 
t'WP. 
-however 
ac know led go 
quite 
F 
tiuu ' faint 
G 
ga ( lw1e 
gP he ur - ha ppe u 
g-e<lagtP thought 
gl'cleelte ' part 
g·eheg aHa,·hetl 
w·kul l'heatecl 
gelaple 11atdwd 
gelenk - shin 
grringt:1mt =nuderYalue, 
1101<1 cheap 
g-etng faco 
gestreel flattered 
grtrnn fuithful 
18.:! ~IASKI<~W .HJLLER'R AFRIKAAXS UHA.\DIA R 
gevolg - re~mlt 
geweer -~ gun 
gewuunlik ' UHnally 
gewrig =-= joint 
glad -- quite., slippery 
glad niP -: not at all 
gryp = ReiZe 
grysaard = greyheard 
H 
hal\:RkPPn ~- hef'l 
hardloop ~ run 
hasiP =hare 
heeltemal = quite 
hongerig = hungry 
huil - weep 
huwolik - marriage 
ingewande - entrails 
insteek - put in 
J 
jakkals -- jackal 
jaloPr<; ~ jealouc; 
K 
kaal - bald, harP 
kaas =-= cheese 
kakebeen -~ jaw 
kriebos ~~ k:nree-bush 
kees - name for babom1 
kieste = grinders 
kla(e) ~~complain 
klere -= clothes 
klop =beat 
kombuis =-= kitPhen 
kraai ~ - ('l'ow 
kuit - C'alf (of lPg) 
kwaad. -- = angry 
k.vker pupil 
L 
lag · laugh 
lam --- nerveleRs 
lente spring 
lieflik = lovely 
liggaam = ho~ly 
loop storm= Pharge 
lns hPt - feel inclinpn 
M 
maag ~ = stomach 
mekaar -~ PaPh other 
men<~lik ~ hnman 
merk mark, notice 
moed ~" courage 
mneite - diffirulty 
mondvol = mouthful 
N 
na my sin to my liking 
nePrlaag ~~ deff'at 
llE'·Prsien - look down npo11 
liPS ( - nf't ROO<;) - just 
lilm 
nooit - nevt'r 
0 
omskop -= kirk over 
omtrcnt = about 
onbeskof - rudE' 
onnmwl = silly, stupid 
onthyt hreakfnRt 
FOH K:-tGLLSH STUDENTS 18~ 
ontsnap - eHcapP 
oorbly remain over 
opeens - - at oncP 
opstcl ' put up 
op sy blyste ~ n1ost glad 
p 
pnk a 1hra.,hing· 
pas ~fit 
patrone -~ cartridges 
peim; - ' meditate 
perdry - -- ride 
pinkie little finger 
pla(e) - trouble, worry 
pragtig bPautiful 
pret --fun 
R 
red<> reu AOJt 
regtigwaar rPall~-
true 
resieR ~ race:--
rimpel - - wrinkle 
ronrlgPvlie - flew about 
ruk en pluk - tug and pull 
ru::;tig - calmly 
s 
Raans in the evt'ning 
sagto - ' soft 
skaal - pair of scalPs 
"'kaam - - ashamPd 
skat -: trea'lure 
skatpr - roar (with 
laughter) 
skyn -- shine 
skenkf.l --- thigh 
skiet ~' shoot 
skilpad -- tortoise 
Hkouerblaaie - shouldN-
bladcs 
Hkree = shout 
skrik - - get a fright, 
skuilplek - hiding-place 
"lagysterR = traps 
smaaklik -' with reli::;h 
snags - at night 
sny = cut 
Aoclra - aA soon as 
Roebat --~ beg 
sander - without 
spliuternuwe = brandnew 
Hprcekwoord proverb 
staal = stee 1 
Htap -'walk 
stem =voice 
HtPek (in die skande) 
put to shame 
:-;tiefsuster ::;tcp-si::;ter 
sukkcl - struggle 
sT~·aar = heavv, difficult 
sye ~-" sideR · 
syskoPntjiPs , ..., silk AhOPR 
T 
teleurgcstelde ~ diRap-
poinied 
terug back 
terwyl while 
tevrcde ' satisfied 
toe = when, then 
trane = tears 
trots = proud 
t UAI'elt -- betwren 
u 
uiblaging - t·hallenge 
uitgPsto£ - ' beatPn 
ui tnooi invite 
uittrek - take off 
v 
veuster window 
vPrhaas = - astmtisherl 
\·erbeel - imaginP, fauey 
Yl'fflpp} · ' nivifle 
verder · further 
vPril.wyn = il.isappPar 
vpr£' feathers 
verPrg - · annoyPd 
veruaamste - C'hief 
verskeurdf' · · torn 
verskyning appraraH<'B 
verstPek -· hiclP 
vier four 
vinnig -~ quickly 
vlritaal , flattNiiw 
hmguage " 
vlie - flv 
voorkop · foreheatl 
voreni.oe forward 
vra aHk 
vrolik g:1.v 
vroon1 ' pious 
vuil dirty 
w 
waarlwid · truth 
wag = · wait 
Wf'Pl' again, weather 
waggt'Jft · clrivPn nway 
wenpaal winning posi 
wt>rklik ' rPallv 
wrrlo-1kaf · ma.ke ado 
wnlwehok ' wolf-trap 
woud · wo()(l, forest 
wyshrouf' ryrhrows 
'!'his book is vrinted hy Jl1askPw Miller, Limited, 
nt thP Htundal·d Pre~l:5. Cnpe Town. f{i-27 
MASKEW MILLER se 
Nuwe Serie Aardrykskunde 
DEUR 
A. B. LAMONT, M.A., B.Sc. 
In Afrikaans vertaal onder redaksie van PROF. :\I. C. BO'l'HA, M.A. 
;\laskP-w Miller se Aardrykskunde volgens die Nuwe Sillabus 
vir Suid-Afrikaanse Skole. Deur Alexander B. Lamont, 
.:\LA., B.Sc., l'rinsipaal, Opleidingskool, Kimberley, 
Gewese Departmentele Instrukteur, Opvoedings-depart­
ment, Kaap. 
Standerd IV. Suid-Afrika en Europa (kort beskrywe), met 
kaarte en sketse in Afrikaans. 2/6 
Standerd V. Europa en Die Britse Ryk. :\let kaarte en 
sketse in Afrikaans. 2/10 
Standerd VI. Die Britse Domieniums, AsW, Afrika en 
Amerika (kort beskrywe), met kaarlc en sketse in Afrikaans. 
3/3 
MASKEW MILLER se 
Aardry kskunde vir junior Sertifikaat 
Vir Suid-Afrikaanse Skole. 
EUROPA EN AFRIKA 
Gewestelike, Natuurkundige en Praktiese Aardrykskunde 
(1\Iet Kaarte in Afrikaans en Sketse) 
Spesiaal opgestel vir Junior Sertifikaat en Onderwysersertifikate 
DEUR A. B. LAMONT, M.A., B.Sc. 
Oorgesit in Afrikaans deur mev. F J. BOTHA. 5/6 
MASKEW MILLER se 
LANDKAART van SUID .. AFRIKA 
Grootte 40 X 29. Gedruk in tien kleure. Geplak op linne en aan rolle. 12/6 
MASKEW MILLER SE 
Noodsaaklike Skoolboeke 
VIR 
Sekunderc Skole met Afrikaanse Medium. 
Maskew Miller se Geskiedenis vir Junior Sertifikaat. 
(Standerds VII. en VIII. van die Nuwe Kursus van die Sekundere Skool.) 
Deur John Edgar, M.A., Oxford. Met die volgende inhoud ;-
Dee/ A. Geskiedenis van Suid-Afrika tot op Unie. Oorgesit in 
Afrikaans. 7/6 
Dee[ B. Europa in Wording. Algemene Geskiedenis tot op die Renais­
sance. In Afrikaans oorgesit deur P. Imker Hoogenhout, B.A., 
en W. J. du P. Erlank, B.A. 7/6 
Dee[ C. Moderne Geskiedenis tot 1713. Vertaal deur I. W. van der 
Merwe, M.A. 7/6 
Maskew Miller se Geskiedenis vir Matrikulasie. 
(Volgens die Nuwe Leergang). Deur wyle eerw. W. H. Evans, B.A. 
In Afrikaans vertaal onder die redakteurskap van prof. M. C. Botha, M.A. 
Dee[ /. Europese Geskiedenis. Vertaal deur A. H. Broeksma, B.A., LL.B. 
6/­
Deel II. Suid-Afrikaanse Geskiedenis. Vertaal deur J. ) . ) ordaan, B.A. 6/· 
Maskew Miller se Nuwe Sillabus Aardrykskunde vir Junior Sertifikaat 
vir Suid-Mrikaanse Skole. 
Europa en Afrika : Gewestelike, Natuurkundige en Praktiese Aardrykskunde. 
Geskik gemaak vir Junior en Onderwysersertifikaat. (Met Kaarte in 
Afrikaans en Sketse.) Deur A. B. Lamont, M.A., B.Sc. Oorgesit in 
Afrikaans deur mev. M. C. Botha. 5/6 
Maskew Miller se Rekenkunde vir Junior Sertifikaat. 
Deur A. Blair, B.A. Oorgesit in Afrikaans deur I. W. v.d. Merwe, M.A., 
van die S.A. Kollege-Skool, Kaapstad. Met Antwoorde, 5/6, Sonder 
Antwoorde, 4/6, Antwoorde Aileen, l/6 
1111\:111\111~1\1 IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII \l.iil'il 1,1 \Ill 
010742419S 
NWU : Potchefstroomkampus 
Ferdinand Postma-Biblioteek 
nde. 
r, M.A., LL.B., en ). Steph. 
~rtaal deur ). Steph. v.d. 
ovinsie) en Vorms I, II, III. 
taat-Eksamen. 4/9 
rir die Matrikulasie-Eksamen 
4/-
MASKEW MILLER SE 
N oodsaaklike §koolboeke 
VIR 
Sekundere Skole met Afrikaanse Medium. 
Maskew Miller se Trigonometric. 
Vir Matrikulasie. lnsluitende die Vereiste Matematiese T afels. Deur 
Ernest George, B.A., F.C.S. Hersien en bewerk deur Thomas Palmer, 
M.A .. LL.B. Vertaal in Afrikaans deur ]. Steph. v.d. Lingen, B.A., Ph.D. 
5/-
Maskew Miller se Afrikaanse Grammatika. 
Deur l\1. C. Botha, M.A., en ]. F. Burger, M.A. Vyfde druk. 5/· 
Maskew Miller se Afrikaanse Stylleer met Oefeninge. 
Deur M. C. Botha, M.A., en J, F. Burger, M.A. Twede druk. 5/3 
Maskew Miller se Taal en Styl, vir Standerds VII. en VIII. 
Deur lnspekteur P. lmker Hoogenhout, B.A., en Prof. M. C. Botha, 
M.A. 4/3 
Maskew Miller se Afrikaanse Eksamenvraestelle. 
Vir Matrikula;ie, Senior Uniwersiteitseksamen, Hoe• en Hoogste Taalbond. 
Deur J. J, du Preez, M.A., S.A. Kollege-Hoerskool, Kaapstad. 1/6 
Maskew Miller se Afrikaanse Eksamenvrae. 
Vir Junior Sertifikaat. Deur J, J, du Preez, M.A. l/6 
Maskew Miller se Afrikaanse Oefeninge. 
Vir Sekundere Skole. Deur J, Reynolds, M.A .. Senior Onderwyser m 
Afrikaans, S.A. Kollege-Hoerskool, Kaapstad. T wede druk. 3/6 
Maskew Miller se Primi G1adus. 
'n Boek vir die Eerste ]aar gebaseer op die Nuutste Leerplan. Deur 
Theodore Haarhoff, Professor in die Klassieke Lettere, Uniwersiteit van 
die Witwatersrand, Johannesburg. 5/• 
'n Elementcre Biologic. 
Vir gebruik in Suid-Afrikaanse Skole. Deur S. H. Skaife, M.A., M.Sc., 
Ph.D., F.E.S. Skrywer van "Animal Life in South Africa. "Twede druk. 
6/9 
Maskew Miller se Elementere Teksboek vir Natuurkunde en Skeikunde. 
Vir gebruik in Suid-Afrikaanse Skole. Deur W. A. Clegg, B.Sc. (Victoria), 
Prinsipaal, Hoer Jongenskool, Wynberg, en Louis P. Bosman, B.A., B.Sc., 
ens., van die Uniwersiteit van Kaapstad. Vertaal in Afrikaans deur 
J, Steph. v.d. Lingen, B.A., Ph.D. 4/• 
Toetsvrae oor Matriek-Duits. 
Deur 0. G. P. Grosskopf, 0.1., Sekundere Skool, Kroonstad. 2/•